PB-1042431 - D M22 Service Manual

Aesthetic Treatment System
Service Manual
Notes:
1. System and Accessory specifications subject to change without notice.
2. Manual Catalog No. PB-1042431
3. Manual Catalog Version “D”
4. Prepared December, 2016
i
Copyright ©2016, the Lumenis group of companies.
Lumenis Ltd’s marks contained herein represent some of the trademarks or reg-
istered trademarks of Lumenis Ltd. or its subsidiaries and affiliates in the United
States and/or other countries. Unless otherwise noted, all materials are protected as
the copyrights, trade dress, trademarks and/or other intellectual properties owned
by Lumenis Ltd. and/or its subsidiaries and affiliates or by other parties that have
licensed their material to Lumenis.All rights not expressly granted are reserved.
No part of this manual may be reproduced or copied in any form by any means -
graphic, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, typing, or information
retrieval systems -without written permission of Lumenis.
Lumenis, its logo, M22, IPL, ExpertFilters, SapphireCool, Multi-Spot Nd:YAG,
ResurFX, and ChillTip are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Lumenis
Group of Companies.
Caution: US federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a
licensed physician.
ii
Use of Manual:
The M22 system is designed to meet international safety and performance standards.
Personnel operating or servicing the system must have a thorough understanding of
the proper operation of the system.
This manual has been prepared to aid Lumenis-authorized technical personnel to

understand and service the system. Do not operate the system before reading this
manual and gaining a clear understanding of the operation of the system.
Authorized Representative in the European Community

Lumenis (Germany) GmbH
Heinrich-Hertz-Str. 3
Dreieich Dreieichenhain D-63303
Germany
Tel : +49 (0) 6103-8335-0
Manufactured by Lumenis Ltd.

6 Hakidma Street
P.O.B. 240
Yokneam 2069204, Israel
Tel: +972-4-959-9000
DIRECTIVE 2012/19/EU on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment

(WEEE)
In accordance with DIRECTIVE 2012/19/EU on Waste Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (WEEE), any item which is marked with the crossed-out
wheelie bin symbol must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste, but
segregated from other waste types for eventual treatment and recovery at an
approved recycling facility.
By returning waste electrical and electronic equipment via the correct

segregated disposal channel, users can ensure the environmentally sound
treatment and disposal of the waste equipment, thereby reducing the potential
for any environmental or health risks that could arise as a result of incorrect
disposal.
Lumenis provides web-based collection, recycling and reporting arrangements

to the business end-user for equipment marked with the crossed-out wheelie
bin. Please visit www.lumenis.com/recycling to understand what arrangements
Lumenis has made in each EU Member State.
iii
PHYSICIAN RESPONSIBILITY
Federal (USA) law restricts prescription medical devices to sale by or

on the order of a physician, or properly licensed practitioner. That
physician will be responsible for the use and operation of the device
and for all user qualifications. Lumenis makes no representations
regarding federal, state or local laws or regulations that might apply to
the use and operation of any medical device. The physician is
responsible for contacting his or her local licensing agencies to
determine any credentials required by law for clinical use and operation
of the device.
MAINTENANCE
The M22 system is a precision, technical medical device that requires

routine service as well as consumable parts. All service must be
performed by a Lumenis technician and all parts must be purchased
from Lumenis. Failure to obtain service and parts through Lumenis
voids all warranties, express and implied. Please call Lumenis or your
local representative for details.
MODIFICATION OF DEVICE
Unauthorized modification of the hardware, software or specifications

of the system voids all warranties, express and implied. Lumenis takes
no responsibility for the use or operation of such a device.
RESALE INSPECTION
The M22 system is a precision, technical medical device. If any

Lumenis device is resold by anyone other than an authorized sales
representative, Lumenis offers a resale inspection by a Lumenis
technician to assure that the device is working in accordance with
manufacturer's specifications. Using the device after it has been resold
and before it has been inspected is a misuse of the device, which may
result in injuries and voids all warranties, express and implied.
RELEVANT DOCUMENTS
M22 System Operator Manual (P/N # UM-1024721)
iv
Publication No. Revision Description Date
PB-1042430 0 Draft Release June, 2009
PB-1042430 A First Release September, 2009
Addition of ResurFX
Module Chapter,
PB-1042431 A April, 2013
procedures and spare parts
updates
Addition of Q-Switched
Nd:YAG Module Chapter,
PB-1042431 B December, 2013
procedures and spare parts
updates
Replace Label LB-1033202
with LB-1033203
PB-1042431 C April, 2014
Replace Lumenis Logo with
new Logo
Added Rev D to template
footer
Added Section 1.3.1 FSE

Work Guidelines
Updated Section 2.11

PB-1042431 D Warning Certification and December 2016
Identification Labels
Revised Section 3.11

Installation Report
Revised Section 8.15

Preventive Maintenance
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1: System Overview
1.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 System Preparation ...................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Scope of this Manual ................................................................................... 1-2

1.3.1 FSE Work Guidelines ..................................................................................1-2
1.4 Manual Conventions.................................................................................... 1-4
1.4.1 Physician Responsibility...............................................................................1-5
1.4.2 Maintenance .................................................................................................1-5
1.4.3 Modification of Device .................................................................................1-5
1.4.4 Resale Inspection..........................................................................................1-5
1.5 Abbreviations and Acronyms ...................................................................... 1-7
1.6 Introduction to the System........................................................................... 1-9

1.6.1 Treatment Parameters ................................................................................1-10
Chapter 2: Safety
2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Software Safety Features (Software States) ................................................ 2-3
2.3 The Treatment Room................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Major Precautions, Cautions and Warnings ................................................ 2-4

2.4.1 Precautions...................................................................................................2-5
2.4.2 Cautions........................................................................................................2-5
2.4.3 Warnings Related to Laser and Intense Pulsed Light Emission ..................2-5
2.4.4 The Handpieces ............................................................................................2-6
2.4.5 Warnings Related to the Laser Handpiece...................................................2-6
2.4.6 Warnings Related to the Optical Filter in the Universal IPL Handpiece ....2-7
2.5 Optical Safety .............................................................................................. 2-7
2.5.1 M22 System protective Eyewear.................................................................2-10
2.6 Electrical and Mechanical Safety .............................................................. 2-12
2.6.1 Residual Current Circuit Breaker ..............................................................2-12
2.7 Fire Hazards............................................................................................... 2-12
2.8 Operating Precautions................................................................................ 2-13
2.9 System Safety Features.............................................................................. 2-13

2.9.1 Password ....................................................................................................2-13
PB-1042431 Rev D vii

M22TM Service Manual
2.9.2 Emergency Shutoff Knob ............................................................................2-14

2.9.3 Ready and Standby Buttons ........................................................................2-14
2.9.4 Emission Indicators....................................................................................2-14
2.9.5 Safety Switch...............................................................................................2-15
2.9.6 Idle Mode....................................................................................................2-15
2.9.7 Remote Interlock Connector.......................................................................2-15
2.9.8 Electro-Mechanical Safety Shutter.............................................................2-15
2.10 Equipment Classification........................................................................... 2-15
2.11 Warning, Certification and Identification Labels ...................................... 2-16

2.11.1 Symbols Descriptions ...............................................................................2-18
2.12 EMC Guidance and Manufacturer’s Declaration ...................................... 2-21
2.12.1 Electromagnetic Emissions ......................................................................2-21
2.12.2 Electromagnetic Immunity .......................................................................2-22
2.12.3 Recommended Separation Distances .......................................................2-24
Chapter 3: Installation
3.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Facility Requirements.................................................................................. 3-2

3.2.1 Electrical Requirements ...............................................................................3-2
3.2.2 Space and Positioning Requirements ...........................................................3-3
3.2.3 Environmental Requirements .......................................................................3-4
3.2.4 Remote Interlock Connection (Optional) .....................................................3-4
3.2.5 Required Tools for Installation ....................................................................3-6
3.3 Unpacking and Installation for M22............................................................ 3-7
3.3.1 Unpacking the System ..................................................................................3-7
3.3.2 Universal IPL Handpiece’s Cradle Installation ........................................3-13
3.3.3 Connect/Disconnect the Universal IPL Handpiece....................................3-14
3.3.4 Light Guides and Filters.............................................................................3-14
3.3.5 Filter Assembly Connection and Release ...................................................3-15
3.3.6 IPL SapphireCool Light Guide Installation ...............................................3-16
3.3.7 Filling the Cooling System .........................................................................3-18
3.3.8 Initial System Testing .................................................................................3-19
3.3.9 Testing the System’s Functional Operation ...............................................3-23
3.4 Upgrading the System from Version 2.0 to GUI Software V3.0 (with 24VAC
AUX Filter Harness Installation for Charger Rev 1)3-26
3.4.1 User Presets Backup ..................................................................................3-27
3.4.2 Installing the 24V AC AUX Filter Harness ................................................3-27
3.4.3 Add 2 Mounting Pins to 52-Pin Connector Base .......................................3-31
3.4.4 Setting the BIOS for Software V3.0 ............................................................3-35
3.4.5 GUI Software Upgrade from 2.0 to 3.0......................................................3-38
3.4.6 System Controller DSP Software Installation ...........................................3-44
3.5 Post Installation Steps................................................................................ 3-52
3.5.1 Filter ID Verification..................................................................................3-52
viii PB-1042431 Rev D

3.5.2 IPL Energy Test..........................................................................................3-53
3.6 Unpacking and Installation-
Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Module3-56
3.6.1 Required Tools ...........................................................................................3-56
3.6.2 Unpacking the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Kit ......................................................3-56
3.6.3 Connect the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece..............................................3-58
3.6.4 Enabling the System for Multi-Spot Nd:YAG .............................................3-60
3.6.5 Calibrating the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece ........................................3-65
3.6.6 Post-Installation Checks - Nd:YAG Energy Test .......................................3-67
Q-Switched Nd:YAG Module3-70
3.7.1 Required Tools ...........................................................................................3-70
3.7.2 Unpacking the Q-Switched Nd:YAG Kit ....................................................3-70
3.8 Upgrading the System from Version 3.0 to GUI Software V4.0............... 3-72
3.8.1 System Software Upgrade ..........................................................................3-72
3.8.2 Enabling the System for Q-Switched ..........................................................3-77
3.8.3 Connecting the Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece to the M22 System.........3-80
3.8.4 Inserting Q-Switched Nd:YAG Lens Assembly and Treatment Tips ..........3-81
3.8.5 Turning the System On ...............................................................................3-83
3.8.6 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece Calibration.............................................3-84
3.9 Unpacking and Installation-ResurFX Module........................................... 3-90
3.9.1 Required Tools ...........................................................................................3-91
3.9.2 Unpacking the ResurFX Module ...............................................................3-91
3.9.3 Lowering the Cart for ResurFX..................................................................3-95
3.9.4 Installing the ResurFX Module onto the System ......................................3-100
3.9.5 Filling the Water Tank on the ResurFX Module ......................................3-106
3.9.6 Draining the Water from the ResurFX Module........................................3-108
3.9.7 Enabling the System for ResurFX ............................................................3-110
3.9.8 Post-Installation Tests: ResurFX Module ................................................3-117
3.10 Moving, Transporting, and Storage ......................................................... 3-121
3.10.1 Moving the Assembled System................................................................3-121
3.10.2 Disassembling and Transporting the System .........................................3-121
3.11 Installation Report - M22......................................................................... 3-122
3.11.1 M22 System Installation and Initial Testing...........................................3-125
3.11.2 Installation and Initial Testing: M22 with Multi-Spot Nd:YAG.............3-126
3.11.3 Installation and Initial Testing: M22 with
Q-Switched Nd:YAG .................................................................................3-127
3.11.4 Installation and Initial Testing:M22 with ResurFX Module ..................3-128
Chapter 4: General Description

4.1 Introduction to the System........................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Indications for Use....................................................................................... 4-2

4.2.1 IPL Skin Treatments .....................................................................................4-2
PB-1042431 Rev D ix
4.2.2 Vascular Lesions ..........................................................................................4-2

4.2.3 Pigmented Lesions........................................................................................4-3
4.2.4 Hair Removal ...............................................................................................4-4
4.3 System Components and Controls............................................................... 4-5
4.3.1 System Console.............................................................................................4-7
4.3.2 Control Panel and Monitor ..........................................................................4-7
4.3.3 Service Panel ................................................................................................4-9
4.4 Handpieces................................................................................................. 4-14
4.4.1 Spectrum and Filter....................................................................................4-14
4.4.2 Spot Size .....................................................................................................4-14
4.4.3 Fluence .......................................................................................................4-15
4.4.4 Number of Pulses........................................................................................4-15
4.4.5 Pulse Duration ...........................................................................................4-15
4.4.6 Pulse Delay.................................................................................................4-15
4.4.7 Universal IPL Handpiece...........................................................................4-15
4.4.8 Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece ..................................................................4-17
4.4.9 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece ................................................................4-18
4.4.10 ResurFX Handpiece .................................................................................4-20
4.5 System Software ........................................................................................ 4-22
4.6 System Specifications................................................................................ 4-23
4.7 Environmental Requirements .................................................................... 4-24

4.7.1 Air Quality:.................................................................................................4-24
4.7.2 Temperature and Humidity: .......................................................................4-24
4.7.3 Atmospheric Pressure: ...............................................................................4-24
Chapter 5: Functional Description

5.1 Major System Components ......................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 General System Description .........................................................................5-2
5.1.2 M22 System Modules Wiring Connections...................................................5-3
5.2 Touch Screen Monitor ................................................................................. 5-5
5.3 Industrial PC ................................................................................................ 5-7

5.3.1 Connections ..................................................................................................5-7
5.3.2 Functional Specifications .............................................................................5-8
5.4 System Software ........................................................................................ 5-10
5.4.1 Screen Flow................................................................................................5-10
5.4.2 System Software Modules...........................................................................5-11
5.4.3 Main User Screen .......................................................................................5-12
5.4.4 Service Mode ..............................................................................................5-16
5.4.5 LVPS Outputs .............................................................................................5-16
5.5 Interface Module........................................................................................ 5-16
5.5.1 Interface Module Functional Description ..................................................5-19
x PB-1042431 Rev D
5.6 Charger and 24V DC Power Supply Modules........................................... 5-25
5.6.1 General Principle of Operation .................................................................5-28
5.6.2 Logic Description .......................................................................................5-30
5.7 Capacitor Bank .......................................................................................... 5-33
5.8 Switching Module...................................................................................... 5-33

5.8.1 Signal Details ............................................................................................5-34
5.9 Handpiece Components ............................................................................. 5-36
5.9.1 Handpiece Connector.................................................................................5-36
5.9.2 Universal IPL Handpiece...........................................................................5-38
5.9.3 Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece ..................................................................5-41
5.10 Cooling System.......................................................................................... 5-44
5.10.1 Water Tank ...............................................................................................5-48
5.10.2 Pump.........................................................................................................5-48
5.10.3 Flow Switch ..............................................................................................5-49
5.10.4 Radiator and Fan Assembly .....................................................................5-49
5.10.5 System Temperature Sensor .....................................................................5-50
5.10.6 DI Filter....................................................................................................5-50
Chapter 6: ResurFX Module

6.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Functional Description................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Module Specifications ................................................................................. 6-7
6.4 Major Module Components......................................................................... 6-8

6.4.1 Low Voltage Power Supply ..........................................................................6-8
6.4.2 ResurFX Main Controller ..........................................................................6-10
6.4.3 Scanner Controller .....................................................................................6-13
6.4.4 Scanner Controller Board ..........................................................................6-13
6.4.5 Cooling System ...........................................................................................6-16
6.5 Fiber Laser Module.................................................................................... 6-20
6.6 Footswitch ................................................................................................. 6-21
6.7 ResurFX Handpiece................................................................................... 6-22

6.7.1 Trigger and Tip Identification....................................................................6-24
6.7.2 Aiming Beam ..............................................................................................6-24
6.7.3 Handpiece Connector.................................................................................6-24
6.7.4 Lasing Control............................................................................................6-26
6.7.5 ResurFX Rear Panel...................................................................................6-26
6.8 ResurFX Software ..................................................................................... 6-28
6.8.1 Graphic User Interface ..............................................................................6-29
6.8.2 Calibration .................................................................................................6-32
PB-1042431 Rev D xi
6.8.3 ResurFX Module Screens ...........................................................................6-34

6.9 ResurFX Software Installation .................................................................. 6-49
6.9.1 Introduction ................................................................................................6-49
6.9.2 ResurFX Controller Software (DSP)..........................................................6-49
6.9.3 MCU Software Installation ........................................................................6-58
6.9.4 Scanner Controller Software Installation ..................................................6-65
6.10 ResurFX Parts Replacement ...................................................................... 6-79
6.10.1 General.....................................................................................................6-79
6.10.2 Covers Removal........................................................................................6-79
6.10.3 Removing the ResurFX Module as a Unit ................................................6-80
6.10.4 ResurFX Handpiece Replacement............................................................6-87
6.10.5 Power Supply Replacement ......................................................................6-91
6.10.6 Fiber Laser Replacement .........................................................................6-92
6.10.7 MCU Replacement ...................................................................................6-95
6.10.8 Scanner Controller Replacement .............................................................6-97
6.10.9 Handpiece Connector Replacement .........................................................6-97
6.10.10 Flow Switch Replacement ......................................................................6-99
6.10.11 Radiator Replacement ..........................................................................6-100
6.10.12 Water Tank Replacement......................................................................6-101
6.10.13 Water Line Filter Replacement ............................................................6-103
6.10.14 Pump Replacement ...............................................................................6-103
6.10.15 Locking Latch Replacement .................................................................6-104
6.11 Troubleshooting ResurFX Module .......................................................... 6-106
6.11.1 Handpiece Errors ...................................................................................6-106
6.11.2 Cooling System Errors ...........................................................................6-107
6.11.3 Fiber Laser Errors .................................................................................6-108
6.11.4 RF Controller Errors..............................................................................6-109
6.11.5 Scanner Errors .......................................................................................6-110
6.11.6 Communications Errors .........................................................................6-110
6.11.7 Power Supply Errors ..............................................................................6-111
6.11.8 Warnings ................................................................................................6-111
6.12 Spare Parts for ResurFX .......................................................................... 6-112
6.12.1 Covers and External Components..........................................................6-112
6.12.2 ResurFX Handpiece Components ..........................................................6-114
6.12.3 ResurFX Electrical Modules ..................................................................6-115
6.12.4 ResurFX Electrical Harnesses ...............................................................6-116
6.12.5 ResurFX Cooling System Components...................................................6-118
6.12.6 Miscellaneous.........................................................................................6-120
6.12.7 ResurFX Service Tools ...........................................................................6-122
Chapter 7: Q-Switched Nd:YAG Laser

Handpiece
7.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Functional Description................................................................................. 7-1

7.2.1 Beam Homogenizer ......................................................................................7-3
xii PB-1042431 Rev D

7.2.2 Treatment Tip ...............................................................................................7-4
7.2.3 Lasing Control..............................................................................................7-4
7.2.4 Lens Assembly and Treatment Tips ..............................................................7-4
7.2.5 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece Calibration...............................................7-6
7.2.6 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Factor Calibration Using the Service Screen ............7-8
7.2.7 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Energy Test Using External Power Meter (for Trouble-
shooting Only).............................................................................................7-14
7.3 Spare Parts for Q-Switched Laser.............................................................. 7-18
Chapter 8: Tests, Calibrations and

Maintenance
8.1 Service Screens and Calibrations................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 Accessing the Service Module Screens.........................................................8-1
8.2 Software Installation/Upgrade Procedures .................................................. 8-4
8.2.1 Backup/Restore User Presets .......................................................................8-5
8.2.2 GUI and Operating System Software Installation......................................8-13
8.2.3 System Flash DSP Installation ...................................................................8-16
8.2.4 System Controller DSP Software Installation ............................................8-17
8.3 Water Level Sensor Calibration................................................................. 8-26
8.4 Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) Module Testing and Calibration ..... 8-30
8.4.1 Setting up the System for Calibration.........................................................8-31
8.4.2 5V DC Calibration .....................................................................................8-33
8.4.3 12V DC Calibration ...................................................................................8-35
8.5 Voltage Calibration for Operating the Water Pump .................................. 8-37
8.6 Fan RPM Voltage Calibration ................................................................... 8-39
8.7 IPL Head TEC DC Power Calibration....................................................... 8-41
8.8 High and Low System Temperature Calibration ....................................... 8-45
8.9 Capacitor Voltage Calibration ................................................................... 8-49
8.10 Capacitor Voltage Test .............................................................................. 8-54
8.11 Burning the System Serial Number ........................................................... 8-56
8.12 Procedures for Universal IPL Handpiece by Service ................................ 8-58

8.12.1 Using the Ophir External Power Meter ...................................................8-58
8.12.2 Universal IPL Handpiece Energy Calibration by Service .......................8-60
8.12.3 Universal IPL Energy Test .......................................................................8-67
8.12.4 IPL Handpiece Calibration Using the IPL Calibration Device...............8-69
8.12.5 Resetting the IPL Calibration Device Factor...........................................8-77
8.13 Procedures for Nd:YAG Handpiece .......................................................... 8-89
8.13.1 Nd:YAG Energy Test ................................................................................8-89
PB-1042431 Rev D xiii

8.13.2 Nd:YAG Handpiece Calibration Using the Nd:YAG Calibration Device8-93

8.13.3 Resetting the Nd:YAG Calibration Device Factor by Service ...............8-100
8.14 Preventive Maintenance........................................................................... 8-113
8.14.1 Cleaning the System ...............................................................................8-113
8.14.2 Caring for the Handpieces .....................................................................8-114
8.15 Preventive Maintenance Checklist .......................................................... 8-119
8.15.1 Preventive Maintenance ID....................................................................8-119
8.15.2 Preventive Maintenance Checklist .........................................................8-120
Chapter 9: Troubleshooting
9.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 Troubleshooting Guide Sections.................................................................. 9-3
9.3 Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................................ 9-3

9.3.1 General.........................................................................................................9-3
9.3.2 Error Messages - User .................................................................................9-4
9.3.3 Error Messages - Service .............................................................................9-4
9.4 Malfunctions with No Error Messages ...................................................... 9-15
Chapter 10: Module Replacement

10.1 Introduction................................................................................................ 10-1
10.1.1 Structure of This Chapter .........................................................................10-1
10.2 Covers Removal......................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.1 Left/Right Side Base Panels Replacement................................................10-3
10.2.2 Front Cover Replacement ........................................................................10-4
10.2.3 Left or Right Side Cover Replacement .....................................................10-5
10.2.4 Back Cover Replacement..........................................................................10-7
10.2.5 PC Unit Assembly Replacement ...............................................................10-8
10.2.6 Top Cover Replacement ...........................................................................10-9
10.2.7 Replacing the Top Cover Alignment Pin ................................................10-10
10.2.8 Side Covers Alignment ...........................................................................10-11
10.3 Electrical System Components ................................................................ 10-13
10.3.1 Power Supply Replacement ....................................................................10-13
10.3.2 Capacitor Bank Replacement .................................................................10-19
10.3.3 Switching Module Replacement .............................................................10-23
10.3.4 High Voltage Relay ................................................................................10-26
10.3.5 Interface Module ....................................................................................10-29
10.4 Cooling System Components Replacement ............................................ 10-31
10.4.1 Water Tank Replacement........................................................................10-31
10.4.2 Pump Replacement .................................................................................10-32
10.4.3 Water Level Sensor Replacement ...........................................................10-34
10.4.4 Flow Switch Replacement ......................................................................10-35
xiv PB-1042431 Rev D

10.4.5 Deionizer Replacement...........................................................................10-36
10.4.6 Radiator and Fan ...................................................................................10-39
10.5 Computer Module Replacement .............................................................. 10-43
10.5.1 PC Module Replacement ........................................................................10-43
10.5.2 System Monitor Replacement .................................................................10-47
10.6 Draining/Filling the Cooling System....................................................... 10-56
10.6.1 Draining the Water.................................................................................10-56
10.6.2 Draining the Water Using the Software Application .............................10-56
10.6.3 Filling the Water Tank ...........................................................................10-62
Chapter 11: Spare Parts Catalog

11.1 Introduction................................................................................................ 11-1
11.2 Computer and Display ............................................................................... 11-7
11.3 Electrical Components............................................................................... 11-8
11.4 Cooling System........................................................................................ 11-10
11.5 Covers and Exterior Components............................................................ 11-12
11.6 Miscellaneous .......................................................................................... 11-14
11.7 Treatment Heads & Accessories.............................................................. 11-16
11.8 Special Tools ........................................................................................... 11-19
PB-1042431 Rev D xv
xvi PB-1042431 Rev D

LIST OF FIGURES
Chapter 1: System Overview
Chapter 2: Safety
Figure 2-1 Treatment Room Door Signs ............................................... 2-4
Figure 2-2 Nominal Ocular Hazard Distance (NOHD) Illustration ...... 2-9
Figure 2-3 Warning Certification and Identification Labels ............... 2-17
Chapter 3: Installation
Figure 3-1 Physical Dimensions, M22 and M22
with ResurFX Module ............................................................................ 3-3
Figure 3-2 Remote Interlock Plug Connection ...................................... 3-5
Figure 3-3 3-pin Interlock Plug ............................................................. 3-6
Figure 3-4 Shock and Tilt Indicator Labels ........................................... 3-9
Figure 3-5 System Carton Unpacked................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-6 Cutting Tape on Box .......................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-7 Removing Carton Buffer with Sponge Attached ............... 3-11
Figure 3-8 Removing Handpiece Case and Accessories Box.............. 3-11
Figure 3-9 Removing the Cardboard Dividers .................................... 3-11
Figure 3-10 Removing Box ................................................................. 3-12
Figure 3-11 Removing Unit from Box Base........................................ 3-12
Figure 3-12 Handpiece Cradle Installation .......................................... 3-13
Figure 3-13 Connecting the Handpiece ............................................... 3-14
Figure 3-14 Filter and Light Guide Storage......................................... 3-15
Figure 3-15 Filter Insertion and Release.............................................. 3-15
Figure 3-16 Light Guide Insertion and Release................................... 3-16
Figure 3-17 Refilling the Water Tank.................................................. 3-19
Figure 3-18 Control Panel.................................................................... 3-20
Figure 3-19 Power Cable Receptacle................................................... 3-21
Figure 3-20 Entering BIOS.................................................................. 3-24
Figure 3-21 Date & Time Screen......................................................... 3-24
Figure 3-22 Save to CMOS and Exit Prompt ...................................... 3-25
Figure 3-23 24V AC AUX Filter Harness ........................................... 3-28
Figure 3-24 Disconnecting P10 from Charger..................................... 3-28
Figure 3-25 Connecting the 24V AC AUX Filter Harness (1) ............ 3-29
Figure 3-26 Connecting the 24V AC AUX Filter Harness (2) ............ 3-29
Figure 3-27 Securing the Harness with Tie Wraps.............................. 3-30
Figure 3-28 Top Cover Opened ........................................................... 3-31
Figure 3-29 Releasing Two Large Flat Screws ................................... 3-31
Figure 3-30 52-pin Connector, Bottom View ...................................... 3-32
Figure 3-31 Assembling Two Pins ...................................................... 3-32
Figure 3-32 Tightening Pins ................................................................ 3-33
PB-1042431 Rev D xvii

Figure 3-33 Tightening Pins - Back Pins............................................. 3-33

Figure 3-34 Connector Base - Final View ........................................... 3-34
Figure 3-35 Entering BIOS.................................................................. 3-35
Figure 3-36 Select Integrated Peripherals............................................ 3-36
Figure 3-37 On Board Serial Ports Configuration Screen ................... 3-36
Figure 3-38 BIOS Serial Port Configuration ....................................... 3-37
Figure 3-39 Save to CMOS and Exit Prompt ...................................... 3-38
Figure 3-40 Login Screen .................................................................... 3-39
Figure 3-41 Select Mode Screen.......................................................... 3-39
Figure 3-42 Software Installation Files ............................................... 3-40
Figure 3-43 USB Connection Port....................................................... 3-40
Figure 3-44 Utility Screen ................................................................... 3-40
Figure 3-45 Utility Screen - Select Update Machine........................... 3-41
Figure 3-46 Update Screen - Select Software Updates........................ 3-41
Figure 3-47 Software Installation with Progress Bar........................... 3-42
Figure 3-48 Select Mode Screen- Verify New Software Revision...... 3-43
Figure 3-49 DSP Software Files .......................................................... 3-44
Figure 3-50 Controller Board, Flash Memory Card Location ............. 3-44
Figure 3-53 Shut Down Screen............................................................ 3-46
Figure 3-54 M22 Desktop Screen ........................................................ 3-46
Figure 3-56 My Device Icon................................................................ 3-47
Figure 3-57 USBDisk Icon .................................................................. 3-47
Figure 3-58 FlashWriter Icon .............................................................. 3-48
Figure 3-59 Flash Writer Screen.......................................................... 3-48
Figure 3-60 Select My Device ............................................................. 3-49
Figure 3-61 MRIPL.OUT File ................................................................ 3-49
Figure 3-62 Flash Writer Progress Bar ................................................ 3-50
Figure 3-63 Verification Successful .................................................... 3-51
Figure 3-64 Software DSP and CRC Verification............................... 3-52
Figure 3-65 Detector Head and Power Meter Setup............................ 3-53
Figure 3-66 Energy Test Preset 1 (example) ....................................... 3-54
Figure 3-67 IPL Energy Test ............................................................... 3-55
Figure 3-68 Unpack Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece ......................... 3-57
Figure 3-69 Unpack Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Accessories, Handpiece.... 3-57
Figure 3-70 Handpiece Connection Port ............................................. 3-58
Figure 3-71 Nd:YAG handpiece.......................................................... 3-59
Figure 3-72 Light Guide Storage ........................................................ 3-60
Figure 3-75 Updates Screen................................................................. 3-62
Figure 3-76 Modules Update Screen ................................................... 3-62
Figure 3-77 Prompt to Insert USB Update Key................................... 3-63
xviii PB-1042431 Rev D

Figure 3-79 Upgrade Successful Message........................................... 3-64
Figure 3-80 Error 311 .......................................................................... 3-64
Figure 3-81 Select Mode Screen with Nd:YAG Mode Enabled ......... 3-65
Figure 3-82 Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece Calibration Device
Connected to the System....................................................................... 3-66
Figure 3-84 Energy Test Preset 1 - Nd:YAG ...................................... 3-68
Figure 3-85 Firing Nd:YAG into Power Meter ................................... 3-69
Figure 3-86 Unpack Q-Switched Nd:YAG Accessories, Handpiece .. 3-71
Figure 3-87 Software Version.............................................................. 3-73
Figure 3-88 Update Machine ............................................................... 3-74
Figure 3-89 Software Updates Screen ................................................. 3-74
Figure 3-90 Software Update - Start Button ........................................ 3-75
Figure 3-91 Software Update - Installation Complete Message.......... 3-75
Figure 3-92 Verify Software Update for Q-Switched ......................... 3-76
Figure 3-94 Utility Menu Button on Handpiece Selection Screen ...... 3-77
Figure 3-95 Update Machine Button on Utility Menu Screen............. 3-78
Figure 3-96 Module Update Button on Updates Screen...................... 3-78
Figure 3-97 Start Update Button on Modules Update Screen ............. 3-79
Figure 3-98 OK Pop-Up Window........................................................ 3-79
Figure 3-99 Update Process Completion Pop-Up Window................. 3-80
Figure 3-100 Handpiece Connection Port ........................................... 3-81
Figure 3-101 Q-Switched Lens Assembly and Protective Cap ........... 3-81
Figure 3-102 Q-Switched Metal Treatment Tips and Protective Cap . 3-82
Figure 3-103 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece with Lens Assembly and
Treatment Tip ....................................................................................... 3-83
Figure 3-104 Main Screen with Q-Switch Nd:YAG Handpiece Enabled 3-
84
Figure 3-105 Handpiece Calibration Required Message ..................... 3-85
Figure 3-106 Connect the Q-Switched Calibration Device to the Service
Panel’s Connection Port........................................................................ 3-85
Figure 3-107 Tools Button on Q-Switched Treatment Screen ............ 3-86
Figure 3-108 Tools Screen - Calibration Button ................................. 3-86
Figure 3-109 System Checking Connection to Calibration Device..... 3-87
Figure 3-110 Connection to Calibration Device Established, Ready to Start
Calibration ............................................................................................ 3-87
Figure 3-111 Handpiece Removal Message ........................................ 3-88
Figure 3-112 Calibration in Progress................................................... 3-88
Figure 3-113 Calibration Completed ................................................... 3-89
Figure 3-114 ResurFX Module Box .................................................... 3-92
Figure 3-115 Remove Accessories Box and Foam.............................. 3-92
Figure 3-116 Unpack ResurFX Handpiece.......................................... 3-93
Figure 3-117 Unpacking ResurFX Module ......................................... 3-93
Figure 3-118 Cart - Before and After Modification
(Approximate measurements)............................................................... 3-95
PB-1042431 Rev D xix

Figure 3-119 Top Plate Removal......................................................... 3-96

Figure 3-120 Removing Storage Drawer............................................. 3-96
Figure 3-121 Releasing Upper Level of Chassis ................................. 3-97
Figure 3-122 Releasing lower Level of Chassis .................................. 3-97
Figure 3-123 Removing Base Block from Cart ................................... 3-98
Figure 3-124 Mounting Top of Cart Back onTo Chassis .................... 3-98
Figure 3-125 Tightening Chassis Screws ............................................ 3-99
Figure 3-126 Mounting M22 System Back onto Cart ......................... 3-99
Figure 3-127 Metal Latches ............................................................... 3-100
Figure 3-128 Locking Latch .............................................................. 3-100
Figure 3-129 Removing PC Unit ....................................................... 3-101
Figure 3-130 Mounting ResurFX Module ......................................... 3-102
Figure 3-131 Installation Positioning of ResurFX Module ............... 3-103
Figure 3-132 Closing Locking Pins ................................................... 3-104
Figure 3-133 Metal Latches .............................................................. 3-104
Figure 3-134 ResurFX Module Installed on M22 System................. 3-105
Figure 3-135 Inserting Refill Tool into Refill/Drain Port.................. 3-106
Figure 3-136 Filling Water for ResurFX Water Tank ....................... 3-107
Figure 3-137 MIN/MAX Water Level............................................... 3-107
Figure 3-138 Refilling Funnel for Drain............................................ 3-108
Figure 3-139 Water Draining............................................................. 3-109
Figure 3-140 Select Mode Screen...................................................... 3-110
Figure 3-141 Utility Screen ............................................................... 3-111
Figure 3-142 Updates Screen............................................................. 3-111
Figure 3-143 Modules Update Screen ............................................... 3-112
Figure 3-144 Prompt to Insert USB Update Key............................... 3-112
Figure 3-145 USB Connection Port................................................... 3-113
Figure 3-146 Update Progress Bar..................................................... 3-113
Figure 3-147 Upgrade Successful Message....................................... 3-114
Figure 3-148 Error 311 ...................................................................... 3-114
Figure 3-149 ResurFX Mode Enabled............................................... 3-115
Figure 3-150 ResurFX Power Meter Setup ....................................... 3-118
Figure 3-151 ResurFX User Treatment Screen ................................. 3-119
Figure 3-152 Shape Density Check ................................................... 3-120
Chapter 4: General Description

Figure 4-1 M22 System Controls (with optional ResurFX Module)..... 4-6
Figure 4-2 Block Diagram ..................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-3 M22 Filter and Light Guide Storage .................................... 4-9
Figure 4-4 Service Panel...................................................................... 4-10
Figure 4-5 Remote Interlock Connection ............................................ 4-12
Figure 4-6 Footswitch Connection Port............................................... 4-13
Figure 4-7 Universal IPL Handpiece ................................................... 4-16
Figure 4-8 Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece ........................................ 4-17
Figure 4-9 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece....................................... 4-19
Figure 4-10 ResurFX Handpiece ......................................................... 4-21
xx PB-1042431 Rev D
Chapter 5: Functional Description
Figure 5-1 M22 System General Block Diagram .................................. 5-4
Figure 5-2 Display Module Block Diagram .......................................... 5-6
Figure 5-3 PC and Display System Connection Block Diagram........... 5-7
Figure 5-4 Screen Flow........................................................................ 5-10
Figure 5-5 User and System Interface Flow ........................................ 5-11
Figure 5-6 User Main Screen............................................................... 5-13
Figure 5-7 Universal IPL Treatment Screen........................................ 5-14
Figure 5-8 Nd:YAG Treatment Screen................................................ 5-14
Figure 5-9 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Treatment Screen............................ 5-15
Figure 5-10 ResurFX Treatment Screen .............................................. 5-15
Figure 5-11 Interface Module Block Diagram .................................... 5-17
Figure 5-12 Interface Module Block Diagram [2]............................... 5-18
Figure 5-13 LVPS and Power Supply Location .................................. 5-26
Figure 5-14 Charger Block Diagram ................................................... 5-28
Figure 5-15 LVPS Block Diagram ...................................................... 5-30
Figure 5-16 Capacitor Bank................................................................. 5-33
Figure 5-17 Switching Module Block Diagram .................................. 5-35
Figure 5-18 Handpiece Connector Location........................................ 5-36
Figure 5-19 Handpiece Connection Block Diagram............................ 5-37
Figure 5-20 Universal IPL Handpiece Block Diagram ....................... 5-38
Figure 5-21 Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece Block Diagram............. 5-41
Figure 5-22 Cooling System Block Diagram -
with Water Level Flow Sensor ............................................................. 5-47
Figure 5-23 Cooling System Water Flow Diagram -
with water Level Sensor (Series 002 only) ........................................... 5-48
Figure 5-24 Radiator and Fan Assembly ............................................. 5-50
Chapter 6: ResurFX Module

Figure 6-1 ResurFX Module Control Panel........................................... 6-2
Figure 6-2 ResurFX Module with Cart - Final Installation ................... 6-3
Figure 6-3 ResurFX Functional Modules Diagram ............................... 6-4
Figure 6-4 ResurFX Block Diagram...................................................... 6-6
Figure 6-5 ResurFX Module Interface Diagram.................................... 6-7
Figure 6-6 ResurFX LVPS Block Diagram ........................................... 6-9
Figure 6-7 ResurFX Controller Block Diagram .................................. 6-11
Figure 6-8 Controller Board Electrical Wiring Diagram..................... 6-12
Figure 6-9 Scanner Module Electrical Diagram .................................. 6-14
Figure 6-10 Galvo Position Demodulator............................................ 6-15
Figure 6-11 Galvo Control Closed Loop ............................................. 6-16
Figure 6-12 ResurFX Cooling System Diagram.................................. 6-17
Figure 6-13 Refill/Drain Port............................................................... 6-19
Figure 6-14 Filling Water for ResurFX Water Tank ........................... 6-20
Figure 6-15 Fiber Laser Module .......................................................... 6-21
Figure 6-16 ResurFX Footswitch and Connector ................................ 6-22
PB-1042431 Rev D xxi

Figure 6-17 ResurFX Handpiece ......................................................... 6-23

Figure 6-18 Handpiece Optical Path and Tip Connection ................... 6-24
Figure 6-19 ResurFX Handpiece Connector - System Side ................ 6-25
Figure 6-20 ResurFX Handpiece Connector ....................................... 6-25
Figure 6-21 ResurFX Rear Panel......................................................... 6-27
Figure 6-22 GUI Flow ......................................................................... 6-30
Figure 6-23 Set Auxiliary Power ......................................................... 6-33
Figure 6-24 ResurFX Service Screen - Diagnostic Tab ...................... 6-34
Figure 6-25 ResurFX Service Screen - Power Supply Tab ................. 6-35
Figure 6-26 ResurFX Screen - Cooling System Screen ...................... 6-36
Figure 6-27 ResurFX Service Screen - External Indication Tab ......... 6-38
Figure 6-28 ResurFX Screen - Handpiece Screen ............................... 6-39
Figure 6-29 ResurFX Screen - Scanner Screen ................................... 6-41
Figure 6-30 ResurFX Screen - Fiber Laser Screen.............................. 6-43
Figure 6-31 ResurFX Service Screen - MCU Tab............................... 6-45
Figure 6-32 ResurFX Module Service Screen - End User Tab ........... 6-46
Figure 6-33 ResurFX Module Service Screen - Module Info Tab ...... 6-47
Figure 6-37 desktop Screen ................................................................. 6-51
Figure 6-42 FlashWriter Screen........................................................... 6-53
Figure 6-43 My Devices Folder........................................................... 6-54
Figure 6-44 Select Aquarius File ......................................................... 6-55
Figure 6-45 FlashWriter Progress Bar ................................................. 6-56
Figure 6-47 ResurFX Series 000 Controller Version Verification ...... 6-57
Figure 6-51 Service Screen.................................................................. 6-60
Figure 6-52 ResurFX Service Screen .................................................. 6-61
Figure 6-53 ResurFX Service Screen-MCU Tab................................. 6-62
Figure 6-54 MCU Tab - My Devices Folder ....................................... 6-62
Figure 6-55 USBDisk/Receiver_Simple_Code File ............................ 6-63
Figure 6-56 MCU Software Burning ................................................... 6-63
Figure 6-57 Burning MCU Success Message...................................... 6-64
Figure 6-58 MCU Software Burning Verification............................... 6-65
Figure 6-59 Moving Scanner Controller Dipswitches Up ................... 6-66
Figure 6-60 Disconnect J2 from MCU ................................................ 6-67
Figure 6-61 Connecting COmmunication Cable [1]............................ 6-67
Figure 6-62 Connecting COmmunication Cable [2]............................ 6-68
xxii PB-1042431 Rev D

Figure 6-63 ResurFX Connected to PC ............................................... 6-68
Figure 6-68 ResurFX Service Screen .................................................. 6-71
Figure 6-69 ResurFX Power Supply ON ............................................. 6-72
Figure 6-70 ResurFX Service Screen-Module Info Tab...................... 6-72
Figure 6-71 Run FlashWriter ............................................................... 6-73
Figure 6-72 FlashWriter Screen........................................................... 6-73
Figure 6-73 Select Scanner in FlashWriter.......................................... 6-74
Figure 6-74 USBDisk Folder ............................................................... 6-75
Figure 6-75 USBDisk/ScannerEmbedded File .................................... 6-75
Figure 6-76 Burning Scanner Software ............................................... 6-76
Figure 6-77 Burning Success Message ................................................ 6-77
Figure 6-78 Push Dipswitches Down .................................................. 6-77
Figure 6-79 Software Burning Verification......................................... 6-78
Figure 6-80 ResurFX Covers Layout................................................... 6-79
Figure 6-81 Rear View, Metal Latches................................................ 6-80
Figure 6-82 Removing ResurFX Module from Unit ........................... 6-81
Figure 6-83 Removing Screws from Side Cover................................. 6-81
Figure 6-84 Removing Back Screws of Side Covers .......................... 6-82
Figure 6-85 Removing Side Cover ...................................................... 6-82
Figure 6-86 Removing ResurFX Module Back Cover ........................ 6-83
Figure 6-87 Remove Metal Frame From Back Cover ......................... 6-84
Figure 6-88 Front Cover Removal....................................................... 6-85
Figure 6-89 Top Cover Removal ......................................................... 6-86
Figure 6-90 Bottom Cover Removal ................................................... 6-87
Figure 6-91 Remove Handpiece Cover ............................................... 6-87
Figure 6-92 Fiber Nut .......................................................................... 6-88
Figure 6-93 Unzipping Umbilical Sleeve ............................................ 6-88
Figure 6-94 Removing Handpiece Connector ..................................... 6-89
Figure 6-95 Scanner Screen - POT Parameters ................................... 6-89
Figure 6-96 Scanner Shape Coaxial Adjustment ................................. 6-90
Figure 6-97 Coaxial Adjustment Example (UP/DOWN Correction) . 6-90
Figure 6-98 Power Supply Connections .............................................. 6-91
Figure 6-99 Screws Holding the Power Supply................................... 6-92
Figure 6-100 Remove Plug .................................................................. 6-92
Figure 6-101 Removing Slider Panel................................................... 6-93
Figure 6-102 Pushing Fiber through Small Hole................................. 6-94
Figure 6-103 Remove Screws from Tracks - Top View...................... 6-95
Figure 6-104 MCU Connections.......................................................... 6-96
Figure 6-105 Removing Screws from MCU........................................ 6-96
Figure 6-106 Scanner Controller Connections .................................... 6-97
Figure 6-107 Screws of Handpiece Connector .................................... 6-98
Figure 6-108 Handpiece Connector Plate ............................................ 6-98
PB-1042431 Rev D xxiii

Figure 6-109 Tubing ............................................................................ 6-99

Figure 6-110 Flow Switch Removal .................................................. 6-100
Figure 6-111 Tubing Connections to Radiator .................................. 6-101
Figure 6-112 Harness to Illumination LED ....................................... 6-102
Figure 6-113 Line Filter Replacement............................................... 6-103
Figure 6-114 Pump Replacement ...................................................... 6-104
Figure 6-115 Locking Latch Replacement ........................................ 6-104
Figure 6-116 ResurFX Covers ........................................................... 6-112
Figure 6-117 ResurFX Module Covers ............................................. 6-113
Figure 6-118 ResurFX Handpiece Components ................................ 6-114
Figure 6-119 ResurFX Electrical Modules ........................................ 6-115
Figure 6-120 ResurFX Electrical Harnesses...................................... 6-116
Figure 6-121 ResurFX Cooling System Components ....................... 6-118
Figure 6-122 ResurFX Miscellaneous ............................................... 6-120
Figure 6-123 ResurFX Service Tools ................................................ 6-122
Chapter 7: Q-Switched Nd:YAG Laser

Handpiece
Figure 7-1 Q-Switched Treatment Head Internal Parts ......................... 7-2
Figure 7-2 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece......................................... 7-3
Figure 7-3 Q-Switched Lens Assembly and Protective Cap ................. 7-5
Figure 7-4 Q-Switched Lens Assembly and Treatment Tip .................. 7-6
Figure 7-5 Mount Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece on the Calibration
Device ..................................................................................................... 7-7
Figure 7-6 Connect Q-Switched Calibration Tool to System................ 7-8
Figure 7-7 Service Screen...................................................................... 7-8
Figure 7-8 Service Screen, Head Tab .................................................... 7-9
Figure 7-9 End User Screen Tab - Start QS Calibration Timing......... 7-10
Figure 7-10 Firing into the Calibration Device Tool ........................... 7-11
Figure 7-11 Finding T1 (Pulse Width 300 μs)..................................... 7-12
Figure 7-12 Finding T2 (420 μs) and Final Average Timing (360) .... 7-12
Figure 7-13 Save Factor Value Verification........................................ 7-13
Figure 7-15 Connect Hollow Tool to QS Handpiece .......................... 7-15
Figure 7-16 End User Screen Tab - Start QS Calibration Timing....... 7-16
Figure 7-17 Energy Check - Firing into Power Meter......................... 7-16
Figure 7-18 Q-Switched Laser Spare Parts.......................................... 7-18
Figure 7-19 Q-Switched Handpiece Components ............................... 7-19
Chapter 8: Tests, Calibrations and

Maintenance
Figure 8-1 Login Screen ........................................................................ 8-2
Figure 8-2 Select Mode Screen.............................................................. 8-2
Figure 8-3 Utility Screen ....................................................................... 8-3
Figure 8-4 Service Screen...................................................................... 8-3
xxiv PB-1042431 Rev D

Figure 8-5 Login Screen ........................................................................ 8-6
Figure 8-6 Select Mode Screen.............................................................. 8-6
Figure 8-7 Utility Screen ....................................................................... 8-7
Figure 8-8 Backup/Restore Screen ........................................................ 8-7
Figure 8-9 USB Connected to System ................................................... 8-8
Figure 8-10 Backup in Progress............................................................. 8-8
Figure 8-11 Backup Successful ............................................................. 8-9
Figure 8-12 Login Screen ...................................................................... 8-9
Figure 8-15 Backup/Restore Screen .................................................... 8-11
Figure 8-16 USB Connected to System ............................................... 8-11
Figure 8-17 Restore in Progress........................................................... 8-12
Figure 8-18 Restore Successful ........................................................... 8-12
Figure 8-19 Self-Extractor Screen ....................................................... 8-14
Figure 8-20 Select Drive from Drop-Down List ................................. 8-14
Figure 8-21 Overwrite Prompt............................................................. 8-15
Figure 8-22 Software Burning Progress .............................................. 8-15
Figure 8-23 Burning Success Message ................................................ 8-15
Figure 8-24 Flash-DSP SW on Controller Board ................................ 8-17
Figure 8-25 DSP Software Files .......................................................... 8-17
Figure 8-26 Controller Board, Flash Memory Card Location ............. 8-18
Figure 8-30 M22 Desktop Screen ........................................................ 8-20
Figure 8-35 Flash Writer Screen.......................................................... 8-22
Figure 8-36 Select My Device ............................................................. 8-23
Figure 8-37 MRIPL.OUT File ................................................................ 8-23
Figure 8-38 Flash Writer Progress Bar ................................................ 8-24
Figure 8-40 Software DSP and CRC Verification............................... 8-26
Figure 8-41 Assembling the Water Level Calibration Jig ................... 8-27
Figure 8-42 Cooling Diagnostics Screen ............................................. 8-28
Figure 8-43 Calibrating the Water Level Sensor ................................. 8-28
Figure 8-44 Water Level Flow Sensor Location ................................. 8-29
Figure 8-45 System Calibration Tool .................................................. 8-30
Figure 8-46 Interface Tester Box......................................................... 8-31
Figure 8-47 Connecting Tester Tool to J1 Connector ......................... 8-32
Figure 8-48 25-Pin Test Harness Connected ....................................... 8-32
Figure 8-49 Charger Screen ................................................................. 8-33
Figure 8-50 Calibration: 5Volt Input Window .................................... 8-34
PB-1042431 Rev D xxv

Figure 8-51 Measuring Voltage between Red and Black Sockets....... 8-34
Figure 8-52 On-screen Keypad............................................................ 8-35
Figure 8-53 12V Input ......................................................................... 8-36
Figure 8-54 Cooling System Screen .................................................... 8-37
Figure 8-55 Calibration: Pump24V Window....................................... 8-38
Figure 8-56 Turn Fan Section .............................................................. 8-40
Figure 8-57 Calibration: Fan 24V Window ......................................... 8-40
Figure 8-58 Turn Fan section............................................................... 8-42
Figure 8-59 Head Screen ..................................................................... 8-43
Figure 8-60 TEC 8/16V Window ........................................................ 8-43
Figure 8-61 Removing J6 Connection ................................................. 8-46
Figure 8-62 System Calibration Tool Setup ........................................ 8-46
Figure 8-63 Cooling System Screen - Temperature Section ............... 8-47
Figure 8-64 Temperature Calibration Window ................................... 8-48
Figure 8-65 Main Service Screen ........................................................ 8-49
Figure 8-66 Charger Screen - Cap. Voltage Calibration ..................... 8-50
Figure 8-67 Read Point 1 ..................................................................... 8-50
Figure 8-68 Connect DVM to Capacitor Terminals ............................ 8-51
Figure 8-69 Enter the Point 1 Reading ................................................ 8-52
Figure 8-70 Enter the Point 2 Reading ................................................ 8-53
Figure 8-71 Calculate Gain & Offset................................................... 8-53
Figure 8-72 Capacitor Voltage Calibration - Save Values .................. 8-54
Figure 8-73 Capacitors are Fully Charged/Dumped............................ 8-55
Figure 8-74 First Service Screen ......................................................... 8-57
Figure 8-78 End User Screen............................................................... 8-62
Figure 8-79 IPL Head Calibration Screen ........................................... 8-62
Figure 8-80 Setup Parameters.............................................................. 8-63
Figure 8-81 Position the handpiece on External Power Meter ............ 8-64
Figure 8-82 Record the Power Meter Readings................................... 8-64
Figure 8-83 All Reading Values Entered............................................. 8-65
Figure 8-84 Calculate Factor ............................................................... 8-66
Figure 8-85 Head Data Screen............................................................. 8-67
Figure 8-86 Energy Test Preset 1 (example) ....................................... 8-68
Figure 8-87 Treatment Head Calibration Warning Pop-Up
Window (system software version 2.0 and higher) .............................. 8-70
Figure 8-88 Connection to Service Panel ............................................ 8-70
Figure 8-89 Insert Calibration Filter .................................................... 8-71
Figure 8-90 Light Guide Removal....................................................... 8-71
Figure 8-91 Mount IPL Handpiece on Calibration Tool and Lock ..... 8-72
Figure 8-92 Screen After Self-Test...................................................... 8-73
Figure 8-93 Treatment Screen ............................................................. 8-73
Figure 8-94 Calibration........................................................................ 8-74
Figure 8-95 On-Screen Instructions..................................................... 8-75
xxvi PB-1042431 Rev D

Figure 8-96 Calibration Succeeded Screen.......................................... 8-75
Figure 8-97 Tools Screen - Head Information..................................... 8-76
Figure 8-98 Internal Head Factor Value .............................................. 8-76
Figure 8-100 IPL Calibration Tool Connected .................................... 8-78
Figure 8-101 Head Screen ................................................................... 8-79
Figure 8-102 Calibration Device Screen ............................................. 8-80
Figure 8-103 Calibrate PM Button ...................................................... 8-80
Figure 8-104 Calibration Field Boxes at Zero Start Point ................... 8-81
Figure 8-105 Fire IPL Head into External Power Meter ..................... 8-82
Figure 8-106 Calibration Field Boxes at Zero Start Point ................... 8-82
Figure 8-107 Using Keypad to Enter Reading..................................... 8-83
Figure 8-108 First Reading Entered..................................................... 8-84
Figure 8-109 All Five Readings entered - Find Peak .......................... 8-85
Figure 8-110 Inserting the IPL Handpiece into the Calibration Tool.. 8-86
Figure 8-111 All Readings Entered ..................................................... 8-86
Figure 8-112 Save Factor..................................................................... 8-87
Figure 8-113 Head Data Screen........................................................... 8-88
Figure 8-114 Factor Value ................................................................... 8-89
Figure 8-115 Detector Head and Power Meter Setup.......................... 8-90
Figure 8-116 Energy Test Preset 1 - Nd:YAG .................................... 8-91
Figure 8-117 Firing Nd:YAG into Power Meter ................................. 8-92
Figure 8-118 Replace Head Button ..................................................... 8-94
Figure 8-119 Head Requires Calibration Warning Message ............... 8-95
Figure 8-120 Treatment Screen - Tool Button..................................... 8-95
Figure 8-121 Tools Screen................................................................... 8-96
Figure 8-122 Calibration Device Not Connected Prompt ................... 8-96
Figure 8-123 Calibration Device Connected ....................................... 8-97
Figure 8-124 Calibration Screen - Calibration Button......................... 8-97
Figure 8-125 Defrosting Progress Screen ............................................ 8-98
Figure 8-126 handpiece Replacement Verification ............................. 8-98
Figure 8-127 Inserting YAG handpiece in Calibration Device ........... 8-99
Figure 8-128 calibration in Process - Press Safety Button .................. 8-99
Figure 8-129 Nd:YAG handpiece Safety LED.................................. 8-100
Figure 8-130 Detector Head and Power Meter Setup........................ 8-101
Figure 8-131 Nd:YAG Calibration Device Connected...................... 8-102
Figure 8-132 Resetting the Nd:YAG Calibration Device Factor ...... 8-103
Figure 8-133 Read Device Button ..................................................... 8-103
Figure 8-134 Calibration Device Screen ........................................... 8-104
Figure 8-135 Calibration PM Screen ................................................. 8-105
Figure 8-136 Fire Nd:YAG handpiece into External Power Meter... 8-105
Figure 8-137 Calibration Field Boxes at Zero ................................... 8-106
Figure 8-138 Using Keypad to Enter Reading................................... 8-107
Figure 8-139 First Reading Entered................................................... 8-107
Figure 8-140 All Five Reading Entered............................................. 8-108
Figure 8-141 Find Peak Checkbox .................................................... 8-109
PB-1042431 Rev D xxvii

Figure 8-142 Inserting the Nd:YAG Head in Calibration Device ..... 8-109
Figure 8-143 Reading Automatically Entered from Cal. Device ...... 8-110
Figure 8-144 Factor 1 Value .............................................................. 8-111
Figure 8-145 Extracting the IPL ExpertFilter.................................... 8-115
Figure 8-146 Extracting the IPL SapphireCool Lightguide............... 8-116
Figure 8-147 Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Lightguide .................................. 8-117
Figure 8-148 ResurFX Handpiece ..................................................... 8-118
Figure 8-149 Shape Density Check ................................................... 8-124
Figure 8-150 Coaxial Adjustment Example (UP/DOWN Correction) ... 8-
124
Chapter 9: Troubleshooting
Figure 9-1 System Modes of Operation Flow ....................................... 9-2
Figure 9-2 Sample Troubleshooting Table ............................................ 9-3
Chapter 10: Module Replacement

Figure 10-1 Covers Configuration ....................................................... 10-2
Figure 10-2 Left/Right Side Base Panels............................................. 10-3
Figure 10-3 Removing Left/Right Base Side Panels ........................... 10-3
Figure 10-4 Installing Left/Right Side Base Panels............................. 10-4
Figure 10-5 Removing Front Cover Screws ........................................ 10-5
Figure 10-6 Removing Bracket Screws from the Left Side Cover...... 10-6
Figure 10-7 Installing the Side Covers ................................................ 10-6
Figure 10-8 Removing Screws of Back Cover .................................... 10-7
Figure 10-9 Front Locking Latch......................................................... 10-8
Figure 10-10 Removing PC Unit Assembly ........................................ 10-8
Figure 10-11 Adjusting the Height Adjustment Pin ............................ 10-9
Figure 10-12 Top Cover Replacement............................................... 10-10
Figure 10-13 Replacing Top Cover Alignment Pin........................... 10-11
Figure 10-14 Side Covers Alignment ................................................ 10-12
Figure 10-15 Right Handle Removal................................................. 10-13
Figure 10-16 Remove Five Allen Screws.......................................... 10-14
Figure 10-17 Disconnect P6 .............................................................. 10-15
Figure 10-18 Disconnect J10 ............................................................. 10-15
Figure 10-19 Disconnect P7 and HV Plug, System Left Side ........... 10-16
Figure 10-20 Removing Two Allen Screws from Left Side.............. 10-17
Figure 10-21 Disconnect P6 and 14-Pin Connector .......................... 10-17
Figure 10-22 Remove Two Allen Screws from System Right .......... 10-18
Figure 10-23 Slide Power Supply Out ............................................... 10-18
Figure 10-24 Disconnect HV Terminals............................................ 10-19
Figure 10-25 Remove Allen Screw of Capacitor Bank - Right Side. 10-20
Figure 10-26 Remove Allen Screw of Capacitor Bank - Left Side ... 10-20
Figure 10-27 Disconnect Cable to Access Capacitor Bank ............... 10-21
Figure 10-28 Remove Capacitor Bank .............................................. 10-21
Figure 10-29 Installing Capacitor Bank............................................. 10-22
xxviii PB-1042431 Rev D

Figure 10-30 Disconnect from Switching Module - Left Side .......... 10-23
Figure 10-31 Disconnect from Switching Module - Right Side ........ 10-24
Figure 10-32 Remove Allen Screws from Switching Module (1)..... 10-24
Figure 10-33 Remove Allen Screws from Switching Module (2)..... 10-25
Figure 10-34 Remove Switching Module.......................................... 10-25
Figure 10-35 Switching Module Installation ..................................... 10-26
Figure 10-36 Removing Allen Screws on Bracket ............................ 10-27
Figure 10-37 Removing Plastic Protective Cover ............................. 10-27
Figure 10-38 Remove Allen Screws from HV Relay Mount ............ 10-28
Figure 10-39 Disconnect Molex Plug ................................................ 10-28
Figure 10-40 Disconnect Plugs from Interface Module .................... 10-30
Figure 10-41 Removing the Water Tank ........................................... 10-31
Figure 10-42 Disconnecting Plug to Pump........................................ 10-32
Figure 10-43 Release Two Spring-Loaded Flat Screws .................... 10-33
Figure 10-44 Release Quick-Connectors ........................................... 10-33
Figure 10-45 Alignment Pins for Mounting Pump ............................ 10-34
Figure 10-46 Replacing Water Level Sensor..................................... 10-35
Figure 10-47 Flow Switch Replacement ........................................... 10-36
Figure 10-48 Release Four Allen Screws on Deionizer Bracket ....... 10-37
Figure 10-49 Slide Deionizer Partially Out - View from Top ........... 10-37
Figure 10-50 Front-End Quick-Connector ........................................ 10-38
Figure 10-51 Tie Wraps from Deionizer ........................................... 10-38
Figure 10-52 Remove Four Screws of Radiator ................................ 10-39
Figure 10-53 Temperature Sensor Location ...................................... 10-40
Figure 10-54 Before and After Cutting the Tube .............................. 10-40
Figure 10-55 New Radiator and Fitting ............................................. 10-41
Figure 10-56 Disconnecting Water Flow Meter Tube....................... 10-41
Figure 10-57 Cutting the Tube........................................................... 10-42
Figure 10-58 Straight Fitting Connection .......................................... 10-42
Figure 10-59 10 Sunken Allen Screws .............................................. 10-43
Figure 10-60 Removing Four Allen Screws from Computer ............ 10-44
Figure 10-61 Removing Four Philips Screws from Computer Plate . 10-45
Figure 10-62 Removing Compact Flash ............................................ 10-46
Figure 10-63 Removing the HASP from the Computer. ................... 10-47
Figure 10-64 Removing Eight Philips Screws Holding Monitor ...... 10-48
Figure 10-65 Disconnect Cables from Computer .............................. 10-48
Figure 10-66 Cut Tie Wraps Holding Monitor Cables ...................... 10-49
Figure 10-67 Removing Monitor Harnesses Through Hole .............. 10-49
Figure 10-68 Installing the Monitor................................................... 10-50
Figure 10-69 Tightening Screws on Monitor .................................... 10-50
Figure 10-70 Secure Harnesses with Tie Wrap on Hinge Grooves ... 10-50
Figure 10-71 Desktop ........................................................................ 10-51
Figure 10-72 Windows Folder ........................................................... 10-52
Figure 10-73 Menu - View Options................................................... 10-52
Figure 10-74 Deselect View Folder Options ..................................... 10-53
Figure 10-75 Open TouchKit.EXE File............................................. 10-53
PB-1042431 Rev D xxix

Figure 10-76 Start Calibration ........................................................... 10-54

Figure 10-77 Touch-Screen Calibration (1)....................................... 10-54
Figure 10-78 Touch-Screen Calibration (2)....................................... 10-55
Figure 10-79 Cooling System Draining Screen ................................. 10-57
Figure 10-80 Coolant Tank Parts....................................................... 10-58
Figure 10-81 Pulling the Tank Out of the System ............................. 10-58
Figure 10-82 Water Draining Tool .................................................... 10-59
Figure 10-83 Opening the Water Tank .............................................. 10-60
Figure 10-84 Inserting the In/Out Tubes ........................................... 10-60
Figure 10-85 Connect Power Transformer to Water Draining Tool . 10-61
Figure 10-86 Drain Tool Setup .......................................................... 10-61
Chapter 11: Spare Parts Catalog

Figure 11-1 Spare Parts List Example ................................................. 11-1
Figure 11-2 System Front/Top View ................................................... 11-3
Figure 11-3 System Rear View............................................................ 11-4
Figure 11-4 System Right View .......................................................... 11-5
Figure 11-5 System Left View............................................................. 11-6
Figure 11-6 Computer and Display ..................................................... 11-7
Figure 11-7 Electronic Components .................................................... 11-8
Figure 11-8 Cooling System Components......................................... 11-10
Figure 11-9 Covers and Exterior Components .................................. 11-12
Figure 11-10 Miscellaneous............................................................... 11-14
Figure 11-11 Covers .......................................................................... 11-15
Figure 11-12 Treatment Heads .......................................................... 11-16
Figure 11-13 Special Tools................................................................ 11-19
xxx PB-1042431 Rev D

System Overview
C H A P T E R
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 Introduction
The M22 is a platform for aesthetic treatment technologies. Offering
industry gold standards, the M22 offers technologies essential to
today's aesthetic practices:
• Intense Pulsed Light (IPL) for IPL skin treatments, the

treatment of vascular and pigmented lesions and hair removal.
• Multi-Spot Nd:YAG laser for treatment of leg veins and
vascular lesions.
• ResurFX module for fractional non-ablative skin resurfacing.
• Q-Switched Nd:YAG for removal of dark tattoos and treatment
of pigmented lesions.
1.2 System Preparation

The system is shipped directly from the factory to the site. The system
is designed for installation in a clinical environment.
Thereafter, the user or the treatment staff at the facility will perform the
daily maintenance routines associated with the system and with any
delivery systems and/or accessories used during treatment, including
inspecting and cleaning the M22 and delivery systems and connecting/
disconnecting the tips and/or filters. These procedures are detailed in
the operator manual.
PB-1042431 Rev D 1-1

Most treatment staff prefers to inspect the system and delivery systems
daily, usually prior to scheduled cases. Doing so will ensure adequate
time to troubleshoot a problem or seek professional service with the
least disruption to patient care.
1.3 Scope of this Manual

This manual provides general and functional descriptions of the M22
system, as well as installation, maintenance and service instructions.
Caution
Service personnel operating or maintaining the M22 system
should read this manual thoroughly before attempting to operate
or service the device. While the manual is intended to aid the
service personnel in the care and service of the equipment, it
cannot serve as a substitute for the service engineers training,
provided by Lumenis. This manual should not be read before the
service engineers training is completed.
1.3.1 FSE Work Guidelines

The Service Engineer must work (perform these service activities) only
according to the procedures put forth in this manual per Lumenis
manufacturing requirements.
The Service Engineer must use only dedicated, calibrated tools per
Lumenis manufacturing requirements.
1-2
System Overview
This service manual incorporates the following chapters:
Chapter 1: Introduction Contains a general introduction to the

system.
Chapter 2: Safety Contains explanations and directions
concerning safety measures for operating the
system. This chapter also includes regulatory
information and requirements.
Chapter 3: System Lists electrical, space and environmental
Installation requirements for system installation and
instructions for unpacking, installing and
testing the system.
Chapter 4: General Contains a detailed overview of the system
Description and its various components, controls,
displays and connections. Includes detailed
specifications of all facets of the system.
Chapter 5: Functional Provides a detailed functional description of
Description all unit sub-systems and software.
Chapter 6: ResurFX Module Provides a detailed functional description of

the ResurFX Module, parts replacement,
troubleshooting and spare parts catalog.
Chapter 7: Q-Switched Provides a detailed functional description of
Nd:YAG Laser the Q-Switched Handpiece, parts
replacement, troubleshooting and spare
parts catalog.
Chapter 8: Tests, Contains instructions on various system tests
Calibrations & and calibrations, and provides a preventive
Preventive maintenance check list.
Maintenance
Chapter 9: Troubleshooting Lists the system error messages and various

problems, probable causes, symptoms/
diagnostic checks, and the appropriate
corrective actions.
Chapter 10: Module Provides instructions for replacement of the
Replacement unit's modules and assemblies. The
instructions include removal, installation and
post- replacement procedures.
Chapter 11: Spare Parts Provides an easy-to-use catalog, containing
Catalog photographs of the M22 unit and its
components.
PB-1042431 Rev D 1-3

1.4 Manual Conventions

Throughout this manual, notes, cautions and warnings and are used to
provide critical information needed before the device is used.
Examples:
Note
Note
A Note is a statement that alerts the operator to particularly important
information.
Caution
Caution
A Caution is a statement that alerts the operator to the possibility
of a problem with the device associated with its use or misuse.
Such problems include device malfunction, device failure, and
damage to the device or other property. The caution statement
includes the precaution that should be taken to avoid the hazard.
Warning
WARNING
A Warning is a statement that alerts the operator to the
possibility of injury, death, or serious adverse reactions
associated with the use or misuse of the device.
1-4
System Overview
1.4.1 Physician Responsibility
Caution
Caution: Federal (USA) law restricts this device to sale by or on
the order of a licensed physician.
The licensed physician will be responsible for the use and operation of
the device and for all user qualifications. Lumenis makes no represen-
tations regarding federal, state or local laws or regulations that might
apply to the use and operation of any medical device. The physician is
responsible for contacting his or her local licensing agencies to
determine any credentials required by law for clinical use and operation
of the device.
1.4.2 Maintenance
The M22 is a precision, technical medical device that requires routine
service as well as consumable parts. All service must be performed by
an authorized Lumenis technician and all parts must be purchased from
Lumenis. Failure to obtain service and parts through Lumenis voids all
warranties, express and implied. Please call Lumenis or your local
representative for details.
1.4.3 Modification of Device

Unauthorized modification of the hardware, software or specifications
of the M22 voids all warranties, express and implied. Lumenis takes no
responsibility for the use or operation of such a device.
1.4.4 Resale Inspection

The M22 is a precision, technical medical device. If any Lumenis
device is resold by anyone other than an authorized sales representa-
tive, Lumenis offers a resale inspection by a Lumenis technician to
assure that the device is working in accordance with manufacturer’s
specifications. Using the device after it has been resold and before it
has been inspected is a misuse of the device, which may result in
injuries and voids all warranties, express and implied.
PB-1042431 Rev D 1-5

Lumenis also offers service contracts and extended warranties for its
devices. For more information about the services or about the costs of
inspections or service calls, please call Lumenis or your local represen-
tative.
1-6
System Overview
1.5 Abbreviations and Acronyms

' Foot (feet)
" Inch(es)
+ve Positive
°C Degree(s) Centigrade Celsius
°F Degree(s) Fahrenheit
Ω Ohms (resistance)
A Ampere(s)
A/D Analog to digital
AC Alternating current
cm Centimeter(s)
CPU Central processing unit
D/A Digital to analog
DC Direct current
DT Delay time
DVM Digital volt meter
EMF Energy meter factor
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
F Fluence
FSE Field service engineer
ft Foot (feet)
GND Ground
GUI Graphic User Interface
HCF Head calibration factor
HV High voltage
Hz Hertz
I/O Input/Output
ID Identification
in Inch(es)
inHg Inches of Mercury
IPL Intense Pulsed Light
IPM Intelligent power module
PB-1042431 Rev D 1-7

J Joule(s)
J/cm2 Joule(s) per square centimeter
Kg Kilo gram(s)
KHz Kilo Hertz
kPa Kilo-Pascal
Laser Light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation
lb Pound(s)
LED Light emitting diode
LVPS Low Voltage Power Supply
MCU Micro-Controller Unit
MF Measured fluence
mm Millimeter(s)
N Number of pulses in one shot
N/A Not applicable / Not available
Nd:YAG Yttrium Aluminum Garnet crystal, doped with
Nd3+ (Neodymium) impurities
nm Nanometer(s)
NC Normally Closed
NO Normally Open
OD Optical Density
P&C Power and control (module)
PC Computer / Personal computer
PCB Printed circuit board
PM Preventive maintenance
PS Power supply
PSI Pounds per Square Inch
PW Pulse width
SCR Silicon control rectifier
Sec Second(s)
SR Skin rejuvenation
SSR Solid state relay
T Time (pulse duration)
TB Terminal board
TE Thermoelectric
TEC Thermoelectric cooler
UV Ultraviolet
1-8
System Overview
V Volt(s)
VAC Volt(s) AC
VC Command voltage (voltage to which the capacitors
charge)
VDC Volt(s) DC
VDVM Voltage reading on DVM
-ve Negative
VM Voltage measured by the unit's internal voltmeter
Vrms Volts (Root Mean Square)
W Watt(s)
1.6 Introduction to the System
Caution
Physicians and other personnel operating or maintaining this
equipment must read this manual thoroughly before attempting
to operate the M22 system.
The M22 is a multi-application, multi-technology system with three

available handpieces:
• Universal Intense Pulsed Light (IPL) handpiece, with a

wavelength range of 515 to 1200 nm, for treating vascular and
pigmented lesions, hair removal and IPL skin treatments. This
handpiece is supplied as standard equipment with the system.
• Multi-Spot Nd:YAG laser handpiece, with a wavelength of
1064 nm, for the treatment of vascular lesions. This handpiece
may be purchased as an optional upgrade to the M22 system.
• ResurFX laser handpiece, with a wavelength of 1565 nm, for
fractional non-ablative skin resurfacing. This handpiece may be
purchased as an optional upgrade to the M22 system.
• Q-Switched Nd:YAG laser handpiece, with a wavelength of
1064 nm & Cr:YAG crystal, for the removal of dark tattoos &
treatment of pigmented lesions. This handpiece may be
purchased as an optional upgrade to the M22 system.
PB-1042431 Rev D 1-9

The IPL, Multi-Spot Nd:YAG and ResurFX handpieces incorporate a

cooling mechanism that provides continuous contact cooling to the
treatment area.
The Q-switched Nd:YAG treatment does not involve direct contact to

the treatment area, hence no cooling is required.
The M22 has been designed to provide flexibility in choosing the

wavelength, pulse width and pulse sequence, to enable treatment of
skin conditions and lesions without damaging the surrounding tissue.
The M22 system consists of the following major components:
• System console
• Operator control panel
• Monitor with touch-screen technology
• Handpiece(s)
The system is continuously monitored and controlled by its internal

computer. Selected parameters and user information are displayed on
the monitor screen.
1.6.1 Treatment Parameters

The M22 system offers the flexibility of performing many different
aesthetic treatments, using the different modules and handpieces.
Treatment parameters are set according to the clinical indications. For

more details refer to the clinical guide appendices of the Operator
manual.
Before starting the treatment, the operator selects the appropriate

handpiece and determines the parameter values for the particular
treatment.
A range of values is defined for each parameter. Built-in safety features

prevent the selection of values outside this range. (However, since
certain parameter settings depend on other parameters, it is not always
possible to make use of the entire range of every parameter.)
1-10
System Overview
Spectrum and Filter

Universal IPL handpiece – the wavelength range and cut-off filters
determine the depth of light penetration and the spectral selectivity as
per targeted chromophores.
Spot Size
Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece – the selected spot size determines the
surface covered when the distal end of the tip is perpendicularly
positioned onto the patient’s skin. It will be selected as per vessel
features (diameter, depth).
ResurFX handpiece – the ResurFX tip enables a treatment area of up to

18mm in diameter of treatment area that absorbs the laser energy, when
the distal end of the tip is positioned perpendicularly on the patient's
skin.
Q-Switched Nd:YAG – the selected tip determines the surface covered

when the distal end of the tip is perpendicularly positioned onto the
patient's skin.
Fluence
The amount of energy in J/cm2 to which the treated area is exposed.
Number of Pulses
Energy is delivered in a single pulse or divided into two or three sub-
pulses. Applying energy in pulse sequences allows better control of the
delivered energy, and enables the skin to cool down between sub-
pulses, thus reducing the likelihood of adverse effects.
Pulse Duration
The length of time the skin is exposed to the pulse.
Pulse Delay
Pulse delay determines the intervals between the sub-pulses in the
sequence, to allow cooling of the skin between sub-pulses, and help
prevent adverse effects.
PB-1042431 Rev D 1-11

Scan Shape, Size and Density

The shape, size and density of the fractional scanned patterns delivered
to the treatment site by the ResurFX handpiece are set on the touch-
screen control panel prior to treatment.
1-12
Safety
C H A P T E R
SAFETY
2.1 Introduction
This chapter describes general safety issues regarding the use of the
M22 system with special emphasis on optical and electrical safety.
The M22 is a medical system utilizing Intense Pulsed Light (IPL) and
laser energy for safe and reliable treatment. With proper operation and
maintenance, the system can be used safely by trained, qualified
medical practitioners. The supervising physician and all other
personnel operating or maintaining this equipment must be familiar
with the safety information provided in this chapter.
The primary considerations should be for the safety of the patient, the
physician and other personnel. Patient safety is primarily assured by a
well trained staff and a well laid out treatment room. Patient education
is also important, including information about the nature of the
treatment.
Considerable effort was applied during the design of M22 to maximize

safety for both the patient and personnel. Following are some of
system’s preventative measures:
• A self-test of the modality is performed when the modality is

selected.
• A self-test of the attached handpiece is performed, including module
identification.
• A self-test of the electrical circuits and modules takes place after the
system is turned on. The test circuits continuously monitor the
operational system during treatment. If an error occurs, a message
appears on the screen.
PB-1042431 Rev D 2-1

• Closed filter/lightguide geometry is used to transmit light to the

patient’s skin. Light is emitted only through the front plane of the
lightguide.
• Independent safety circuits shut down the system to prevent
exposure to a light overdose.
• An emergency shutoff knob expedites shutdown when necessary.
• Password requirement on the login screen prevents unauthorized
activation of the system.
• A beeper sounds when the system is ready to trigger a pulse.
• A manual safety switch on the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG and Q-Switched
Nd:YAG handpieces prevent unintentional triggering of laser pulses.
WARNING
Any laser or intense light device can cause injury if used
improperly. High voltages are present inside the M22
system. Personnel who work with lasers or intense light
sources must always be aware of the possible dangers
and must take the proper safeguards as described in this
manual.
2-2
Safety
2.2 Software Safety Features (Software

States)
The following list describes some of the safety features implemented
by the software:
• An on-screen emergency shut off button which can be pressed

at any time, and which will cut off all system activities. The
software monitors the emergency shut-off button and if pressed,
handles it as a fatal error (stops all working operation and
displays the appropriate error message).
• An interlock mechanism, which is hardwired to the treatment
room door and prevents lasing when the door is open. The
software identifies the interlock to be open, sets the system to
standby and displays the appropriate message.
• Lasing is enabled only after user approval by pressing the
“Ready” button on the screen.
• Software identifies the change from release to press in the
trigger switch in order to start lasing. If the trigger was pressed
when entering ready, the system will not fire until the trigger is
released and pressed again. In the ResurFX module, the system
will not enter Ready when the trigger is pressed.
• If the system remains inactive for a certain period of time
(default time is 30 minutes, but this is subject to change) it
switches to “Idle” state, (cannot perform any module
operation). Return from Idle is via the Head selection screen.
• The system performs a periodic fault detection every 100ms,
during which the software monitors the readings of hardware
modules outputs. If the readings are not within the accepted
range, the system switches to “fatal Error” state, and further
activity is disabled.
• The software identifies the modules (IPL, Nd:YAG, ResurFX)
attached to the machine. If none of the modules has been
identified, the software prevents the machine from further
operation.
• The software detects that mandatory calibration is necessary
and prevents further use of the handpiece until calibration has
been successfully completed.
• An indicator light flashes when the system is in Ready; the
indicator is lit continuously during treatment.
PB-1042431 Rev D 2-3

2.3 The Treatment Room

The entrance to the treatment room should be clearly labeled, with
signs indicating that high intensity light and/or laser are in use. Figure
2-1 shows the treatment room signs which are supplied with the M22.
Figure 2-1 Treatment Room Door Signs
Allow access to the M22 treatment room only to personnel essential to

the procedure and well trained in the required safety procedures.
Make sure that all treatment room personnel are familiar with M22’s
controls and know how to shut down the system instantly.
2.4 Major Precautions, Cautions and

Warnings
The following precautions, cautions and warnings must be heeded for
safe use of the M22 system.
In the event of a death or serious injury/illness, immediately

contact Regulatory Affairs at Lumenis, 3959 West 1820 South, Salt
Lake City, UT 84104, USA, telephone number (877) LUMENIS,
(877) 586-3647 (toll free). For those outside of the United States,
please send an email detailing the event to
postmarket@lumenis.com. A serious injury/serious illness is an
injury or illness that is: a) life threatening, even if temporary in
2-4
Safety
nature; b) results in permanent impairment of a body function or

permanent damage to a body structure; or c) necessitates medical
or surgical intervention to preclude permanent impairment of a
body function or permanent damage to a body structure.
Permanent damage or impairment is defined as irreversible
damage or impairment that is not trivial.
2.4.1 Precautions
• Service personnel should read this manual thoroughly before
attempting to operate the M22 system.
• Lightguides and filters must be kept clean at all times. Remember to
clean the coupling gel off the lightguides during the treatment
session and after each patient. Take all precautions to ensure that no
gel penetrates the handpiece.
2.4.2 Cautions
• Only Lumenis-authorized personnel may service the M22 system,
especially inside its protective covers. This includes making internal
adjustments to the power supply, cooling system, optics, handpieces,
etc. Dangerous voltages are present inside the system.
• Maintenance performed by the user must only take place when the
system is shut down and disconnected from power. Performing
maintenance procedures with the system powered-up may be
hazardous to the user and/or destructive to the system.
• Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
2.4.3 Warnings Related to Laser and Intense Pulsed

Light Emission
• Laser and intense pulsed light emission present an eye hazard and a
potential fire or burn hazard. Take all necessary precautions in areas
where the M22 is used.
• The M22 emits intense pulsed light and laser pulses. Make sure that
the patient and all those present in the treatment room guard against
accidental exposure to these emissions either directly from the
handpiece or indirectly from a reflecting surface.
PB-1042431 Rev D 2-5

• Never look directly at beam coming from the treatment module, even
when wearing protective eyewear.
• In order to reduce the risk of accidental burns, the patient should not
come into contact with metals parts that are grounded during
operation of this equipment.
• Never point the treatment module so that it discharges into free
space. Make sure it is mounted on its cradle, or – during actual
treatment – pointed at the target site.
• Keep hands away from the treatment modules during system start-
up.
• Do not leave the M22 system unattended when in operation.
2.4.4 The Handpieces

When the M22 is turned on, the system performs a self-test to identify
which handpiece is connected. If it detects an open connector, or if
there is a problem with the handpiece, an error message appears on the
screen.
2.4.5 Warnings Related to the Laser Handpiece
Burn Hazard
The M22 laser radiation is invisible to the human eye and may induce
third degree burns.
Eye Exposure Hazard

The laser handpieces emit invisible radiation that may be hazardous if
viewed directly or indirectly.
Never look into the laser beam or allow the beam to be reflected from
any metallic or other reflective surface.
Protective Eyewear
The patient, physician and all personnel in the vicinity of the laser
system must wear protective eyewear that provides adequate protection
from the laser radiation (1064 nm, see Section Optical Safety on
2-6
Safety
page 2-7). The eyewear must have guards on both sides, to protect the
eyes from lateral exposure.
2.4.6 Warnings Related to the Optical Filter in the

Universal IPL Handpiece
A filter must always be properly installed in the Universal IPL
handpiece prior to triggering pulses. The system identifies which filter
is installed.
If the filter is removed from the treatment module while the system is
in Ready mode, it will automatically default to Standby mode. If an
attempt is made to set the system to Ready mode while there is no filter
in the treatment module, an error message will appear on the screen.
Before changing the filter, make sure that the M22 system is in
Standby mode.
2.5 Optical Safety

To ensure optical safety, the following guidelines must be adhered to:
• A qualified person should be responsible for the system’s controls

during the procedure (under the supervision of the physician).
• Do not use the system in the presence of explosive anesthetics or
other flammable materials.
• Do not direct the treatment module light at anything other than the
targeted area.
• Do not allow reflective objects such as jewelry, watches, surgical
instruments or mirrors to reflect the pulsed light.
• Do not expose the skin to the light pulse except the test patch and the
treatment area.
• Do not look directly into the laser aperture of the handpiece even if
wearing safety glasses.
Laser Safety Eyewear

Laser safety eyewear is routinely required with most laser and IPL light
sources. When using the system, the Laser Safety Officer should
determine the need for safety eyewear based on the Maximum
PB-1042431 Rev D 2-7

Permissible Exposure (MPE), Nominal Hazard Zone (NHZ), the

Nominal Ocular Hazard Distance (NOHD), and the optical density
(OD) for the available laser emission and the configuration of the
treatment room (usually within the controlled area). For additional
information, refer to ANSI Z136.1-2000, ANSI Z136.3-2005, or
European Standard EN 60825.
The following formula was used to calculate the worst case NOHD for
the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG and ResurFX handpieces:
Where:
Z = the distance of the beam waist from the laser system;
a = the beam waist diameter (1/e2 of axial irradiance for Gaussian

beam);
θ = minimum full angle beam divergence (1/e2 of axial irradiance for

Gaussian beam);
e ≈ 2.7182818285, the base of natural logarithms;
Φ = maximum energy of one laser pulse or maximum CW laser power;
Pf = the profile correction factor (1 for uniform profile or 2 for

Gaussian irradiance);
MPE = Maximum Permissible Exposure, in energy density units

(energy per unit area), or power density units (power per unit area);
NOHD = the Nominal Ocular Hazard Distance (measured from laser

aperture;
= the distance required to reduce the energy density or power density to

the MPE.
2-8
Safety
Figure 2-2 Nominal Ocular Hazard Distance (NOHD) Illustration
Using this approach we derive the following values:
Laser θ Φ MPE Pf a z
Nd:YAG 1.064 µm 35 mrad 50 J 8.53 mJ/cm2 1 0.8 cm 0 cm
ResurFX 1.565 µm 24 mrad 15 W 0.1 W/cm2 2 0.01 cm 0 cm
Q-Switched
Nd:YAG 1.064 μm
256 mrad 440mJ 0.14 J/m2 1 1.25 mm 0 cm
which results in a worst case NOHD of:
Laser NOHD
Nd:YAG 1.064 µm 27 meters
ResurFX 1.565 µm 8.2 meters
Q-Switched Nd:YAG 1.064
7.8 meters
μm
All personnel within the operating area of the laser must wear eye
protection with a protection level according to EN 207 and with an
optical density (OD) of:
PB-1042431 Rev D 2-9

Laser NOHD Protection Level per

EN207
Nd:YAG 1.064 um OD > 4 I LB8
ResurFX 1.565 um OD > 3.1 D LB4, I LB3
Q-Switched Nd:YAG 1.064 μm OD > 4 D LB3, R LB6
In addition to providing the required laser safety eyewear, take the
following steps to secure the treatment room:
1. Alert personnel before they enter the controlled area, place a

warning sign on the outside of the treatment room door when the
laser is in use.
2. Close the treatment room door during operation of the laser.
3. External door interlock that automatically disable the laser when
the treatment room door is opened may be installed.
Note
A blocking barrier, screen, or curtain capable of blocking or filtering
the laser beam could be placed to create a controlled area inside a
large treatment room. The barrier should be made of material that
can withstand the power of the treatment beam for the maximum
exposure time, relative to the configuration of the controlled area and
the treatment parameters for the specific medical application.
2.5.1 M22 System protective Eyewear
Caution
Different protective eyewear is indicated for use with the M22
handpieces. Make sure to wear the correct type.
2-10
Safety
Patients, physicians, and staff should wear Lumenis protective eyewear

as follows:
Handpiece Wavelength Optical Optical Protection Level

[nm] Density [Physicians & per EN207
[Patients] Staff]
Universal IPL 515 - 1200 5 3 N/A
Multi-Spot
1064 >4 >4 I LB8
Nd:YAG
ResurFX 1565 >3.1 >3.1 D LB4, I LB3
Q-Switched
1064 >4 >4 D LB3, R LB6
Nd:YAG
If the patient cannot wear the eyewear, fit the patient with opaque eye
protection that completely blocks light from the eyes.
During IPL treatment, if the treated area is very close to the eyes,
protect the eyes with corneal shields or do not treat.
WARNING
Do not treat eyebrows, eyelashes, or other areas within
the boney area surrounding the orbit of the eye with the
Multi- Spot Nd:YAG and Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpieces.
This laser wavelength is capable of causing serious eye
damage or blindness.
PB-1042431 Rev D 2-11

2.6 Electrical and Mechanical Safety

• Keep all covers and panels of the M22 system closed. Removing the
covers creates a safety hazard.
• The M22 system uses very high voltages which may be dangerous.
Some components may retain a charge after the power supply has
been turned off, so no part of the exterior housing should be
removed, except by Lumenis-authorized personnel.
• Whenever system maintenance is performed, do not leave the M22
turned on, open or unattended.
• Proper care should be taken when moving the M22 system to avoid
any injury. The system is portable and is designed to be easily
moved, but should always be moved with care.
• The system is grounded through the grounding conductor in the
power cable. This protective grounding is essential for safe
operation.
• Connect the system to a dedicated line/socket. Never connect it to a
multi-plug!
2.6.1 Residual Current Circuit Breaker

Lumenis strongly recommends the installation of a Residual Current
Circuit Breaker (RCCB), also referred to as a Ground Fault Circuit
Interrupter (GFCI). This is an electrical wiring device that disconnects
a circuit whenever it detects that the electric current is not balanced
between the phase ("hot" or "live") conductor and the neutral
conductor. Such an imbalance is sometimes caused by current leakage
through the body of a person who is grounded and accidentally
touching the energized part of the circuit. A lethal shock can result
from these conditions; RCCBs are designed to disconnect quickly
enough to mitigate the harm caused by such shocks.
The RCCB should be obtained locally and be installed by a qualified

electrician.
2.7 Fire Hazards

The absorption of optical energy raises the temperature of the
absorbing material. Take precautions to reduce the risk of igniting
combustible materials in and around the treatment area.
2-12
Safety
Do not use any flammable substance such as alcohol or acetone in the

preparation of the skin for treatment. If necessary, use soap and water.
If alcohol is used to clean and disinfect any part of the M22, allow it to
dry thoroughly before using the system.
2.8 Operating Precautions

• Never leave the system in Ready mode unattended.
• Always turn the system off when the system is not in use.
• Do not allow untrained personnel to operate the system.
• Do not remove any system cover. Only Lumenis authorized service
personnel are qualified to do so.
• Do not press the Pulse button on the Universal IPL handpiece,
without first verifying that the lightguide is oriented safely.
• Do not press the trigger on the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG or Q-Switched
Nd:YAG handpiece without first verifying that the laser aperture is
safely oriented.
• Do not press the trigger on the ResurFX handpiece or the footswitch
without first verifying that the laser aperture is safely oriented and
that the aiming beam is visible.
2.9 System Safety Features

The M22 is equipped with several of safety features. All treatment
room personnel must be familiar with the location and operation of
these safety features.
2.9.1 Password
The user accesses the system via the login screen after entering
allocated user name and password. This prevents unauthorized use of
the system. The M22 system is delivered with the following default
passwords:
• User password: 1234

• Service Password: 1111
• Administrator Password: 1701
PB-1042431 Rev D 2-13

2.9.2 Emergency Shutoff Knob

This red mushroom-shaped knob is designed for emergency shutdown
of the system. When pressed, it immediately disables light output from
the handpiece. Pressing the emergency shutoff knob bypasses the
controlled power down sequence, taking precedence over the key
switch.
To release the emergency shutoff knob, turn it clockwise, in the

direction of the arrows; otherwise, the system will remain turned off.
The abrupt shut-down by the emergency shutoff knob may harm some
software files. Therefore, use this knob only in case of emergency.
Do not use the emergency shutoff knob to turn the system off as a
normal procedure.
2.9.3 Ready and Standby Buttons

The Ready and Standby buttons are located in the bottom right corner
of the treatment screen. When the Standby button is red, the system is
in Standby mode. Clinical indications and treatment parameters can be
entered, but it is impossible to trigger a pulse.
When the operator presses the Ready button, the system is enabled for
operation. When the progress bar is filled, the system switches to
Ready, the Ready button turns green and a pulse can be triggered.
While the system is in Ready mode, any touch on the screen (except for
the Chiller button) automatically switches the system to Standby mode.
2.9.4 Emission Indicators

The M22 system is equipped with a visual emission indicator on the
control panel. This indicator has three modes of operation:
Off: When the system is turned on and in Standby mode.

Blinking: When the system is charging the capacitors and in
Ready mode, providing an alert prior to pulse
emission.
Continuous: When laser triggering is enabled and during pulse
emission
In addition, a beeper in the system console sounds when the system

switches to Ready, providing an audible alert prior to pulse emission.
2-14
Safety
2.9.5 Safety Switch

The Multi-Spot Nd:YAG and Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpieces are
equipped with a safety switch and indicator. The safety switch must
first be pressed before laser emission and before pressing the laser
trigger (not simultaneously). It enables laser emission only within an
allotted time interval (30 seconds). The safety switch has an orange
indicator that lights up when laser triggering is enabled. If the allotted
time has passed, then press the safety switch again.
2.9.6 Idle Mode

The inactivity timer feature transfers the system to Idle mode whenever
the system has not been used for thirty minutes.
2.9.7 Remote Interlock Connector

M22 incorporates a remote interlock connector for connecting an
external interlock on the entrance door to the operating room. The
external remote interlock, when installed, disables the system and
prevents pulse emission when the entrance door is open.
2.9.8 Electro-Mechanical Safety Shutter

The system incorporates an electro-mechanical safety shutter that is
enabled only when the system is in Ready mode, and opens only when
the module's trigger is activated by the operator.
If the system incurs an error situation, this shutter will remain closed
and disable further light output until the error is resolved.
2.10 Equipment Classification

• Electric shock protection: Class I, Type B
• Protection against ingress of liquids: Ordinary equipment
• Not suitable for use in presence of flammable anesthetic mixture
with air or nitrous oxide.
• Mode of operation: Continuous
PB-1042431 Rev D 2-15

2.11 Warning, Certification and

Identification Labels
As required by national and international regulatory agencies, appropri-
ate warning labels have been mounted in the specified locations. Figure
2-2 displays the identification and certification labels affixed to the
system and its modules.
2-16
Safety
Figure 2-3 Warning Certification and Identification Labels
PB-1042431 Rev D 2-17

2.11.1 Symbols Descriptions

The labels located on the system's panels, components and packaging
contain the following information (For illustration purposes only):
2-18
Safety
PB-1042431 Rev D 2-19

2-20
Safety
2.12 EMC Guidance and Manufacturer’s

Declaration
2.12.1 Electromagnetic Emissions
PB-1042431 Rev D 2-21

2.12.2 Electromagnetic Immunity
2-22
Safety
PB-1042431 Rev D 2-23

2.12.3 Recommended Separation Distances
2-24
Installation
C H A P T E R
INSTALLATION
3.1 Introduction
On-site installation of the M22 system and upgrade modules involves
unpacking and initial system test and calibration. Installation is carried
out by CEs authorized by Lumenis, who do the following:
1. Verify the crate integrity and check the shock indicator.

2. Unpack the M22 system and position it in the desired location.
3. Verify the integrity of the system and its components.
4. Adjust the cart height (when ResurFX optional upgrade is
included).
5. Fill the water tank with deionized/distilled water.
6. Install the handpiece cradles and connect the handpiece(s).
7. Unpack and insert the assorted lightguides and filters in the
dedicated compartment within the system.
8. Plug the system into a designated electrical outlet.
9. Test the system for proper calibration and functional operation of
all components and software.
10. Operate the system and upgrade if additional module options are
included.
11. Fill-in the Installation Report and Check List, and send it to the
Lumenis Service Department.* (See Installation Report - M22 on
page 3-122).
(*) Use only photocopies of the Installation Check List and Report.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-1

Caution
This chapter contains information regarding the ResurFX
module.
Only Lumenis-trained installers are qualified to connect the

ResurFX module and its accessories to the M22 system.
Note
For systems with multiple modules: First install the M22 system.
Then install the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG module, and lastly, install the
ResurFX module.
Note
Before upgrading the M22 system with ResurFX module, first verify
the current system software version and series number. Please
order the relevant kit(s) to upgrade the M22 to software V3.0 before
installing the ResurFX module. For more details, refer to Upgrading
the System from Version 2.0 to GUI Software V3.0 (with 24VAC AUX
Filter Harness Installation for Charger Rev 1) on page 3-26.
3.2 Facility Requirements

Before unpacking the M22 system, ensure that the site meets the
requirements described in the following sections.
Note
The user must be informed of the site preparation requirements prior
to installation.
3.2.1 Electrical Requirements

The system is shipped with a universal power supply module.
Accordingly, the system will require a separate line supply of:
3-2
Installation
• 100-240 ±10% VAC, 15A, 50/60 Hz, single phase
Input power lines should be free of transients, voltage and current

spikes, sags and surges. Consequently, the system power line should
not be shared with other heavy variable loads such as elevators, air
conditioning systems, large motors, etc.
It is strongly recommended that the system be connected to a

separate power line with separate circuit breakers. Lumenis
cannot guarantee adequate performance unless the system is
connected to a dedicated circuit.
There is a 15 Amp circuit breaker on the service panel at the back of the
system. When the circuit breaker trips, it disconnects power from the
system. To restore power after the circuit breaker has tripped, raise the
circuit breaker.
3.2.2 Space and Positioning Requirements

Space should be allocated with adequate ventilation and free air flow.
The working area for the system should be prepared according to the
dimensions shown in Figure 3-1. In order to guarantee proper
ventilation, always keep the sides of the system at least 0.5 m (20”)
from the wall or from other obstructions to air flow.
Figure 3-1 Physical Dimensions, M22 and M22

with ResurFX Module
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-3

3.2.3 Environmental Requirements
Air Quality
The system should operate in a non-corrosive atmosphere. Corrosive
materials such as acids can damage electrical wiring, electronic
components and the surfaces of optical components.
Air-borne dust particles should be kept to a minimum. Dust particles

absorb light and heat up. Hot particles located on the optical filters can
damage them. Metallic dust is destructive to electrical equipment.
Temperature and Humidity

• Operating Environment: 10°C –30°C (50°F –86°F),
relative humidity 10 to 90% non-condensing.
• Storage:(-20°C) to 70°C [(-4°F) to 158°F],
relative humidity 10 to 90% non-condensing
• When the system is used intensively it will emit heat. Therefore, it is
recommended that the treatment room be air-conditioned.
Atmospheric Pressure
Atmospheric Pressure: Operating and storage: 70-106kPa.
3.2.4 Remote Interlock Connection (Optional)

The remote interlock is a safety feature that disables the system if the
treatment room doors are opened or the interlock plug is removed while
the system is in Ready mode.
Use of a remote interlock is optional; however, you must insert the
interlock plug into the service panel receptacle (see Figure 3-2)
whether or not you are using a remote interlock connection. The system
remains inoperative until the plug is inserted into the port.
When using a remote interlock, the system is automatically disabled
and returns to Standby mode if the treatment door is opened or the
interlock plug is removed, and an error message appears on the control
panel monitor. To resume treatment, close the treatment room door or
reinsert the interlock plug, acknowledge the error message and press
Ready to resume normal treatment.
3-4
Installation
Installing the Remote Interlock

Connect the 3-pin interlock plug by inserting it into the connection
port; turn the plug's locking collar clockwise until finger-tight. The
body of the plug is polarized to prevent incorrect insertion.
Figure 3-2 Remote Interlock Plug Connection
WARNING
Ensure that the unit is turned off and that the power cord
is disconnected from the outlet before connecting or
disconnecting the remote interlock system.
1. Install the external switch on the entrance door such that:
• Its contacts close when the door is shut.
• Its contacts are open when the door is open.
2. Disassemble the interlock plug (supplied with the unit by removing
the small screw that holds its components together.
3. Unsolder and remove the short connected between pins 1 and 2.
4. Solder one of the leads from the external switch to pin 1 of the
interlock plug.
5. Solder the other lead from the external switch to pin 2 of the
interlock plug.
6. Reassemble the interlock plug and tighten the screw.
7. Connect the plug to its connector on the unit’s service panel.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-5

Figure 3-3 3-pin Interlock Plug
Note
The part number of the remote interlock connector for series number
002 and older is SP-1047580 (male pins). The part number of the
remote interlock connector for series number 003 and newer is SP-
1094580 (female pins).
3.2.5 Required Tools for Installation

The following tools are required for installing the M22 system and
various optional modules:
• Standard tool kit

• external USB keyboard
• Ophir FL250A power meter (calibrated)
• Deionized/distilled water
• Optional Tools, as needed:
• System Calibration tool
• 52-pin extension harness assembly
• Additional Tools for Multi-Spot Nd:YAG module:

• Nd:YAG hollow tool tip
• Nd:YAG calibration device (shipped with Nd:YAG kit)
• Additional Tools for ResurFX module:

• ResurFX hollow tool tip for handpiece
3-6
Installation
• Refill/drain water tool

• Thermal paper
• Hollow tool (needed only for troubleshooting during
installation)
• Additional Tools for Q-Switched Nd:YAG module:

• Q-Switched Nd:YAG for installation
• Q-Switched Nd:YAG hollow tool (needed only for
troubleshooting)
3.3 Unpacking and Installation for M22

For unpacking and installation of the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG module, see
Unpacking and Installation- Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Module on page 3-56.
For unpacking and installation of the ResurFX module, see Unpacking

and Installation-ResurFX Module on page 3-90.
Note
Before unpacking the M22 system, ensure that the site meets the
requirements described in Facility Requirements on page 3-2.
The system has passed full quality assurance testing before shipment
and should be operational upon delivery.
The M22 should be positioned in close proximity to the electrical outlet

to which it will be connected; this is in order to avoid accidents
involving the power cable lying loose on the floor.
3.3.1 Unpacking the System

The M22 system is shipped in a shockproof container. Contents may
vary according to the purchase agreement with Lumenis, but the parts
and accessories generally shipped in the container are:
• M22 platform
• Universal IPL handpiece
• Accessories kit:
• Operator’s manual
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-7

• Coupling gel
• handpiece cradles (x2)
• Universal IPL ExpertFilters set
• Universal IPL SapphireCool lightguides set
• Universal IPL safety glasses, OD 5 (patient) and OD 3 (x2)
(physician and staff)
• Danger sign for patient treatment room
• 2 Power cables (USA and European)
To unpack the M22 system, do the following:
Note
Any damage to the packaging or to the system found prior to opening
the packaging, or during unpacking and installation of the system,
should be immediately reported to Lumenis and to the insurance
carrier.
1. Verify that the shipping box is intact and check the shock indicator
on the box to make sure that the crate has not been subjected to
shock. If it has, notify Lumenis offices and your insurance office
before opening the box.
3-8
Installation
shock
indicator
Tilt
indicator
Figure 3-4 Shock and Tilt Indicator Labels
2. Using a box cutter or a pair of scissors, cut the 2 bands wrapped

around the system box (see Figure 3-5).
Note
To prevent injury, use two hands when cutting the bands; cutting the
bands might cause the bands to fly off.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-9

Cut 2 bands
Figure 3-5 System Carton Unpacked
3. Using a box cutter or adjustable knife, cut the top cover tape down
the middle, and the tape on the sides (see Figure 3-6).
Figure 3-6 Cutting Tape on Box
3-10
Installation
4. Lift up the top flaps, open the top cover and remove the carton
buffer, together with the sponge underneath (see Figure 3-7).
Figure 3-7 Removing Carton Buffer with Sponge Attached
5. Lift out the handpiece case on the left side and lift out the
accessories box on the right side (see Figure 3-8).
accessories
box
Universal IPL
handpiece
case
Figure 3-8 Removing Handpiece Case and Accessories Box
6. Remove the cardboard dividers protecting the M22 system (see

Figure 3-9).
Figure 3-9 Removing the Cardboard Dividers
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-11

7. Lift the box up over the M22 system and remove it from the base
(see Figure 3-10).
Figure 3-10 Removing Box
8. Using the unit handles, lift the system and remove it from the box
base (see Figure 3-11).
Note
The unit weighs 40 Kg (88 Lbs); two people are required to lift the
unit.
Box Base
Figure 3-11 Removing Unit from Box Base
9. Unwrap and remove the plastic wrap from the unit.

10. Position the M22 system in its designated location.
3-12
Installation
Note
Before connecting the system components, inspect the individual
components, cables, and electrical connections for dirt, debris, or
damage. Check all electrical and umbilical cables to ensure that they
are not frayed or split, and ensure that they are positioned securely
such that they will not interfere with system operation.
3.3.2 Universal IPL Handpiece’s Cradle Installation

Refer to Figure 3-12:
Insert the cradle’s connecting handle into the corresponding rail under
the system’s side handle (1). Push it all the way in until you feel the
locking button “snap” into place. The cradle is now locked and secure
(2).
Insert the handpiece into the cradle (3).
To remove the cradle from the system, press the locking button (4) and
slide the cradle out of its rail.
Note
The cradle’s design is universal to accommodate all types of the
system’s handpieces.
Figure 3-12 Handpiece Cradle Installation
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-13

3.3.3 Connect/Disconnect the Universal IPL

Handpiece
To connect the Universal IPL handpiece: remove the protective cap
from the handpiece’s connector. Connect the handpiece's connector to
the connection port by inserting the connector and turning it clockwise
until it stops (see Figure 3-13). Make sure that the handpiece's
connector is aligned correctly with the connection port before insertion.
Figure 3-13 Connecting the Handpiece
Make sure that it is securely attached to the connection port. Turn the
connector counter-clockwise to release it.
Seat the handpiece in its cradle.
3.3.4 Light Guides and Filters

The M22 system’s platform offer a molded tray for storing the light
guides and filters for the Universal IPL and Multi-Spot Nd:YAG
handpieces. The tray is under the hinged cover on the front panel.
Refer to Figure 3-14: open the tray’s cover on the system’s front panel
and arrange the SapphireCool light guides, ExpertFilters and Nd:YAG
sapphire light guides in the tray.
3-14
Installation
Figure 3-14 Filter and Light Guide Storage
Note
The Q-Switched Nd:YAG treatment tip & the lens assembly tip do not
fit in the above tray. When not in use they should be stored in their
supplied box.
3.3.5 Filter Assembly Connection and Release

• Insert the filter by sliding it in the handpiece while holding the finger
grip.
• Remove it by grasping the finger grip and sliding out the filter.
Figure 3-15 Filter Insertion and Release
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-15

Caution
Take care not to allow the lightguide assembly to fall to the floor.
It is very important to keep the filter clean at all times, otherwise

it can damage the filter coating.
3.3.6 IPL SapphireCool Light Guide Installation
Caution
Clean the lightguide only after it has cooled and not immediately
after treatment.
1. Place the handpiece on a soft, flat surface, open the latch (1) to
release the light guide (2).
2. Remove the plastic cover holding the lightguide (4).
3. Insert the light guide into the handpiece and lock the latch (3).
Figure 3-16 Light Guide Insertion and Release
3-16
Installation
To remove the lightguide assembly from the handpiece, open the latch
and grip both sides of the lightguide to pull it out from the bottom.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-17

3.3.7 Filling the Cooling System
Caution
Use only distilled water when filling the cooling system’s
reservoir.
Fill the coolant reservoir with distilled water. The water level should
always be between the MIN. LEVEL and MAX. LEVEL marks on
the reservoir.
Note
For water refilling/draining for the M22 with ResurFX module, see
Filling the Water Tank on the ResurFX Module on page 3-106.
The cooling system should always be drained when the system may be
subjected to a freezing environment (cold storage, air freight, etc.). The
water tank should be removed from the system during transportation of
any method.
To fill the water tank (see Figure 3-17):
1. Lift the black handle [1].

2. Press the black release button [2].
3. Pull the water tank assembly (bottle and cap) out of the system [3].
4. Unscrew the bottle from the cap assembly and fill it to the max line
with deionized/distilled water.
5. Tighten the bottle cap and then put the water tank back into its
location: press the bottle and cap assembly in until you feel it 'snap'
into place.
3-18
Installation
Figure 3-17 Refilling the Water Tank
3.3.8 Initial System Testing

Prior to clinical use, test out the M22 system to verify that the system,
including its built-in safety features, is operational.
Read the safety chapter before turning on the system.
Before beginning system test, make sure that the operating area is safe
and secure. As when performing any laser procedure, flammable
materials should be moistened or beyond contact of the laser beam.
Wear protective goggles or glasses.
If at any point during the test the system does not perform as described,
discontinue use and troubleshoot.
Before beginning the initial system test, familiarize yourself with the
system controls described below. Use of the controls is described fully
in the section System Components and Controls on page 4-5.
Main Control Panel

The main control panel is located at the top of the console and
incorporates system controls and the touch-screen panel.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-19

Refer to Figure 3-18: For initial system testing it is important to know

the locations of the touch-screen (1), the start button (2), the laser
shutoff knob (3) and the laser/light emission indicator (4).
Figure 3-18 Control Panel
Cables Connection Instructions

are not frayed or split, and ensure that they are positioned securely such
that they will not interfere with system operation.
1. Connect the power cable with the appropriate VAC into its
receptacle at the back of the system (see Figure 3-19).
3-20
Installation
Figure 3-19 Power Cable Receptacle
2. Secure the cable to its receptacle by pulling down the spring lock.
3. Connect the cable plug into the main wall outlet.
System Startup
1. Make sure that the emergency stop button is not engaged (pressed
down). If it is, turn it counter-clockwise until it releases and pops
up.
2. Turn the system's main On/Off switch – located on the service
panel – to the On position.
3. Press the Start button; the system will turn on, the software will
initialize and the panel will display a splash screen.
4. The system will perform a series of internal self-test routines. When
these have completed satisfactorily, the Login screen will appear on
the touch-screen.
5. If the system does not perform as described, discontinue use and
troubleshoot. If the system performs as described, complete the
login:
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-21


Laser Shutoff Knob Check

The laser shutoff knob is designed to disable laser/light emission when
pressed. To check this knob:
1. While the system is on and the main Treatment screen is

displayed, press down on the laser shutoff knob; the system should
display the following error message: Laser Stop Pressed.
2. To resume operation, turn the knob clockwise until it pops up.
Restart the system to resume normal operation.
Remote Interlock Check

Laser beam emission is disabled when the remote interlock plug is not
connected or is improperly connected to the service panel, even if it is
not wired to an actual remote interlock. To check this:
1. Set the system to Standby mode.

2. Unplug the remote interlock plug.
3. Try to select Ready mode; the system should display the following
error message: Remote Interlock Fault, Please verify Treatment
Room door is closed.
4. If the system does not display the error message and remains in
Ready mode, discontinue use and report to Lumenis Service.
Emergency Stop Button Check

The Emergency Stop button is designed to disable laser emission when
pressed. To check this button:
1. While the system is on and the main Treatment screen is displayed, press
down on the laser shutoff knob; the system should display the following
error message: Emergency Stop Button Condition Fault.
2. To resume operation, pull the switch up; the system will return to
Standby mode.
3. Touch the Ready key to enable lasing.
3-22
Installation
3.3.9 Testing the System’s Functional Operation

First time operation of the system includes the following procedures:
• Turning on the system and adjusting date and time via the BIOS
(see Figure 3-20).
• Filter ID Verification (see Filter ID Verification on page 3-52).
• Testing System Handpiece Energy (see IPL Energy Test on
page 3-53).
Modifying Date and Time via BIOS Screen

The BIOS Setup Utility changes system behavior by modifying the
BIOS configuration. The setup program uses a number of menus to
make changes and to turn features on or off.
Note
Do not attempt to change any of the features’ setup in the BIOS
except for the Time and Date configuration during first installation, or
as needed due to local time changes.
An external keyboard is needed for this procedure. Refer to Figure 3-

20:
1. Connect an external keyboard to the USB port at the back of the

system.
2. Turn on the system; while the system is starting up, press the Del
button on the keyboard until the BIOS screen appears (see Figure
3-20).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-23

Figure 3-20 Entering BIOS
3. Using the keyboard up/down arrows, navigate to Standard CMOS

Features and press Enter; the Date & Time screen appears (see
Figure 3-21).
Figure 3-21 Date & Time Screen
4. Using the keyboard Up/Down arrows, navigate to the Date or Time:

• Date (mm/dd/yy)
• Time (hh/mm/ss)
3-24
Installation
5. Using the PageUP/PageDown buttons, adjust the date and time

values:
Note
PageUP decreases the value; PageDown increases the value.
6. After setting the date and time, press F10 on the keyboard to save
the values.
7. A message “Save to CMOS and Exit? Y/N” appears (“Y” is default;
see Figure 3-22). Press Enter on the keyboard.
Figure 3-22 Save to CMOS and Exit Prompt
8. The system reboots.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-25

3.4 Upgrading the System from Version

2.0 to GUI Software V3.0 (with 24VAC
AUX Filter Harness Installation for
Charger Rev 1)
This section must be performed prior to the ResurFX module installa-
tion if the system software version is below 3.0. The procedure
includes:
• User Presets Backup (Section 3.4.1)

• Installing the 24V AUX Filter Harness (Section 3.4.2)
• Install the 2 mounting pins on 52-pin connector (Section 3.4.3)
• Setting the BIOS for Software 3.0 (Section 3.4.4)
• GUI Software Upgrade from 2.0 to 3.0 (Section 3.4.5)
• System Controller DSP Software Installation (Section 3.4.6)
For Systems with Kit Includes: Order

Series Number Part Number
001,002 1. Replace M22 interface FCR000158
(SW V1.0) module
2. Replace water level with flow
switch
3. SW Upgrade to V2.0
1. Install 24V AC AUX filter FCR000300
2. Install 2 pins for 52-pin
connector on M22 base
003, 004 1. Replace pressure sensor KT-1091721
(SW V1.5, V2.0) with flow switch
2. Install 2 pins for 52-pin
005 1. Install 24V AC AUX filter FCR000300
(SW 2.0) 2. Install 2 pins for 52-pin
006, 007 1. ResurFX-Ready with
(SW 3.0) Software V3.0
3-26
Installation
If the system has software version 3.0 or newer already installed,

skip this section and proceed directly to Post Installation Steps on
page 3-52 (Section 3.5).
3.4.1 User Presets Backup

1. Perform backup of user presets for Version 2.0 for recovery
purposes if the software upgrade to V3.0 fails; see Backup/Restore
User Presets on page 8-5.
Note
System software version 2.0 presets are not recognized by software
version 3.0. During the upgrade, the system presets will be adjusted
for compatibility with version 3.0.
WARNING
The system's internal components and sub-systems
carry dangerous voltages. Before servicing the
system, always turn it off and disconnect the power
cable from the wall outlet.
Caution
To avoid damaging delicate electronic components on the
printed-circuit board, use an Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)
band.
3.4.2 Installing the 24V AC AUX Filter Harness

As part of improvement for reducing noise in the M22 system, a 24V
AC AUX filter harness was installed on the output line of the 24V AC
of the charger.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-27

Figure 3-23 24V AC AUX Filter Harness
To install the 24VAC AUX harness, do the following:
1. Turn off the system and disconnect the plug from the main wall
power.
2. Remove the PC unit (see PC Unit Assembly Replacement on
page 10-8).
3. Open the top cover (see Top Cover Replacement on page 10-9).
4. Disconnect P10 harness from the charger (see Figure 3-24).
Figure 3-24 Disconnecting P10 from Charger
5. Take the 24VAC AUX filter harness and connect the male side to
the plug that was just disconnected. Secure with the plug’s screws
(see Figure 3-25).
3-28
Installation
Figure 3-25 Connecting the 24V AC AUX Filter Harness (1)
6. Connect the female side of the harness to the charger. Secure with
the plug’s screws (see Figure 3-26).
Figure 3-26 Connecting the 24V AC AUX Filter Harness (2)
7. Gather and situate the harness as shown and secure with tie wraps
tightly so as not to interfere with closing the top cover (see Figure
3-27).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-29

Figure 3-27 Securing the Harness with Tie Wraps
8. Close the system top cover.

9. Return the PC unit to its location.
10. Operate the system and verify proper operation.
3-30
Installation
3.4.3 Add 2 Mounting Pins to 52-Pin Connector Base

1. Turn off the system and disconnect the plug from the main wall
power.
2. Remove the PC unit (see PC Unit Assembly Replacement on
page 10-8).
3. Open the top cover (see Top Cover Replacement on page 10-9).
Figure 3-28 Top Cover Opened
4. With a long, flat screwdriver, release the two large flat screws on
each side of the 52-pin connector (see Figure 3-29).
Figure 3-29 Releasing Two Large Flat Screws
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-31

5. Pull out the 52-pin connector base to expose the bottom side of the
connector.
Figure 3-30 52-pin Connector, Bottom View
6. Take the two pins from the kit and insert them into the two empty
holes available on the 52-pin connector base. Insert the screws on
the other side to tighten them against the connector base.
Figure 3-31 Assembling Two Pins
7. Use manual counter-pressure to hold the pin in place while

tightening with the flat screwdriver. Make sure the screw is
tightened all the way, so that it is perfectly flat against the
connector base.
3-32
Installation
Figure 3-32 Tightening Pins
8. For the rear pin, access the screw to tighten by inserting the long
screwdriver under the system’s handle.
Figure 3-33 Tightening Pins - Back Pins
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-33

9. Insert the connector base back into its location and secure with the
two large flat screws (see Figure 3-34).
Figure 3-34 Connector Base - Final View
10. Close the system top cover.

11. Return the PC unit to its location.
12. Operate the system and verify proper operation.
3-34
Installation
3.4.4 Setting the BIOS for Software V3.0

Prior to installing the ResurFX module, the BIOS must be reconfigured
according to the settings below in order to accommodate the correct
COM address for communication between the system PC and the
ResurFX module.
The BIOS Setup Utility changes system behavior by modifying the

BIOS configuration. The setup program uses a number of menus to
make changes and to turn features on or off.
Note
Do not attempt to change any of the features’ setup in the BIOS
except for the ports listed in Table 3-1 on page 3-37 during first
installation.
An external keyboard is needed for this procedure.
1. Connect an external keyboard to the PC module.

2. Turn on the system; while the system is starting up, press the Del
button on the keyboard several times until the BIOS screen appears
(see Figure 3-35).
Figure 3-35 Entering BIOS
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-35

3. Using the keyboard up/down arrows, navigate to Integrated

Peripherals and press Enter; the screen appears (see Figure 3-37).
Figure 3-36 Select Integrated Peripherals
Figure 3-37 On Board Serial Ports Configuration Screen
3-36
Installation
4. Using the keyboard Up/Down arrows, navigate between the ports

and enter the correct values for the serial ports according to table:
Note
Example: Navigate with the Up/Down arrows to Port 1 [Value]; press
ENTER; a few selections will appear; select the correct value [2F8]
and press ENTER to store the value.
Table 3-1. ResurFX BIOS Serial Port Configuration

:
Serial Port Required Address Required IRQ

(COM) Value Value
Number
1 2F8 IRQ3
2 3E8 IRQ10
3 2E8 IRQ5
4 3F8 IRQ4
The final resulting update should appear as in Figure 3-38.
Figure 3-38 BIOS Serial Port Configuration
5. After setting the correct values, press F10 on the keyboard to save
the values.
6. A message “Save to CMOS and Exit? Y/N” appears (“Y” is default;
see Figure 3-39). Press Enter on the keyboard.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-37

Figure 3-39 Save to CMOS and Exit Prompt
7. BIOS update is complete. Turn the system off and then back on
again.
3.4.5 GUI Software Upgrade from 2.0 to 3.0
Required tools
• USB “Disk-on-Key”
• PC
The GUI and Operating System software are located on the Compact
Flash (CF) memory attached to the industrial computer module.
Software upgrade installation is performed when updating the software
with a newer version. The software is shipped to the FSE on a CD-
ROM, which should be copied to a USB “Disk-on-Key”.
1. Turn on the system; the Login screen appears (see Figure 3-40).
3-38
Installation
Figure 3-40 Login Screen
2. Login as Service; (1111); the Select Mode screen appears (see

Figure 3-41).
Figure 3-41 Select Mode Screen
3. Take the USB Disk-On-Key with the software to be installed (see

Figure 3-42) and insert it into its connection port at the back of the
system (see Figure 3-44).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-39

Figure 3-42 Software Installation Files
Figure 3-43 USB Connection Port
4. Press Utility; the Utility screen appears (see Figure 3-44).
Figure 3-44 Utility Screen
3-40
Installation
5. In the Utility screen, press Update Machine (see Figure 3-45); the
Updates screen appears (see Figure 3-46).
Figure 3-45 Utility Screen - Select Update Machine
6. In the Update screen, select Software Update; the Software

Upgraded screen appears and automatically starts to upgrade the
system with the new software version 3.0 (see Figure 3-46).
Figure 3-46 Update Screen - Select Software Updates
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-41

Note
Please wait until the software process bar starts running (see
Figure 3-47; it will take approximately 1.5 minutes to start. Wait until
the process bar is completed; this may take several minutes. If the
process is stopped in the middle of execution, reload version 2.0 first
with its presets and then repeat the upgrade to 3.0.
Figure 3-47 Software Installation with Progress Bar
7. When software installation is complete, the Software Upgraded

Screen disappears and the system Desktop Screen appears,
indicating that the software Upgrade is complete. (No message
appears).
8. Disconnect the USB Disk-On-Key.
9. Turn off the system.
10. Turn on the system and verify in the Select Mode screen that the
new software version was installed: Rev. 3.0.3 (see Figure 3-48).
3-42
Installation
Figure 3-48 Select Mode Screen- Verify New Software Revision
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-43

3.4.6 System Controller DSP Software Installation

The DSP software is shipped on CD media. Installing the software
requires having the software available on a USB "Disk-on-Key"
device. Lumenis will deliver the software CD to the FSE, and the FSE
should copy the software to the disk-on-key device.
Figure 3-49 DSP Software Files
Note
This software installation does not require the removal of any
system covers.
The software resides in the flash-memory card on the upper side of the
controller board located on the back side of the system, inside the
interface module (see Figure 3-50):
Figure 3-50 Controller Board, Flash Memory Card Location
3-44
Installation
1. Press the Start button on the system's console; the system starts its
initialization process, until the Login screen appears (see Figure 3-
51).
2. In the Login screen, type the password 1111 by touching the

numbered buttons on the screen and then touch OK; the Select Mode
screen appears (see Figure 3-52).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-45

3. In the Select Mode screen, press the icon in the upper right-
hand corner of the screen; the Shut Down screen appears (see
Figure 3-53).
Figure 3-53 Shut Down Screen
4. Press Shut Down. The M22 Desktop screen appears (see Figure 3-
54).
Figure 3-54 M22 Desktop Screen
5. Take the USB with all the software files to be installed and insert it
into its connection port at the back of the system (see Figure 3-55).
3-46
Installation
6. In the Desktop screen, press the My Device icon (see Figure 3-56).
Figure 3-56 My Device Icon
7. Verify that the USB Disk icon appears on the screen, and double-
touch the USB Disk icon (see Figure 3-57).
Figure 3-57 USBDisk Icon
8. Double-touch the FlashWriter icon to open it (see Figure 3-58).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-47

Figure 3-58 FlashWriter Icon
9. The FlashWriter Screen appears (see Figure 3-59).
Figure 3-59 Flash Writer Screen
10. Make sure that COM2 and Main, Erase, Program, and Verify
checkboxes are selected.
11. Press the Browse button and browse to open the My

Device folder (see Figure 3-60).
3-48
Installation
Figure 3-60 Select My Device
12. Double-touch to select USBDisk\MRIPL.OUT file (see Figure 3-61).
Figure 3-61 MRIPL.OUT File
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-49

13. Press Start. The progress bar runs, executing the Initializing
Connection, Erasing Flash, and Programming Flash tasks. This may
take several minutes to complete (see Figure 3-62).
Figure 3-62 Flash Writer Progress Bar
3-50
Installation
14. When the Flash installation is complete, a “Verification Successful”

message appears (see Figure 3-63), and 2 beeps are heard.
Figure 3-63 Verification Successful
15. Disconnect the USB, and press Exit to return to the My Device
screen.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-51

DSP Software Version Installation Verification

1. Turn on the system.
2. Open the Service screen.
3. Verify that the correct software version appears and that the
Controller CRC and “Expected” values are the same.
Figure 3-64 Software DSP and CRC Verification
3.5 Post Installation Steps
3.5.1 Filter ID Verification

Perform this check with every filter in the set.
1. Insert each filter separately into the Universal IPL handpiece.

2. Verify that the correct ID appears on the user treatment screen.
3. Check each filter visually for damage or contamination.
3-52
Installation
3.5.2 IPL Energy Test
Caution
The next steps involve firing the handpiece; wear the appropriate
safety eyewear.
The M22 system's energy must be checked at least once a year. The
calibration check and – if necessary – the calibration procedure are
performed only by Lumenis-authorized service personnel.
The calibration check compares the fluence reading on the M22

treatment screen to that of a calibrated power meter. For example,
when filter 515 is selected with treatment preset of 10J/cm2, the
acceptable range of the reading is 48-58J.
The calibration check is performed by Lumenis service personnel,

using a calibrated Ophir power meter.
To test the Universal IPL handpiece, do the following:
Note
When performing the energy test, disable the defrosting function.
1. Set up the Ophir power meter:

a. Connect the FL-250A detector head to the power meter (see
Figure 3-65).
Figure 3-65 Detector Head and Power Meter Setup
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-53

b. Turn the power meter ON (button on left side).

c. Press the red circular Menu button twice.
d. Press the LASER scale (left triangular button) until <.8u or
VIS is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen
(depending on your personal detector).
e. Press the red circular Menu button twice and choose the
ENERGY scale (left triangular button); the readings are now
set to Joules (J).
f. Press the RANGE (triangular right) button and set it to the
highest setting (between 200-300 Joules, depending on your
personal detector).
g. Exit the RANGE scale by pressing Exit (triangular right
button).
h. Press the MORE (central triangular) button.
i. Choose the THRESHOLD position.
j. Press the GO button to confirm.
k. Choose MED value threshold; this will ensure that the OPHIR
will not be too sensitive to random noise.
l. Press the EXIT button to confirm; the power meter is now ready
for measuring the Universal IPL handpiece.
2. From the User treatment screen, select the presets according to
Table 3-2 on page 3-55.
Figure 3-66 Energy Test Preset 1 (example)
3-54
Installation
3. Firing at a distance of 1-2 mm into the external power meter’s

aperture, perform three shots for each filter and calculate the
average value. (The check uses three different filters and different
presets for each filter.)
Figure 3-67 IPL Energy Test
4. Record the pulse parameters (T1, D1, Fluence) from the table
below into the User screen.
Table 3-2. Energy Test Results Table - IPL
Pulse Parameters from User Screen Measured Energy on External Power Meter
Filter T1* D1* T2 D2 T3 Required E1 E2 E3 AVG Acceptable

[msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] Fluence [J] [J] [J] [J] Range [J]
[J/cm2]
515 13 0 0 - - 10 48-58
590 10 40 10 - - 35 166-202
695 6 60 6 60 6 17 81-99
*T = pulse width, D=Delay
5. If the readings of the M22 fluence are different from the Ophir
power meter readings and are out the acceptable range, perform
Universal IPL Handpiece Energy Calibration by Service on
page 8-60, or replace the Universal IPL handpiece.
Installation is complete. Fill out the Installation Report - M22 on

page 3-122.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-55


Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Module
In addition to the M22 system, an optional Multi-Spot Nd:YAG
module upgrade kit is available. This kit includes:
• Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece (x 1)

• Physician Multi-Spot Nd:YAG laser safety glasses, OD 7 (x 2)
• Patient Protective eyewear OD 7 (x 1)
• Multi-Spot Nd:YAG lightguides in container:
• SapphireCool light guide 2 x 4 mm (x 1)
• SapphireCool light guide 6mm Ø (x 1)
• Software upgrade kit (HASP) (x 1)

• Nd:YAG Calibration device (x 1)
3.6.1 Required Tools

See Required Tools for Installation on page 3-6.
3.6.2 Unpacking the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Kit

To unpack the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG kit, do the following:
Note
Any damage to the packaging found prior to opening the packaging,
or during unpacking and installation of the system, should be
immediately reported to Lumenis and to the insurance carrier.
1. Verify that the shipping box is intact and visually make sure that
the box has not been damaged. If it has, notify Lumenis offices and
your insurance office before opening the box.
2. With a box cutter, open the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG box.
3-56
Installation
Figure 3-68 Unpack Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece
3. Remove the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG accessories and Multi-Spot

Nd:YAG handpiece from the box.
Figure 3-69 Unpack Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Accessories, Handpiece
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-57

4. Unwrap and remove the plastic wrap from the handpiece.
Note
5. Perform the steps to connect the handpiece in the section Connect

the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece on page 3-58.
3.6.3 Connect the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece

The Universal IPL, Multi-spot Nd:YAG or Q-Switched Nd:YAG all
connect to the same connection port when used.
To install the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece: remove the protective

cap from the handpiece’s connector. Connect the handpiece's connector
to the exposed connection port by inserting the connector and turning it
clockwise until it stops (see Figure 3-70). Make sure that it is securely
attached to the connection port. Turn the connector counter-clockwise
to release it.
Note
Make sure that the handpiece's connector is aligned correctly with
the connection port before insertion.
Figure 3-70 Handpiece Connection Port
3-58
Installation
Light Guide Assembly Connection and Release

The Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece's lightguide assembly can be
changed routinely during treatment in order to change the spot size.
Connect the light guide assembly by pressing its proximal side into the
handpiece's aperture until you feel it 'snap' into place.
Remove the light guide assembly from the handpiece by pressing the
release button; the lightguide will pop out.
Caution
Take care not to allow the light guide assembly to fall to the floor.
Figure 3-71 Nd:YAG handpiece
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-59

Light Guides Storage

The M22 system’s platform offer a molded tray for storing the
lightguides for the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece.
The tray is under the hinged cover on the front panel.
Refer to Figure 3-72: open the tray’s cover on the system’s front panel
and arrange the Nd:YAG sapphire lightguides in the tray.
Figure 3-72 Light Guide Storage
Note
The Q-Switched Nd:YAG treatment tip and the lens assembly tip do
not fit in the above tray. When not in use they should be stored in
their supplied box.
3.6.4 Enabling the System for Multi-Spot Nd:YAG

1. Turn on the M22 system; after the system has initialized and the
Main screen is displayed, press the Utility Menu button to access the
Utility Menu screen (see Figure 3-73).
3-60
Installation
2. Press the Update Machine button (see Figure 3-74); the Updates
3. Press the Modules Update button; the Modules Update screen

appears ((see Figure 3-75).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-61

Figure 3-75 Updates Screen
Figure 3-76 Modules Update Screen
4. Press Start Update; the prompt “Please insert the USB update key”
appears (see Figure 3-77).
3-62
Installation
Figure 3-77 Prompt to Insert USB Update Key
5. Insert the HASP (USB flash device) into the USB connection port
on the system's rear panel and press OK; the update executes and
the progress bar appears with the message “Updating...” (this can
take up to two minutes).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-63

6. Press the OK button to proceed; a progress bar displays the software

installation process and a completion message when it is done (see
Figure 3-79); press OK.
Figure 3-79 Upgrade Successful Message
Note
IMPORTANT: The HASP is for one-time use only; If you attempt to
use the same HASP again for another upgrade, Error #311 will
appear (see Figure 3-80).
Figure 3-80 Error 311
3-64
Installation
Upgrade Verification
After performing the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG upgrade, verify that the
upgrade has been completed successfully by observing that the
Nd:YAG button is enabled (white) in the Select Mode Screen (see
Figure 3-81).
YAG mode
enabled
Figure 3-81 Select Mode Screen with Nd:YAG Mode Enabled
After performing the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG upgrade, perform Nd:YAG

handpiece calibration using the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG calibration device.
3.6.5 Calibrating the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece

Calibration of the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece is necessary to
ensure performance optimization. Calibration can be initiated by the
user and can also be required by the system. When beginning
treatment, the system checks if the handpiece requires calibration and
will instruct the user to perform calibration.
Regardless of how the calibration process is started – system

requirement or user initiation – the process is the same.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-65

Caution
The energy output of a handpiece decreases over time. Thus, if
calibration is performed after a long time interval, the energy
emitted after the calibration may be higher than before the
calibration, for the same setting. Make sure to perform a test
patch before starting treatment.
Calibration is mandatory in the following cases and the system will

automatically initiate calibration in these instances:
• The first time the handpiece is connected to the system.

• When 3,000 pulses have been emitted from the module without
performing calibration.
The system will present a warning pop-up message requiring

calibration; pressing the OK button will launch the calibration process.
Refer to Figure 3-82: connect the supplied Multi-Spot Nd:YAG

handpiece's power meter to the M22 system's service panel. Carefully
follow the on-screen instructions to complete the calibration process.
Caution
Press and hold the handpiece's trigger until all calibration pulses
are complete! Releasing the trigger too early can result in
erroneous calibration results.
Figure 3-82 Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece Calibration Device

Connected to the System
3-66
Installation
3.6.6 Post-Installation Checks - Nd:YAG Energy Test

treatment screen to that of a calibrated power meter.
For example, when the 6 mm tip is selected with treatment preset of
20J/cm2, the acceptable range of the reading is 5-7J.

using a calibrated Ophir power meter and the Nd:YAG hollow tool tip.
To test the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece, do the following:

Figure 3-83).

d. Press the LASER scale (left triangular button) until YAG or
.8-6 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen
set to Joules (J).
personal detector).
button).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-67


for measuring the Nd:YAG handpiece.
2. Attach the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG hollow tool tip to the handpiece to
simulate 6 mm light guide or 2 x 4 mm light guide.
Note
The test uses two different spot sizes for each preset, simulated by
the hollow tool tip.

Table 3-3.
Figure 3-84 Energy Test Preset 1 - Nd:YAG
4. Firing from a distance of 2 mm into the external power meter’s

aperture, perform three shots for each light guide and calculate the
average value. (The test uses three different filters and different
Note
3-68
Installation
Figure 3-85 Firing Nd:YAG into Power Meter
6. If the readings are not within the acceptable range value as shown
in Table 3-3, perform Nd:YAG Handpiece Calibration Using the
Nd:YAG Calibration Device on page 8-93, or replace the
handpiece.
Table 3-3. Energy Test Results Table - Nd:YAG
Pulse Parameters from User Screen Measured Energy on External Power

Meter
Multi-Spot T1* D1* T2 D2 T3 Required E1 E2 E3 AVG Acceptable

Hollow [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] Fluence [J] [J] [J] [J] Range [J]
ToolTip [J/cm2]
Position
6 mm 7 0 0 0 0 20 5.3 – 7.2
6 mm 6 70 6 70 6 150 40.1 – 54.2
2 x 4 mm 4 0 0 0 0 75 5.9 – 8.0
2 x 4 mm 3 20 3 20 3 225 17.8 – 24.1
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-69


Q-Switched Nd:YAG Module
In addition to the M22 system, an optional Q-Switched Nd:YAG
module upgrade kit is available. This kit includes:
• Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece (x 1)

• Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece Calibration device (x 1)
• Q-Switched Lens Assembly & 6 mm metal treatment tip kit (x 1)
• Q-Switched Nd:YAG disposable treatment Tips 2 mm (pack of 30)
• Q-Switched Nd:YAG disposable treatment Tips 2.5 mm (pack of 30)
• Q-Switched Nd:YAG disposable treatment Tips 3.5 mm (pack of 30)
• Q-Switched Nd:YAG disposable treatment Tips 5 mm (pack of 30)
• Physician Q-Switched Nd:YAG laser safety glasses
• Safety Eyewear (physician, patient) x2
• Opaque eye protectors (x1)
• Q-Switched Nd:YAG upgrade HASP (x 1)
• Software Installation USB flash drive -
(automatic updates M22 SW and ResurFX, if installed).
• Laser Treatment Door Sign

3.7.2 Unpacking the Q-Switched Nd:YAG Kit

To unpack the Q-Switched Nd:YAG kit, do the following:
Note
1. Verify that the shipping box is intact and visually make sure that
the box has not been damaged. If it has, notify Lumenis offices and
3-70
Installation
2. With a box cutter, open the Q-Switched Nd:YAG box.

.
3. Remove the Q-Switched Nd:YAG accessories and Q-Switched

Nd:YAG handpiece from the box (see Figure 3-86).
Figure 3-86 Unpack Q-Switched Nd:YAG Accessories, Handpiece
Note
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-71

3.8 Upgrading the System from Version

3.0 to GUI Software V4.0
Note
Important: Upgrade to SW V4.0 can only be performed from V3.0.
Upgrade to V4.0 is mandatory in the following cases:
• when installing Q-Switched Nd:YAG on systems with V3.0

• when installing ResurFX series 001 on systems with V3.0
V4.0 is already installed for M22 series 008 and ResurFX series 001.
This section must be performed prior to the Q-Switched module

installation if the system software version is version 3.0. The procedure
includes:
• User Presets Backup (Section 3.4.1)

• System Software Upgrade from 3.0 to 4.0 (Section 3.8.1)-
includes M22 controller Upgrade, ResurFX Upgrade (if
needed-if not, the software will automatically skip the ResurFX
controller software upgrade), and enables system for Q-
Switched module.
3.8.1 System Software Upgrade

1. Verify which software version is installed on the system; go to the
M22 Main screen. The software version number in located on the
bottom of the screen.
3-72
Installation
Figure 3-87 Software Version
• If the first digit of the software version number is 1 or 2, please

upgrade the system first to V3.0, following the procedure in the
previous section.
• If the first digit of the software version is 3, continue with the
steps below.
• If the first digit of the software version is 4, skip these steps and
go to Enabling the System for Q-Switched on page 3-77.
2. Create a backup File of the User Presets (see User Presets
Backup on page 3-27).
3. In the Utility Menu screen, press on the Update Machine button (see
Figure 3-88).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-73

Figure 3-88 Update Machine
4. Insert the flash drive that contains the software (supplied with the
kit) to the USB port on the back side of the system.
5. In the Updates screen, press on the Software Updates button (see
Figure 3-89).
Figure 3-89 Software Updates Screen
6. The Installation screen appears. Press the Start button to start

installation (see Figure 3-90). The installation procedure takes up
to 8 minutes.
3-74
Installation
Caution
Do not interrupt the installation procedure after pressing the start
button.
Figure 3-90 Software Update - Start Button
7. Once the software installation is complete, the following message

appears: “Installation completed successfully, please restart the
system” (see Figure 3-91).
Figure 3-91 Software Update - Installation Complete Message
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-75

8. When the software update process is complete, turn off the system
and then turn it back on.
9. Login to the system and access the Handpiece Selection screen.
The Q-Switch handpiece icon appears and the software version
number is updated (see Figure 3-92).
Figure 3-92 Verify Software Update for Q-Switched
The software update process is now complete.
Continue to Enabling the System for Q-Switched on page 3-77 in order

to enable the Q-Switched Nd:YAG option.
3-76
Installation
3.8.2 Enabling the System for Q-Switched

1. Insert the supplied HASP to the USB port located on the back side
of the system (see Figure 3-93).
2. In the Handpiece Selection screen, press on the Utility Menu button

(see Figure 3-94).
Figure 3-94 Utility Menu Button on Handpiece Selection Screen
3. In the Utility Menu screen, press on the Machine Update button (see
Figure 3-95).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-77

Figure 3-95 Update Machine Button on Utility Menu Screen
4. In the Updates screen, press on the Modules Update button (see

Figure 3-96).
Figure 3-96 Module Update Button on Updates Screen
5. In the Modules Update screen, press on the Start Update button (see
Figure 3-97).
3-78
Installation
Figure 3-97 Start Update Button on Modules Update Screen
6. Confirm the pop-up by pressing the OK button (see Figure 3-98).
Figure 3-98 OK Pop-Up Window
7. When the update process is complete, clear the message by pressing

the OK button (see Figure 3-99).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-79

Figure 3-99 Update Process Completion Pop-Up Window
8. The module update process is now complete. Remove the HASP

from the USB port.
9. Turn the system off.
10. Turn on the system to verify new handpiece is enabled.
3.8.3 Connecting the Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece

to the M22 System
The Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece contains an ID chip with a unique
serial number, as well as important parameters such as calibration data
and installation date.
To install the handpiece: remove the protective cap from the

handpiece's connector. Connect the connector to the exposed
connection port by inserting the connector and turning it clockwise
until it stops (see Figure 3-100). Make sure that it is securely attached
to the connection port. Turn the connector counter-clockwise to release
it.
Note
Make sure that the handpiece's connector is aligned correctly with
the connection port before insertion.
3-80
Installation
Figure 3-100 Handpiece Connection Port
3.8.4 Inserting Q-Switched Nd:YAG Lens Assembly

and Treatment Tips
There are two options for performing treatments with the Q-Switched
Nd:YAG handpiece:
• Four plastic treatment tips in various sizes which are connected

to the lens assembly (see Figure 3-101) after it is mounted on
the handpiece.
• Metal treatment tip (see Figure 3-102) that incorporates a lens
assembly and is connected to the handpiece directly.
In order to start using either one of them, remove the protective cap
before inserting it into the Q-switched Nd:YAG handpiece.
Figure 3-101 Q-Switched Lens Assembly and Protective Cap
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-81

Figure 3-102 Q-Switched Metal Treatment Tips and Protective Cap
It is very important to keep the lens assembly clean at all times. The
lens assembly should be cleaned after each patient.
To clean the lens assembly, first wipe it with a dry cloth. Then clean it
with a cloth moistened with ethyl alcohol or isopropyl alcohol. Wipe it
with a lint-free cloth until it is thoroughly dry.
Press the spring button on the bottom side of the handpiece to eject the
lens assembly.
The Q-Switched Nd:YAG treatment tips can be changed routinely

during treatment in order to change the spot size.
Caution
Keep your hand underneath the lens assembly when pressing
the spring button to prevent it from falling to the floor.
Do not press the lens assembly ejection button when changing

or removing the treatment tip.
3-82
Installation
Figure 3-103 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece with Lens Assembly

and Treatment Tip
3.8.5 Turning the System On

Turn the system back on as described in Initial System Testing on
page 3-19.
When system initialization is complete, the Main screen will be

displayed, with the Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece icon enabled for
selection (see Figure 3-104).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-83

Figure 3-104 Main Screen with Q-Switch Nd:YAG Handpiece

Enabled
Caution
The Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece must be calibrated before
the first use. Refer to Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece
Calibration on page 3-84.
3.8.6 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece Calibration

Calibration of the Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece is necessary to
user and can also be required by the system. When beginning use, the
system checks if the handpiece requires calibration and will indicate
when to perform calibration.

Caution

automatically initiate calibration in the form of a pop-up warning
message:

• Whenever 50,000 pulses have been emitted from the module
without performing calibration.
1. Turn on the system and access the Q-Switched Nd:YAG Treatment
screen; a pop-up message will appear requesting calibration to be
performed (see Figure 3-105).
3-84
Installation
Figure 3-105 Handpiece Calibration Required Message
2. Refer to Figure 3-106: connect the Q-Switched Nd:YAG

handpiece's calibration device [A] to the system's service panel [B].
Figure 3-106 Connect the Q-Switched Calibration Device to the

Service Panel’s Connection Port
3. Press OK to confirm the popup message.

4. In the Treatment screen, press Tools (see Figure 3-107).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-85

Figure 3-107 Tools Button on Q-Switched Treatment Screen
5. In the Tools screen, press the Calibration button (see Figure 3-108).
Figure 3-108 Tools Screen - Calibration Button
6. While the system connects to the calibration device, the message

seen in Figure 3-109 will appear. Once connection is established,
the instructions seen in Figure 3-110 will appear.
3-86
Installation
Figure 3-109 System Checking Connection to Calibration Device
Figure 3-110 Connection to Calibration Device Established, Ready

to Start Calibration
7. Remove the lens assembly from the handpiece (if inserted), and
mount the handpiece on to the calibration device.
Note
If you mount the handpiece on to the calibration device prior to the
message appearing in Figure 3-110 you will be requested to remove
it and mount it again (see Figure 3-111).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-87

Figure 3-111 Handpiece Removal Message
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the calibration

process (see Figure 3-112). Press the safety button and hold the
trigger until the process is completed.
Figure 3-112 Calibration in Progress
Note
Press and hold the handpiece's trigger until all calibration pulses are
complete. Releasing the trigger too early can result in erroneous
calibration results.
Any intermediate calibration procedures (before reaching 50,000

pulses) is not prejudicial to the handpiece and may actually be
considered if the handpiece has not been used for a long period.
9. When calibration is complete, the message Calibration Succeeded

appears (see Figure 3-113). Release the trigger, press the X button
to close the window and remove the handpiece from the calibration
device.
The Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece is now ready for operation.
3-88
Installation
Figure 3-113 Calibration Completed
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-89

3.9 Unpacking and Installation-ResurFX

Module
Note
Before installing the ResurFX module, verify that the system is
operating with software V3.x and above. If the system already has
V3.x or above, skip the instructions in Table 3-4 and proceed to the
next section (Unpacking the ResurFX Module on page 3-91).
If not, read the next note and proceed to upgrade the system to V3.0:
Note
If the M22 system has SW V 3.0 and the ResurFX to be
installed is series 001, upgrade to SW V4.0 using the upgrade
kit KT-10026610 (shipped with the ResurFX).
Table 3-4. Mandatory Steps for Upgrading to V3.0

For Systems with Kit Includes: Order
Series Number Part Number
001,002 1. Replace M22 interface module FCR000158

(SW V1.0) 2. Replace water level with flow switch

2. Install 2 pins for 52-pin connector on
M22 base
003, 004 1. Replace pressure sensor with flow KT-1091721

(SW V1.5, V2.0) switch

2. Install 2 pins for 52-pin connector on
M22 base
005 1. Install 24V AC AUX filter FCR000300

(SW 2.0) 2. Install 2 pins for 52-pin connector on
M22 base
006, 007(SW 3.0) 1. ResurFX-Ready with Software V3.0
3-90
Installation
Note
Before unpacking the ResurFX module, ensure that the site meets
the requirements described in Facility Requirements on page 3-2.

3.9.2 Unpacking the ResurFX Module

The ResurFX module is shipped in a shockproof container. Contents
may vary according to the purchase agreement with Lumenis, but the
parts and accessories generally shipped in the box are:
• ResurFX Module and handpiece

• ResurFX accessories Kit:
• ResurFX footswitch
• ResurFX tip (18mm)
• Physician protective glasses (x2)
• Patient protective glasses (x1)
• M22 User Manual
• M22 QRG (Quick Reference Guide)
To unpack the ResurFX module, do the following:
Note
1. Verify that the shipping box is intact and make sure that the box has
not been subjected to damage. If it has, notify Lumenis offices and
2. Open the ResurFX module box.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-91

Figure 3-114 ResurFX Module Box
3. Remove the accessories box and layer of foam.
Remove
Figure 3-115 Remove Accessories Box and Foam
4. Lift the ResurFX handpiece and its foam tray out of the box. Set it
to the side.
Note
Do not disconnect the handpiece umbilical from the ResurFX
module. The handpiece is shipped already tested and attached to
the ResurFX module.
3-92
Installation
Figure 3-116 Unpack ResurFX Handpiece
5. Insert your hands into the foam indentations and firmly grasp the
ResurFX unit on both sides. Gently and carefully lift it with the
handpiece out of the box.
Figure 3-117 Unpacking ResurFX Module
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-93

Note
The ResurFX handpiece is permanently connected to the ResurFX

module and was tested according to Lumenis specifications. Do not
disconnect it from the ResurFX module.
3-94
Installation
3.9.3 Lowering the Cart for ResurFX

When upgrading the system with the ResurFX module, the cart needs
to be modified to a lower position in order to maintain comfortable use.
Only a Service CE is authorized to make this modification prior to

installing the ResurFX module. Follow the steps below.
Figure 3-118 Cart - Before and After Modification

(Approximate measurements)
Place the ResurFX module in a safe place while performing the cart
modification. If the cart has already been modified, skip this section
and proceed to Installing the ResurFX Module onto the System on
page 3-100.
For this procedure a standard tool kit and 2 Allen keys (2” and 4”) are
required.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-95

Do the following:
1. Lift the M22 system off of its cart and place it to the side.
2. Using an Allen key, remove the 4 screws holding the cart’s top
plate, and then lift the top plate off of the cart (see Figure 3-119).
Figure 3-119 Top Plate Removal
3. Remove the storage drawer to gain access to the inside of the cart
base blocks.
Figure 3-120 Removing Storage Drawer
3-96
Installation
4. From inside the cart chassis, Remove the 4 Allen screws and
washers (2 on each side) from the upper level of the chassis (see
Figure 3-121). If needed, use pliers to turn the Allen key.
Figure 3-121 Releasing Upper Level of Chassis
5. Grasp the cart handles, and lift the upper section of the cart straight
up and off the cart base.
6. From inside the base of the cart, remove the 4 Allen screws (2 on
each side) from the lower level of the cart chassis.
Figure 3-122 Releasing lower Level of Chassis
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-97

7. Remove the lower base block from the cart.
Figure 3-123 Removing Base Block from Cart
8. Mount the top part of the cart back onto the base, using the
alignment pins as a guide.
Figure 3-124 Mounting Top of Cart Back onTo Chassis
9. Re-tighten the screws of the base block to the cart chassis from the
inside (2 on each side). Then slide the drawer back in.
3-98
Installation
Figure 3-125 Tightening Chassis Screws
10. Re-install the top plate onto the top of the cart.
11. Mount the M22 system back onto the cart.
Figure 3-126 Mounting M22 System Back onto Cart
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-99

3.9.4 Installing the ResurFX Module onto the System

1. Remove the PC unit from the system:
a. From the back of the system, release the metal latches.
Figure 3-127 Metal Latches
b. Pull out the locking latch all the way to release the PC unit.
Figure 3-128 Locking Latch
c. Carefully lift the PC Unit up and out of the system (see Figure
3-129).
3-100
Installation
Figure 3-129 Removing PC Unit
2. Place the ResurFX handpiece in its cradle to enable easier

mounting of the ResurFX module.
3. Carefully mount the ResurFX module in the location where the PC
unit was just removed, taking care to align the module with the
large mounting pins:
a. Lift up the ResurFX module.
b. Align the ResurFX module directly on top of the M22 base.
c. Align the front of the ResurFX module with the large front
guide pins.
d. Align the rear of the ResurFX module with the large rear guide
pins.
e. Carefully lower the ResurFX module onto the four pins of the
52-pin connector base, letting it drop and catch onto the base.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-101

Figure 3-130 Mounting ResurFX Module
4. Re-install the PC unit on top of the ResurFX module, taking care to

align the module with the large mounting pins.
Note
It is very important that the pins on the 52-pin connector are lined up
parallel to their female base on the M22 system. If the pins are
inserted at an angle, they may break or become bent. To prevent
this, make sure the ResurFX module is installed perfectly straight
onto the M22 system.
Note
If one of the pins on the 52-pin connector becomes bent, it is
possible to use pliers to straighten it.
3-102
Installation
Figure 3-131 Installation Positioning of ResurFX Module
Note
The ResurFX module is approximately 15 Kg; special care is needed
when mounting it onto the system.
5. Close the locking pins on both the PC unit and the ResurFX module
(see Figure 3-132).
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-103

Figure 3-132 Closing Locking Pins
6. Close the metal locking latches at the back of the system to secure
the module (upper and lower latches). See Figure 3-133).
Figure 3-133 Metal Latches
3-104
Installation
7. Insert the ResurFX tip into the handpiece and place the handpiece
in its cradle.
Note
It is important to keep the ResurFX user tip clean at all times. For
testing and calibration, use only the ResurFX hollow tool tip in order
to prevent damage to the Sapphire tip.
Figure 3-134 ResurFX Module Installed on M22 System
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-105

3.9.5 Filling the Water Tank on the ResurFX Module

1. Insert the Refill tool into the refill/drain port at the back of the
system.
Note
Make sure that the air hole is located on the left side of the port.
Push down the metal tab on the system side fitting before inserting
the tool.
push down to release
air hole
on left side
Figure 3-135 Inserting Refill Tool into Refill/Drain Port
2. Raise the refill tool so that the funnel is at a higher level than the
port connection.
3. Pour the distilled water into the refill tool’s funnel until the water
reaches the Max line. (The Min/Max line of the water tank can be
observed through the grill of the back cover).
3-106
Installation
Figure 3-136 Filling Water for ResurFX Water Tank
Note
Do not fill the beyond the MAX level. If the required water level is
exceeded, drain the water. (See Figure 3-136).
Figure 3-137 MIN/MAX Water Level
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-107

4. Disconnect the refill tool from the port.
Note
Do not fill the water beyond the MAX level. If this happens, drain
some of the water.
3.9.6 Draining the Water from the ResurFX Module

1. Connect the water drain/refill tool. Make sure it is connected with
the open air hole on the left side.
2. Pour the distilled water into the refill tool’s funnel until the tool is
completely filled, including the tube (see Figure 3-138).
Figure 3-138 Refilling Funnel for Drain
3. Lower the tube so that the open end of the tube is lower than the
drain port, and using a bucket to catch the liquid, drain the water
from the module (see Figure 3-139).
3-108
Installation
Figure 3-139 Water Draining
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-109

3.9.7 Enabling the System for ResurFX

1. Turn on the M22 system; after the system has initialized and the
Main screen is displayed, press the Utility Menu button to access
the Utility Menu screen (see Figure 3-140). The ResurFX mode is
shaded gray prior to upgrade completion.
2. Press the Update Machine button (see Figure 3-141); the Updates
screen will appear (see Figure 3-142).
3-110
Installation
3. Press the Modules Update button; the Modules Update screen will
appear (see Figure 3-143).
Figure 3-142 Updates Screen
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-111

Figure 3-143 Modules Update Screen
4. Press Start Update; the prompt “Please insert the USB update key”
Figure 3-144 Prompt to Insert USB Update Key
3-112
Installation
5. Insert the USB flash device into the USB connection port on the
system's rear panel and press OK (Figure 3-145).
6. the update executes and the progress bar appears with the message
“Updating...” (this can take up to two minutes).
7. Press the OK button to proceed; a progress bar will display the
software installation process (this can take up to two minutes; see
Figure 3-146). A completion message appears when it is done (see
Figure 3-147); press OK.
Figure 3-146 Update Progress Bar
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-113

Figure 3-147 Upgrade Successful Message
Note
The HASP is for one-time use only; If you attempt to use the same
HASP again for another upgrade, Error #311 will appear (see Figure
3-148).
Figure 3-148 Error 311
Enable ResurFX Verification

After performing the ResurFX, upgrade, verify that the ResurFX
Enable procedure has been completed successfully by observing that
3-114
Installation
the ResurFX button is enabled (white) in the Select Mode Screen (see
Figure 3-149).
ResurFX mode
enabled
Figure 3-149 ResurFX Mode Enabled
Connecting the Footswitch

If the M22 system is equipped with the optional ResurFX module, its
footswitch must be connected; place the footswitch on the floor and
plug its power cable into the footswitch connection port. Screw the
cable's threaded cap onto the connection terminal securely. A polarizer
on the socket prevents incorrect connection of the cable.
Always keep the footswitch next to the system.
Caution
This chapter contains information regarding the ResurFX
module.
Only Lumenis-trained installers are qualified to connect the

ResurFX module and its accessories to the M22 system.
After performing the ResurFX enable procedure, perform Installation

and Initial Testing:M22 with ResurFX Module on page 3-128.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-115

3-116
Installation
3.9.8 Post-Installation Tests: ResurFX Module
ResurFX Energy Test and Scan Shape Density Test

The energy test checks the energy of the diode laser. The scan shape
test checks the performance of the handpiece galvo.

To test the ResurFX handpiece, do the following:
1. Set up the FL-250 Ophir power meter as follows (see:Figure 3-

150):
a. Turn the power meter ON (button on left side).
b. Press the red circular Menu button twice.
c. Press the LASER scale (left triangular button) until YAG or
d. Press the red circular Menu button twice and choose the
set to Joules (J).
e. Press the RANGE (triangular right) button and set it to the
lowest setting for 3.00 (between 200-300 Joules, depending on
your personal detector).
f. Exit the RANGE scale by pressing Exit (triangular right
button).
g. Press the MORE (central triangular) button.
h. Choose the THRESHOLD position.
i. Press the GO button to confirm.
j. Choose MED value threshold; this will ensure that the OPHIR
k. Press the EXIT button to confirm; the power meter is now
ready for measuring the ResurFX handpiece.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-117

Figure 3-150 ResurFX Power Meter Setup
2. Set the pulse parameters according to Table 3-5 on page 3-120;

Refer to the numbered items in Figure 3-151:
a. Shape [1]
b. Size [2]
c. Density [4]
d. Energy [7]
e. Select Handpiece “HP” or footswitch (FS) trigger [3].
f. Press the TEC button to OFF [6].

g. Press Ready [8].
3-118
Installation
Figure 3-151 ResurFX User Treatment Screen
Note
The test uses different presets for each shape.
3. Attach the ResurFX hollow tool tip to the handpiece to simulate tip
connection. The tool tip has no sapphire on it.
aperture, perform three shots for each preset and calculate the
average value of the fluence. Record the average value in the table.
Note
When performing the energy test, disable the cooling function.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-119

5. Verify that the readings are within the acceptable ranges (see Table
3-5).
Table 3-5. ResurFX Energy Test Table
Shape Density Check

1. Using the ResurFX hollow tool tip, perform a shot of the Square
scan shape onto thermal paper, using the parameters in the Shape
Density Check Table in Figure 3-152.
2. Verify that the readings are within the acceptable ranges.
Figure 3-152 Shape Density Check
3-120
Installation
3.10 Moving, Transporting, and Storage
Caution
The standard M22 system weighs approximately 40 kg. (88 lbs.)
and considerably more when the optional ResurFX module is
installed. To avoid personal injury the system should be lifted by
two people. Protect your back!
3.10.1 Moving the Assembled System

Some users of the M22 system have more than one treatment location.
The system can easily be moved between them if it is mounted on a
rolling cart. The only disassembly required is disconnection of the
power cable.
3.10.2 Disassembling and Transporting the System

Disassemble the M22 to transport the system out of the office:
1. Unplug the system from the wall outlet.

2. Disconnect the power cable from the service panel.
3. Disconnect the Universal IPL and Multi-Spot or Q-Switched
Nd:YAG handpiece(s) and store in the dedicated carrying case(s).
4. The optional ResurFX handpiece is not detachable! Place the
handpiece in its cradle. Ensure that it is positioned safely such that
it will not fall when the system is moved or lifted. remove the
cradle that is not being used.
Caution
Drain all the coolant from the M22 system and ResurFX cooling
system and ensure that the reservoir is empty prior to shipping
the system. Frozen coolant can damage the system; for
complete draining instructions, refer to Draining the Water on
page 10-56.
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-121

3.11 Installation Report - M22

The checklist below lists the activities performed during installation.
Make and fill out a photocopy of this checklist to ensure that all
installation activities have been performed successfully. Keep the
signed copy for your records. Keep the original blank for further use.
Site Name:
Address:
Country:
Technician:
Comments:
System Series
Number:
System Serial Number
Handpiece Types and S/N:
• Universal IPL S/N:
• Multi-Spot
Nd:YAG S/N:
• ResurFX S/N
• Q-Switched S/N
Nd:YAG
M22 Software Version:
3-122
Installation
Installation Check List
Site Preparation (Chapter 3)
(see Space and Positioning Requirements, Page 3-3)

OK Not OK Description Remarks
  Lighting Conditions
  Fire, safety, and first aid equipment
(see Electrical Requirements, Page 3-2)

System power line not shared with
 
other heavy variable loads such as
elevators, air conditioning systems,
large motors, etc.
Separate power line with separate
 
circuit breakers
(see Environmental Requirements, Page 3-4)

Atmosphere non-corrosive
 
Room temperature between 10°C -
 
30°C (50°F - 86°F)
  Relative humidity up 10 to 90%
  System far from heating ducts or other

outlets
Lighting Conditions OK
 
  Fire, Safety conditions met and first
aid equipment available
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-123

Unpacking (Chapter 3)
(see Unpacking the System, Page 3-7)

Verify that shipping crate is intact.
 
Check the shock indicator on the box to
 
make sure that the crate has not been
subjected to shock.
Open the crate and remove the system.
 
  Remove all accessories from crate and
check for missing items.
  Move the system and accessories to the
treatment room.
  Visually inspect the system exterior for
damage.
(see Connect/Disconnect the Universal IPL Handpiece, Page 3-14)

Install the Universal IPL handpiece in the
 
handpiece connector.
  Install the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece in

the handpiece connector (if this option
exists).
Place all the light guides and filters in the
 
Light guide and Filter compartment.
Connect the remote interlock plug. (If
 
connected to the door switch, mention it in
the Remarks).
Check the system mains plug for
 
compatibility with the local mains
receptacle. If not, replace it with one that
matches the power socket.
(see IPL Energy Test, Page 3-53)

Use only distilled/deionized water
 
Fill the water tank so that the water level
 
appears in between the MIN and MAX
level marks on the tank.
3-124
Installation
(see Testing the System’s Functional Operation, Page 3-23)

Turn on the system and allow the system
 
to execute self-test.
Turn off the system.
 
Add additional deionized/distilled water to
 
the water tank.
3.11.1 M22 System Installation and Initial Testing

For systems with Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece, see also
3.11.2 Installation and Initial Testing: M22 with Multi-Spot
Nd:YAG on page 3-126.
For systems with Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece, see also

3.11.3 Installation and Initial Testing: M22 with Q-Switched
Nd:YAG on page 3-127
For systems with ResurFX module, see also 3.11.4 Installation and
Initial Testing:M22 with ResurFX Module on page 3-128.

Install the Universal IPL handpiece in the
 
Place all the light guides and filters in the
 
Light guide and Filter compartment.
Connect the remote interlock plug. (If
 
connected to the door switch, mention it in
the Remarks).
Check the system mains plug for
 
compatibility with the local mains
receptacle. If not, replace it with one that
matches the power socket.
Water Refilling
Use only distilled/deionized water
 
Fill the water tank so that the water level
 
appears in between the MIN and MAX level
marks on the tank.
Initial Testing
  Turn on the system and allow the system to
execute self-test.
Turn off the system.
 
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-125

Add additional distilled water to the water

 
reservoir if needed.
Verify light guide is not broken and clean
 
Perform filter Identification for each filter
 
Turn on the system.
 
Perform diagnostic self-test - verify no
 
errors
Verify handpiece trigger is OK
 
Verify IPL Energy Test within specification
 
3.11.2 Installation and Initial Testing: M22 with Multi-

Spot Nd:YAG

Connect the Nd:YAG handpiece in the
 
  Perform Enabling
the System for Multi-
Spot Nd:YAG on page 3-60.
Connect the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG calibration
 
device
Initial Testing
  Verify tips are not broken and clean.
Perform Tip Identification for each tip.

 
Perform diagnostic self-test - verify no
 
errors.
  Verify Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece trigger

is OK
Perform Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece
 
Calibration using the calibration device.
Verify Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Energy Test
 
(using hollow tool tip) within specification.
3-126
Installation
3.11.3 Installation and Initial Testing: M22 with

Q-Switched Nd:YAG

Install SW Version 4.0 for Q-Switched
 
Nd:YAG (if needed on systems with V3.0
and ResurFX module 001)
Perform Enablingthe System for Q-
Switched on page 3-77.
Connect the Q-Switched Nd:YAG
 
handpiece in the handpiece connector
  Perform Q-Switched Calibration with

calibration device tool.
Initial Testing
Verify Q-Switched calibration is successful.
 
Verify that the lens assembly and meatal
 
treatment tips are OK.
Verify Laser Danger door sign is installed.
 
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-127

3.11.4 Installation and Initial Testing:M22 with

ResurFX Module

Install SW V4.0 for M22 systems if ResurFX
 
has series 001(see Upgrading the System
from Version 3.0 to GUI Software
V4.0 on page 3-72)
  Modify the cart for ResurFX height (see
Lowering the Cart for ResurFX on
page 3-95)
  Connect the footswitch (see Footswitch,
Page 6-21)
Install the ResurFX module together with its
 
handpiece in between the PC unit and the
M22 system base.
Add distilled water to the ResurFX water
 
tank
  Perform Enabling
the System for
ResurFX on page 3-110
Turn on the pump and add additional
 
distilled water to the water tank if needed
Verify Tip Identification
 
Verify ResurFX handpiece trigger is OK
 
Verify Footswitch trigger is OK
 
Perform diagnostic self-test from ResurFX
 
service screen - verify no errors
Verify Energy Test and Scan Shape Test
 
Verify Shape Density Check
 
I hereby certify that the installation activities described in this checklist
have been performed successfully and to the satisfaction of the
customer.
This installation was performed in accordance with the instructions in

the service manual and those items listed above.
Service Engineer Date

(Printed Name):
Signature:
3-128
Installation
PB-1042431 Rev D 3-129

3-130
General Description
C H A P T E R
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
4.1 Introduction to the System

The M22 is a platform for aesthetic treatment technologies. Offering
industry gold standards, the M22 offers technologies essential to
today's aesthetic practices:
• Intense Pulsed Light (IPL) for skin treatments, the treatment of

vascular and pigmented lesions and hair removal.
• Multi-Spot Nd:YAG laser for treatment of leg veins.
• Q-Switched Nd:YAG laser for removal of dark tattoos and
treatment of pigmented lesions.
• ResurFX module for fractional non-ablative skin resurfacing.
(Refer to Chapter 6 of this service manual for more
information).
The laser and IPL treatment modules incorporate a cooling mechanism

that provides continuous contact cooling to the treatment area.
The system has been designed to provide flexibility in choosing the

wavelength, pulse width and pulse sequence, to enable treatment of
lesions without damaging the surrounding tissue.
The system consists of the following major components: the system

console, the operator control panel, the monitor with touch-screen
technology and treatment modules. The system is continuously
monitored and controlled by its internal computer. Selected parameters
and user information are displayed on the monitor screen.
PB-1042431 Rev D 4-1

4.2 Indications for Use
4.2.1 IPL Skin Treatments

The IPL Skin Treatment application of the system (and the delivery
accessories that are used with it to deliver light energy) is indicated for
use in aesthetic and cosmetic applications requiring selective
photothermolysis of soft tissue in the medical specialties of general and
plastic surgery, and dermatology.
The 515–1200 nm intense pulsed light wavelengths are indicated for

the treatment of:
• Benign pigmented epidermal and cutaneous lesions including

dyschromia, hyperpigmentation, melasma, scars and striae.
• Benign cutaneous vascular lesions, including port wine stains,
hemangiomas, facial and truncal telangiectasias, rosacea, erythema
of rosacea, angiomas and spider angiomas, poikiloderma of Civatte.
The Chiller is indicated for use in cooling the epidermis at the
treatment site prior to, during and after light treatment in general
surgery, plastic surgery and dermatology to:
• Reduce pain during and/or associated with light treatment (via

partial anesthesia from cooling).
• Reduce discomfort during and/or associated with light treatment.
• Minimize thermal injury, including thermal necrosis, to non-target
skin and skin structures during and/or associated with light
treatment, thus reducing possible complications such as scabbing,
scarring, hyper- and/or hypopigmentation.
• Allow the use of higher light fluences for light treatments (such as
for the treatment of vascular or pigmented lesions).
• Reduce potential side effects of light treatments (such as for the
treatment of vascular or pigmented lesions).
4.2.2 Vascular Lesions

The Vascular Lesions application of the system (and the delivery
photothermolysis and hemostasis of soft tissue in the medical
specialties of general and plastic surgery, and dermatology.
4-2
General Description
The 515–1200 nm intense pulsed light wavelengths are indicated for

the treatment of benign cutaneous vascular lesions, including port wine
stains, hemangiomas, facial, truncal and leg telangiectasias, rosacea,
erythema of rosacea, angiomas and spider angiomas, poikiloderma of
Civatte, leg veins and venous malformations.
The 1064 nm wavelength produced by the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG laser is

indicated for the coagulation and hemostasis of vascular lesions and
soft tissue, including treatment and clearance of superficial and deep
telangiectasias (venulectasias) and reticular veins (0.1–4.0 mm
diameter) of the leg.

treatment site prior to, during and after light or laser treatment in
general surgery, plastic surgery and dermatology to:
• Reduce pain and discomfort during and/or associated with light or

laser treatment (via partial anesthesia from cooling).
skin and skin structures during and/or associated with light or laser
• Allow the use of higher light or laser fluences for light or laser
treatments (such as for the treatment of vascular lesions).
• Reduce potential side effects of light or laser treatments (such as for
the treatment of vascular lesions).
4.2.3 Pigmented Lesions

The Pigmented Lesions application of the system (and the delivery
photothermolysis in the medical specialties of general and plastic
surgery, and dermatology.
The 515–1200 nm intense pulsed light wavelengths are indicated for the
treatment of benign pigmented epidermal and cutaneous lesions
including dyschromia, hyperpigmentation, melasma, warts, scars and
striae.

treatment site prior to, during and after light treatment in general
surgery, plastic surgery and dermatology to:
PB-1042431 Rev D 4-3

• Reduce pain during and/or associated with light treatment (via

partial anesthesia from cooling).
• Reduce discomfort during and/or associated with light treatment.
skin and skin structures during and/or associated with light
for the treatment of pigmented lesions).
• Reduce potential side effects of light treatments (such as for the
treatment of pigmented lesions).
4.2.4 Hair Removal
IPL
The IPL Hair Removal Application of the (and the delivery accessories
that are used with it to deliver light energy) is indicated for the removal
of unwanted hair from all Skin Types (I–VI), and to effect stable long-
term, or permanent hair reduction in Skin Types I–V.
Permanent hair reduction is defined as long-term stable reduction in the

number of hairs regrowing after a treatment regimen.

treatment site prior to, during and after light or laser treatment in
general surgery, plastic surgery and dermatology to:
• Reduce pain and discomfort during and/or associated with light or

laser treatment (via partial anesthesia from cooling).
skin and skin structures during and/or associated with laser
for hair removal).
• Reduce potential side effects of light treatments (such as for hair
removal).
4-4
General Description
4.3 System Components and Controls

This section covers the system’s main components, controls and
handpieces and related accessories.
The M22 is an advanced computer-controlled light emission system,

composed of the following units:
• Control Panel –situated on top and front of the system's console,

incorporating:
• System controls
• A color monitor with touch-screen technology
• Electronic and Software Systems –control, display, and monitor

the system; the built-in computer:
• Monitors and regulates light output power
• Automatically tests the system, monitors its performance, and

indicates specific malfunctions
• Automatically disables light output during unsafe operating

conditions
• Acts on commands from the control panel and updates the

display
• Switching Module –the system ignites the lamp in the handpiece and
maintains it in a simmering mode.When the system is switched to
Ready mode, a command is delivered from the computer that partially
discharges the capacitor bank into the lamp.
• Universal Power Supply –provides modulated power for light pulse
generation and additional optional modules, as well as low voltage
DC to other subsystems.
• Cooling System –The cooling system incorporates a water pump,
water reservoir, a fan-cooled radiator, deionizer, flow switch and
thermal sensor. The system circulates distilled water from the fan-
cooled radiator to the handpiece.
• Handpieces –the M22 system is designed to operate with a
Universal IPL (Intense Pulsed Light) handpiece, a Multi-Spot
Nd:YAG laser handpiece, a Q-Switched Nd:YAG laser handpiece,
and a ResurFX handpiece. These will be described in detail later in
the chapter.
PB-1042431 Rev D 4-5

Figure 4-1 shows the external design of the M22 system.This product,
as all Lumenis products, is designed and manufactured according to the
highest quality standards, ISO 13485, by which Lumenis is certified.
Figure 4-1 M22 System Controls (with optional ResurFX Module)
Figure 4-2 presents a block diagram of the M22 system:
4-6
General Description
Figure 4-2 Block Diagram
4.3.1 System Console

The system console is the operational heart of the system. It contains
the high voltage modules, the control and monitoring modules, the
power supplies and the cooling system.
4.3.2 Control Panel and Monitor

The user interacts with the system through the control panel located on
the system console (see Figure 4-1), or through the touch-screen
monitor.
PB-1042431 Rev D 4-7

Touch-Screen Monitor
The touch-screen monitor displays information on the status and
settings of the M22 system. The various service screens are described
in System Software Modules on page 5-11.
Communication with the system is performed by means of the touch-

screen monitor. All commands are entered into the system by pressing
the appropriate “buttons” or keys on the touch-screen. All aspects of
the operating system will be discussed in the Software chapter of this
manual.
Start Button
This is a push-button switch that controls the system's on/off functions.
A green LED indicator built into the button indicates that the system is
turned on.
Light Emission Indicator

The system features two light emission indicators; a yellow indicator
lamp located on the control panel and a speaker. The yellow LED has
three modes of operation:
• OFF - when the system is turned on, and in Standby mode

• Flashing - In Ready mode, alerting the user that light emission will
start upon footswitch activation
• Continuous - during light emission (trigger pressed)
The speaker sounds during light emission.
Laser Shut-off Knob
This is a two-position, normally released, push-type button for

emergency situations.The button actuator is a large, red mushroom-
shaped knob that is operated by pressing in.To release the switch to its
normal position, rotate the knob (direction is marked on the knob's face).
The emergency shutoff knob disables light output from the handpiece
the moment it is pressed.To release the laser shutoff knob, turn it
clockwise in the direction of the arrows. Otherwise, the system remains
in an error state.
4-8
General Description
Caution
The laser shutoff knob should be activated only in case of an
emergency.
Storage Tray for Filters and Light Guides

A storage tray (see Figure 4-3) are provided for the IPL ExpertFil-
ters™. and Light Guides. The storage area is located under the console
lid for seven filter storage slots, two storage niches for the IPL Light
Guides, and two storage niches for the Nd:YAG light guides. The
storage slots protect the filters and users should take care to always
replace the filters, when not in use, in their slots.
• Lift the lid directly upwards from the bottom; the lid automatically
pops up.
• Store the IPL filters and light guides in the tray according to the
handpiece types installed. Make sure the IPL filter labels are facing
up.
Figure 4-3 M22 Filter and Light Guide Storage
4.3.3 Service Panel

The service panel is located on the bottom of the system's the rear panel
and incorporates the following (see Figure 4-4):
PB-1042431 Rev D 4-9

1. External ground connection

2. Remote interlock connection port
3. Nd:YAG calibration device connection port
4. Main on/off switch
5. Power cable connection port
6. Plug security bracket
Figure 4-4 Service Panel
Caution
Do not connect any cables to the M22 system’s LAN connection
port.
4-10
General Description
External Equipotential Ground Connection

For equipotential (equalization) earth connection, use the equipotential
earth terminal on the system's service panel.
WARNING
Use the system only when it is properly grounded via the
protective earth terminal.
Remote Interlock Connection Port

The remote interlock is a safety feature that disables the laser if the
treatment room door is opened or the interlock plug is removed while
the system is in Ready mode.
Use of the remote interlock is optional; however, you must insert the
interlock plug into the INTERLOCK connection port (see Figure 4-5)
whether or not you are using an external door interlock. The system
remains inoperative until the plug is inserted into the port.
When using a remote interlock, the system is automatically disabled

and returns to Standby mode if the treatment door is opened or the
interlock plug is removed, and an error message appears on the control
panel monitor.
Connect the 3-pin interlock plug by inserting it into the connection

port; turn the plug's locking collar clockwise until finger-tight. The
body of the plug is polarized to prevent incorrect insertion.
PB-1042431 Rev D 4-11

Figure 4-5 Remote Interlock Connection
Footswitch Connection
If the M22 system is equipped with the optional ResurFX module, its
footswitch must be connected; place the footswitch on the floor and
4-12
General Description
Figure 4-6 Footswitch Connection Port
Nd:YAG Calibration Device Connection Port

This is the connection location of the calibration device for calibrating
the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece (see Figure 4-4) Refer to Chapter
5.9.3 for complete information on the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece.
Main On/Off Switch

This is a master switch (see Figure 4-4) that should be turned off when
the system is left overnight or for extended periods of time.
Power Cable Connection

Connect the power cable to this port. Use only:
• The power cable and plug specified for your system

• A power cable and plug that are in good condition
• A hospital grade plug and a correctly matched power receptacle
PB-1042431 Rev D 4-13

4.4 Handpieces
The M22 operates with four types of handpieces:
• Universal Intense Pulsed Light (IPL) handpiece

• Multi-Spot Nd:YAG laser handpiece
• Q-Switched Nd:YAG laser handpiece
• ResurFX laser handpiece
The M22 console incorporates one handpiece connection port that

accommodates either the Universal IPL, the Multi-Spot or Q-Switched
Nd:YAG handpiece, and a second connection port for the ResurFX
laser handpiece.
Clinical treatment cannot be delivered unless a handpiece is connected

to one of the connection ports.
The handpieces are connected to the system console with an umbilical

cable containing wiring, cooling water tubes, and for the ResurFX also
the fiber that delivers the laser energy.
In addition, the handpieces incorporate a thermo-electric cooler (TEC)

that cools the lightguide and provides continuous contact cooling to the
skin, thus reducing skin temperature and patient discomfort. The cooler
can be turned on/off by pressing the cooler button on the control panel
display. When not in operation, the handpieces should be placed in
their cradles on the sides of the M22 console.
4.4.1 Spectrum and Filter

Universal IPL handpiece - the wavelength range and cut-off filters
determine the depth of light penetration and the chromophores in which
the light is absorbed.
4.4.2 Spot Size

Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece - the selected spot size of the laser
pulse determines the size of the treatment area that absorbs the laser
energy.
4-14
General Description
4.4.3 Fluence
The amount of energy in J/cm2 to which the treated area is exposed.
4.4.4 Number of Pulses

Energy is delivered in a single pulse or divided into two or three sub-
pulses. Applying energy in pulse sequences allows better control of the
delivered energy, and enables the skin to cool down between sub-
pulses, thus reducing the likelihood of adverse effects.
4.4.5 Pulse Duration

The length of time the skin is exposed to the pulse.
4.4.6 Pulse Delay

Pulse delay determines the intervals between the sub-pulses in the
sequence to allow cooling of the skin between sub-pulses and help
prevent adverse effects.
4.4.7 Universal IPL Handpiece

The Universal IPL handpiece (see Figure 4-7) houses the mechanisms
that generate and deliver the light pulse (wavelength range 515–1200
nm). It incorporates:
• IPL assembly
• IPL cooling components
• ExpertFilters™
• SapphireCool™ Light Guides and assemblies
• Three pulse buttons (see Figure 4-7)
• Light guide thermo-electric cooler
PB-1042431 Rev D 4-15

Figure 4-7 Universal IPL Handpiece
The light pulse is activated by pressing one of the three Pulse buttons
(for right and left handed users and different grips) located on the
handpiece. The light passes through an aperture with a filter, into the
light guide that is inserted in the bottom of the handpiece. The light
guide delivers the light energy to the treatment site.
IPL Expert Filters

The system provides a range of ExpertFilters™ (long-pass filters) with
different cutoff wavelengths (515, 560, 590, 615, 640, 695 and 755
nm), to customize treatment. The system recognizes automatically
which filter is currently installed in the handpiece.
SapphireCool™ Light Guide

The M22 system light guides are made of Sapphire and provides
treatment footprints of 1.2 and 5.25 cm2 respectively for 8 x 15 and 15
x 35 mm light guides.The light guides are cooled by a thermo-electric
cooler (TEC).
4-16
General Description
4.4.8 Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece

The Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece is designed to operate with the
Lumenis M22 aesthetic treatment system.
The handpiece generates laser beam pulses when the trigger is pressed.
The Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece incorporates a solid state Nd:YAG

laser, operating at a wavelength of 1064 nm.
Figure 4-8 Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece
The handpiece houses the mechanisms that generate and deliver the
laser pulse. It incorporates the following:
• Nd:YAG laser assembly

• Laser cooling components
• Safety switch and indicator
• Laser trigger
• Light guide assembly that determines the spot size and delivers the
laser beam to the treated area
PB-1042431 Rev D 4-17

Nd:YAG Spot Sizes

The Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece provides two spot sizes (2 x 4 mm
rectangular, and 6 mm round). Each spot size requires a different light
guide assembly. The light guide assembly is replaced by the user.
The Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece recognizes automatically which

light guide assembly is currently installed.
Nd:YAG Handpiece Safety Switch and Indicator

The Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece is equipped with a safety switch
which must be pressed prior to laser emission. The safety switch must
first be pressed before pressing the laser trigger (not simultaneously).
It enables laser emission only within an allotted time interval (30

seconds). The safety switch has an orange indicator that lights up when
laser triggering is enabled. If the allotted time has passed, then press the
safety switch again.
4.4.9 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece

The optional Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece (see Figure 4-9)
incorporates a solid-state Nd:YAG laser & Cr:YAG, operating at a
wavelength of 1064 nm.
laser pulse. It includes the following:
• Q-Switched Nd:YAG laser assembly.

• Safety switch and indicator.
• Laser trigger.
• Lens assembly tip.
• Treatment tips in various sizes.
4-18
General Description
Figure 4-9 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece
Q-Switched Nd:YAG Spot Sizes

The optional Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece provides one lens
assembly tip & five treatment tips which differ by their spot size (2.0,
2.5, 3.5, 5.0 & 6.0 mm)
The Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece recognizes that a lens assembly

treatment tip is inserted. It does not recognize which treatment tip is
selected.
The system guides the user through a verification process that ensures
that the correct treatment tip is installed.
Note
Before operating the handpiece, ensure that the lens assembly and
the selected treatment tip are installed and properly locked in.
PB-1042431 Rev D 4-19

Q-Switched Nd:YAG Safety Switch & Indicator

The Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece is equipped with a safety switch
which must be pressed before laser emission. The safety switch must
first be pressed before pressing the laser trigger (not simultaneously).
It enables laser emission only within an allotted time interval (35

seconds). The safety switch has an orange indicator that lights up when
laser triggering is enabled. If the allotted time has passed, press the
safety switch again.
4.4.10 ResurFX Handpiece

The optional ResurFX handpiece (see Figure 4-10) incorporates a laser
operating at a wavelength of 1565 nm.
• Galvanometric scanner for delivery of fractional patterns

• Laser cooling components
• Light guide tip – 18 mm
• Laser trigger
4-20
General Description
Figure 4-10 ResurFX Handpiece
PB-1042431 Rev D 4-21

4.5 System Software

The system software serves the following major purposes:
• To enable the system to select optimal treatment parameters for
every patient, according to the specific parameters input by the user.
• To control the system's operation and to prevent the occurrence of
safety hazards.
• To check and perform calibration.
4-22
General Description
4.6 System Specifications

Universal IPL Multi-Spot Q-Switched ResurFX
Nd:YAG Nd:YAG
Energy Source Intense Pulsed
Laser Laser Laser
Light
Wavelength (nm) 515 - 1200 1064 1064 1565
Optical Filters 515, 560, 590,
N/A N/A N/A
(nm) 615, 640, 695, 755
Light guide/Tip 8x15 mm (1.20 cm2) 2 x 4 mm, 2,2.5, 3.5, 5 and
18 mm
sizes 15x35 mm (5.25 cm2) 6Ø 6 mm
Fluence Range 2x4 tip: 75 - 225 J/
(J/cm2) cm2 1.6 - 14 J/cm2
Up to 35 J/cm2 6 mm tip: 20-150 J/
N/A
cm22
Pulse Energy 10 - 70 mJ
N/A N/A N/A per micro-
beam
Pulse Sequence 1, 2, and 3 Pulses N/A N/A
Pulse Duration
4 - 20 ms 2 - 20 ms 6 - 8 ns N/A
(ms)
Pulse Delay (ms) 5- 150 ms 5 - 100 ms N/A N/A
Density Up to 500 micro-
N/A N/A N/A
beams per cm2
Pulse Repetition
Up to 1 0.5 - 5.0 from 0.5 up to 2
Rate [Hz]
Pattern Shapes Line, Square,
N/A N/A rectangle, circle,
donut, hexagon
Skin Cooling Continuous
Continuous Contact Cooling N/A Contact
Cooling
Electrical
100 – 240 VAC ±10%,15A max., 50/60 Hz, single phase, dedicated line
Requirements
Dimensions Standard System System with ResurFX Module
(W x D x H) 44cm x 51cm x 47cm 44cm x 51cm x 62cm
(17” x 20” x 19”) (17” x 20” x 24”)
Weight 40 kg./88 lbs. 55 kg. / 121 lbs.
Umbilical Cable
170 cm / 67 inches
Length
PB-1042431 Rev D 4-23

4.7 Environmental Requirements
4.7.1 Air Quality:

The system should operate in a non-corrosive atmosphere. Corrosive
materials such as acids can damage electrical wiring, electronic
components and the surfaces of optical components.
Air-borne dust particles should be kept to a minimum. Dust particles

absorb light and heat up. Hot particles located on the optical lenses can
damage them. Metallic dust is destructive to electrical equipment.
4.7.2 Temperature and Humidity:

Operating Environment: 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F), relative
humidity 10 to 90% non-condensing.
Storage: -20°C to 70°C (-4°F to 158°F), relative humidity 10 to 90%

non-condensing
When the system is used intensively it will emit heat. Therefore, it is

4.7.3 Atmospheric Pressure:

Operating and storage: 70 – 106 kPa.
4-24
Functional Description
C H A P T E R
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
5.1 Major System Components

The M22 system is comprised of the following major components:
• Touch-Screen Monitor
• GUI Industrial Computer
• Interface Module
• HVPS (Charger)
• Capacitor Bank
• Switching Module
• Head Connector
• Main On/Off Switch
• Emergency Switch
• Service Panel
• Handpieces
• IPL Head
• Nd:YAG Head
• ResurFX head
• Nd:YAG Calibration Module
• Cooling System:
• tank
• coolant pump
• radiator
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-1

• fan
• water level sensor
• flow switch sensor
• Water Temperature Sensor
• Deionizer
• ResurFX Module
• Main Harness (52-pin)
• Mechanical Latch
Low voltage Power Supply (LVPS)
• The LVPS supplies 24 Volts DC to the system's operating

components, and low voltages to the PC.
5.1.1 General System Description

The M22 system is designed to receive line voltage of 100 – 230VAC
(±10%) from the power cable connector. The voltage passes through
two main surge-protection, 4 Amp fuses (the system has no circuit
breaker), and through the On/Off keyswitch and the emergency shutoff
button. These two devices are connected in a serial circuit; in order for
the system to operate, the keyswitch must be engaged and the
emergency shutoff button must be disengaged. The voltage passes
through a line filter that acts as an EMI filter (to reduce electronic
noise). From the line filter the voltage goes to the medical-grade multi-
range power supply module.
After the user releases the emergency shutoff button and turns the
keyswitch to the On position, the power supply module receives the
power input and then delivers 24VDC activation signals to:
• The system controller

• The industrial PC module
• The display
Dimensions
• 49.0 mm x 68.0 mm / 1.93" x 2.67"
• Height approx. 6 mm / 0.24"
5-2
Electrical Specifications
• Supply Voltage: 3.3 VDC ± 5%
• Supply Current (typical, DOS prompt): 900 mA
5.1.2 M22 System Modules Wiring Connections

The system receives line voltage through two surge-protection fuses.
These are Slow-Blow type fuses, rated at 250VAC/4 Amps. The
voltage passes through the line filter and from there to the power
supply module (LVPS). The power output of the LVPS goes through a
fuse board in the service panel.
Figure 5-1 presents a general block diagram of the M22 system's

components:
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-3

Figure 5-1 M22 System General Block Diagram
5-4
5.2 Touch Screen Monitor

Communication with the M22 system is performed by means of a
touch-screen monitor.
The 8.4” SVGA color touch-screen monitor is tilted, displaying

information on the status and settings of the M22 system, and is the
main user interface.
All commands are entered into the system by “pressing” (touching) the
appropriate “buttons” or keys, on the touch-screen. Use the touch-
screen to select treatment modes, entering clinical indications, and
selecting treatment parameters. System commands and operations are
controlled by pressing the appropriate location on the screen.
The M22 system is delivered with the following default passwords:

Inputs
• Inverter board output voltages
• LVDS displayed data
Outputs
• Data to the touch controller board
• USB output to the GUI PC module
Block Diagram
Figure 5-2 illustrates the block diagram of the touch-screen monitor.
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-5

Figure 5-2 Display Module Block Diagram
5-6
5.3 Industrial PC
Figure 5-3 PC and Display System Connection Block Diagram
5.3.1 Connections
The industrial PC module incorporates the following connections:
1. Ethernet – connects to the GUI PC service panel, may be used for

network connections.
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-7

2. USB (1) – connects to the GUI PC service panel, will be used for
software upgrade installations stored on a portable (Disk-on-Key)
media.
3. USB (2) – connects to the display's touch-screen controller
4. USB (3) – HASP connector
5. USB (4) – for future modules
6. RS232 – connects to the interface module for communications
between the industrial PC module and the controller
7. Speaker – the system is equipped with an independent speaker
used for system indications
8. Display Inverter – the industrial PC module delivers 12VDC to the
display inverter
9. LVDS Display Signal – display signal from the industrial PC
module to the screen
10. VGA – internal
11. GPIO – (x2) to interface module for DSP writing.
5.3.2 Functional Specifications

• Processor: National Semiconductor SC1200
• Bus: 33MHz bus clock
• Chipset: National Semiconductor SC1200
• Cache: 16KB integrated cache
• Onboard Memory: SDRAM with 512MB
• Two Serial Ports (COM1 and COM2)
• Universal Serial Bus (USB)
• Onboard Ethernet: Intel 82551ER PCI single chip
• 10BASE-T/100BASE-T LAN
• Onboard video graphics array (VGA): Integrated in National
SC1200
• Real-time clock (requires an external on board battery)
System Memory
• 512MB on-board
• 1GB Compact Flash
5-8
External Connections
• 1 USB port for any supported USB application. This USB port
supports the USB hub to enable simultaneous connections; for
example: a keyboard, mouse, and disk-on-key.
• Ethernet port - optional
Inputs
• 5 VDC from the interface module
• 12 VDC from the interface module
Outputs
• Data to the touch controller board
• USB output to the GUI PC module.
Required Voltage
The Interface module delivers the required voltages to operate the PC
(5V) and the display unit (12V).
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-9

5.4 System Software
5.4.1 Screen Flow

The system supports user inputs from GUI controls by means of touch
screen. It supports both user and service operational modes and GUI
controls.
Figure 5-4 illustrates the screen flow:
Figure 5-4 Screen Flow
5-10
Figure 5-5 illustrates the basic flow of interface between the user and
the system.
Figure 5-5 User and System Interface Flow
5.4.2 System Software Modules

The M22 system's software suite is divided into two modules:
• PC (GUI) software
• Micro-controller software
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-11

PC (GUI) Software
This software module was designed with the Windows® CE
(Embedded) operating system to provide the Lumenis M22 graphic
user interface. The CE (Embedded) operating system precludes many
normal desktop computer features in order to reduce its size and
complexity, and still offer a user-friendly, easy to use environment.
Micro-Controller Software
This software module resides on the micro-controller and controls the
operation of the M22 system's modules by receiving user-input
commands from the PC and translating those into signals that operate
the M22 modules.
The CE receives the software on a CD which can be copied to a disk-

on-key when performing GUI software installation, DSP software
installation, or any other software installation procedure recommended
by the Service department.
5.4.3 Main User Screen

The Main screen (Figure 5-6) is the first working screen of the system.
It allows you to:
1. To replace the handpiece; touch the Replace Head button; a

pop-up message will state: It is now safe to replace the handpiece! At
this point you may now disconnect the handpiece and connect
another one.
2. Access the Utility screen; touch the Utility button to access the
Utility screen.
3. The bottom row icons exhibit all the handpieces available for use
with your particular M22 system.
4. Shut down the system: touch the Shutdown button for

system shut-down.
5-12
Figure 5-6 User Main Screen
Treatment Screens
The M22 system has three operating modalities, one for each
handpiece, accessed through three treatment screens (see Figure 5-7,
Figure 5-8, and Figure 5-10).
The left side of all treatment screens displays the connected handpiece
(1), treatment mode (2) and pulse counter (3).
The center part of the screen displays the clinical indications [appear
after User Preset selection - (4)], pulse parameters (5) and chiller mode
selection button (6).
The right side displays the filter wavelength or the lightguide/tip size
(7), fluence window (8), Standby and Ready buttons (9 & 10) and
progress bar (11).
The top toolbar buttons offer access to the clinical indications selection
windows (12), to the user presets saving area (13) and to the utility
menu (14).
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-13

Figure 5-7 Universal IPL Treatment Screen
Figure 5-8 Nd:YAG Treatment Screen
5-14
Figure 5-9 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Treatment Screen
Figure 5-10 ResurFX Treatment Screen
For a complete description of User mode, refer to the Operator Manual.
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-15

5.4.4 Service Mode

All the conditions monitored in Treatment mode are monitored in
Service mode. Firing pulses is allowed if no critical error occurs.
Monitored statuses are displayed in diagnostic screens.
See Accessing the Service Module Screens on page 8-1.
5.4.5 LVPS Outputs

The LVPS output power is distributed as follows:
• 24VDC@4.5A to the system's cooling fan

• 12VDC@10A, 5VDC@12A and 3.3VDC@8A to the industrial PC
module
• 24VDC@4.5A to the system controller
5.5 Interface Module

Figure 5-11 is a schematic diagram of the Interface controller board:
5-16
To/From Switching Module
I2C
Current
Lamp Over
Over Temp
Simmer ON
Relay Switch
Drive Current
IGBT Trigger
Lamp Current
VCC Flash (5V)
0-8V = 0-600A
IGBT Leakage
Simmer Status
0-3V = 0-600A
Emergency x2
Interlock x2 Head Connection
status
PB-1042431 Rev D
24V
Additional module
Module Close connection
module)
ModuleoutClose
(for additional
GUI I/O’s
in (x2)
To 52Pin Connector
I2C, CAN Bus,
One Wire
Laser Indication
GUI I/O’s (x4)
Main Controller
16V/8V TEC
(DSP+FPGA)
COM (RS232)
Emergency
24V Pump
Emergency X2
Connector
5V PC
unit via 52Pin

5V PC 12V Display
24V Fan
To/From GUI-Display
12V Display
24V
Emergency
Fire (trigger)
Fire Enable
24V Int. Interlock

5V PC
12V Display
Indications
24V Fan
Voltage Regulators
(LED’s)
24V Pump Safety Logic
16V/8V TEC
From Power Supply

5V
Fan Enable
Pump Enable
SWM Enable
TEC Enable
Figure 5-11 Interface Module Block Diagram

TEC Select Interface Board
-12V
24V
Power In
Interlock x2
To Power Supply LV Control

ID (One Wire)
5-17
To/From Back Panel (Service Panel)
Figure 5-12 Interface Module Block Diagram [2]
5-18
5.5.1 Interface Module Functional Description

The Interface module has three major activities:
1. Being interface between all system’s modules (Power Supply,

Switching Module, handpiece, Cooling System, service panel, PC-
Display and additional modules).
2. Incorporates logic circuits, amplifiers and D/A.
3. Contains the system’s main controller, where DSP and FPGA are
connected. By this, this module interfaces between the system’s
software to the hardware of the system.
Interface Module to Power Supply Module

The Interface module delivers the ON/OFF Switch power, created in
the Power Supply, to the ON/OFF switch. Once the ON/OFF switch is
activated, this power is sent back to the Power Supply via the Interface
module and starts the Power Supply.
The Interface module delivers all LV controls, activated by the

software (DSP via FPGA) to the power supply (Pump_En, Fan_En,
SWM_EN, TEC_En). For each LV enable line the PS will deliver the
appropriate voltage. The Interface module also delivers aTEC_SEL
line to the power supply, for requesting 16V or 8V for the TEC
according to the handpiece in use.
24V for the Interface, 12V for the display and 5V for the PC are
available in the Interface board as the power supply starts and are not
conditioned in Enable lines.
24V for the Switching Module is delivered directly from the Power
Supply to the SWM once enable line is activated.
All LV (except 24V Int.) delivered from the Power Supply to the
Interface are delivered to the DSP A/D, and can be monitored by the
service engineer.
Interface module delivers the charger commands (Inhibit and Dump

controlled by SW in the DSP) to the Power Supply. Once “Inhibit” is
sent to the Power Supply the charger is charging the capacitor bank.
The Power Supply measures the capacitor voltage and sends this
information to the DSP via the CAN bus. When the capacitors are fully
charged the Interface module receives an “End of Charge” status from
the Power Supply, which is delivered to a DSP I/O. This status is
available to be monitored by a service engineer. Once “Dump” is sent
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-19

to the Power Supply the charger discharges the capacitor bank. When
the capacitors are fully discharged the Interface module receives an
“End of Dump” status from the Power Supply, which is delivered to a
DSP I/O. This status can be monitored by the service engineer.
An emergency line is sent from the Interface module to the Power

Supply. When this line is active the Power Supply stops the charger
operation and performs dumping of the capacitor bank. All other LVs
will be available and will be eliminated by the system’s software.
Interface, PC and display voltages will remain active.
There is a CAN bus communication between the Power Supply

controller to the system’s main controller. Currently this bus is used for
delivering the Power Supply SW version and the capacitor bank
voltage to the DSP. These parameters are available for the service
engineer.
Interface Module to PC-Display Module

The Interface module delivers the required voltages to operate the PC
(5V) and the display unit (12V).
The PC and the DSP controller in the Interface module communicate

via a RS232 COM.
The PC activates a DSP burning mode in the PC I/O’s command (GUI

I/O’s).
The Emergency button (Laser stop button) lines, located on the PC-
Display module, are received in the Interface module and delivered to
the system’s controller and to the Power Supply. These lines are also
used for avoiding trigger to the SWM during emergency activation.
The DSP SW controls the lasing indicator, located on the PC-Display

unit. Voltage to this indicator is delivered via the Interface module.
All signals between the Interface module and the PC-Display module
are delivered via the Intermodule connector (52-Pin connector).
Interface Module to Head Connector

The Interface module delivers 5V line for activating the electric boards
of the handpiece. This voltage is regulated on the Interface board from
the Interface 24V received from the Power Supply.
5-20
The Interface module delivers the TEC voltage, received from the
Power Supply, to the handpiece. TEC voltage is delivered via two
different lines due to TEC high current consumption. TEC voltage
readings are available for the service engineer.
There is one wire communication between the Interface module (to

DSP) and the handpiece. This line is used for communicating the head
ID (HID).
The simmer command, produced by the software at the DSP

(Simmer_Out), is communicated via the handpiece connector prior to
sending to the SWM. This is to verify that the head is actually
connected before simmering attempt. While the head is connected this
line is received back (Simmer_In) and is sent to the SWM.
There are I2C communication lines between the handpiece and the
system’s DSP located in the interface module. This communication is
used for the Ready command (when pressing the Ready button),
reading the used filter type (for IPL) or the light guide type (using
Nd:YAG) and for TEC temperature reading (using a PT100 sensor).
Safe line is the indication to the DSP software for safe status. Safe logic
on the handpiece is operative only on “ready” state (as communicated
using the I2C lines). Using IPL head makes the safe line active
automatically with the safe logic activation (“ready” state). Using the
Nd:YAG head makes the safe line active only when the user is pressing
the safe button (located on the handpiece) while the safe logic is
operative. In addition to software notification on “safe” state, safe line
makes the trigger buttons on the handpiece available. Pressing trigger
button with no safe state will not be sensed by the system’s software.
Safe line status indication is available for the service engineer.
Once the system is in “safe” mode, each trigger button pushing will be
delivered to the system’s DSP and FPGA via the Interface module. If
everything works properly and there are no faults detected by the DSP
SW or by the FPGA, an IGBT trigger will be sent from the DSP to the
SWM (via safety logic). Trigger line status indication is available for
the service engineer.
The handpiece has an interrupt line to the DSP, which is delivered to

the DSP via the Interface module. When this line is active the SW stops
any activity and enters an error state (simmer OFF, capacitors
discharge, Cooling OFF, etc.).
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-21

The Interface module delivers to the DSP an indication of handpiece

connection using the ACK line. The ACK line becomes active while
the handpiece is connected properly. Without ACK line active no sub-
system will be active by the SW (Cooling, SWM, charger, etc.). ACK
line status indication is available for the service engineer.
When using the Nd:YAG handpiece, the Interface module (DSP)

controls the electro-mechanical shutter operation. The shutter motor,
located on the Nd:YAG handpiece, is activated by 4.7V received from
the Interface module. This voltage is regulated on the Interface module
using the 12V received from the Power Supply. The regulator is active
only when Nd:YAG handpiece is connected, and this operation is
controlled by the system’s SW on the DSP. Manual regulator activation
is available for service engineer.
When the system is in “Ready” state (using Nd:YAG head), the

system’s software enabling the shutter operation by the
“Shutter_Enable” line. When this line is active the shutter may be, but
not necessarily, opened. For operating the shutter three conditions
should be fulfilled: Shutter voltage is available, shutter_enable is active
and the trigger button is pressed (optional only in “safe” mode). The
“Shutter_Enable” line allows the DSP SW to close the shutter by de-
activating it when a fault is detected. Manual “Shutter_enable”
activation is available for the service engineer.
Shutter status (when using Nd:YAG head) is sent to the DSP SW via
the Interface module. Shutter status may be closed, open, or neither
(when shutter is travelling between open to close or the opposite).
Open/Closed status indications are available for service engineers.
When using the IPL head, the “Shutter Closed” status line is used for
the filter switch. This line is indicating if the used filter is all the way in
or not. Entering “Ready” state is optional only while this line is active.
“Filter out” status indication is available for the service engineer.
Switching module
The switching module is operated by a 24V received directly from the
Power Supply to the SWM (not via the Interface module). The enable
for this voltage is delivered from the Interface module (controlled by
the DSP via the FPGA) to the Power Supply. Software enables the
SWM during self test. Manual SWM enable is available for the service
engineer.
5-22
When the user sets the required fluence it is translated into voltage
between 0-3V (DSP output via a D/A on the Interface board). This
voltage is sent to the Switching module via a “drive current” line, and
will be used as the lamp current setting. This current may be set
manually by a service engineer.
The switching module incorporates a current measuring element. The

measured current is sent to the Interface module and monitored by the
FPGA. If the FPGA finds that current value is not compatible to the
requested current. If the switching module detects an over current
situation (above 650A) it indicates the DSP via the FPGA with a “lamp
over current” status. This status indication is available for service
engineer.
The switching module has two temperature switches. If one of them

detects over temperature situation, it sends a status to the DSP via the
FPGA. This status indication is available for service engineer.
If a current is sensed not during a pulse, the switching module sends an

“IGBT leakage” indication to the DSP via the FPGA. This status
indication is available for service engineer.
The switching module is responsible for simmering the handpiece lamp

and to keep in simmer state. It also controls the HV relay. A simmer
ON command is sent by the DSP via the Interface module. This signal
is going to the head connector first, returns to the Interface module and
then goes to the switching module. By that there is no simmer
command to the switching module if the handpiece is not connected.
Once the switching module senses that the lamp is ignited, it sends a
simmer status to the DSP. This status indication is available for the
service engineer. Also, in this condition the switching module activates
the HV relay, which allows HV to go from the capacitors bank to the
lamp via the switching module during a pulse. A signal indicating the
HV relay status is received in the DSP via the FPGA by “relay switch”
line. This status indication is available for the service engineer. Simmer
command is set during the self test, after the software finds the cooling
system working properly. Simmer may also be set manually by a
service engineer. Cooling system must be activated first.
The switching module incorporates a flash memory chip. This chip

works on 5V supplied by the Interface module, and it is communicating
with the DSP via I2C line. This memory may store the specific module
data, such as serial number and installation date. The stored data is
available for the service engineer.
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-23

The Switching module is responsible for the switching between the

capacitors bank to the handpiece lamp while the user fires a pulse. The
IGBT (the switching element) is getting opened when the IGBT trigger
is received from the Interface module. The IGBT trigger is produced by
the DSP and goes into safety logic (fire signal), incorporated in the
Interface module. This logic eliminating the IGBT trigger in case of the
treatment room door is open (door interlock), laser stop switch is active
or if the FPGA finds a fault, such as wrong lamp current or wrong pulse
width/sequences. When everything works properly, the trigger will
pass the safety logic to the SWM and a pulse will be fired. IGBT trigger
is sent to the SWM when the user press the trigger button on the
handpiece (during “safe” state). A service engineer may fire pulse
manually using the SWM service screen.
Back panel (service panel)

The back panel incorporates the circuit breaker and the mains input,
which delivers the mains input to the power supply, a ground stud, the
door interlock port and the calibration device port.
The door interlock port is connected to the Interface module and

delivers two interlock lines. One of them goes to the DSP and the other
to the power supply. When these lines are active software indicates and
turns off all sub-assemblies, and the power supply discharges the
capacitors bank. DSP software also verifies both of lines are identical.
Door interlock status indicators are available for the service engineer.
Via the calibration device port, the Interface module delivers to the
calibration device 24V for the calibration device internal board, and -
12V for the calibration device disc. The read power from the disc is
amplified in the Interface board and delivered to the DSP A/D. It is
used for calibration of the Nd:YAG head. The calibration device
reading is available for service engineer. The calibration device has a
“head ID”. HID data is transferred to the DSP via one wire line.
Additional Module Connection

The M22 supports additional modules as they merge. Additional
modules can be connected to the system using the Intermodule
connector (52-Pin connector). Every module has I2C, one wire and
CAN bus communication lines; door interlock and laser stop
(emergency) lines and a 24V line. All are connected to the Interface
module. The basic module and every additional module will have a
module closed switch. There is a ground line output from the Interface
5-24
which goes between all switches (as they merge). When all switches
are pressed this ground line comes back from the PC-Display unit to
the Interface module, and indicates the DSP software (via FPGA) that
all modules are installed properly. Module closed status indication is
available for the service engineer.
5.6 Charger and 24V DC Power Supply

Modules
The charger module supplies some low voltages to the system’s loads,
and supplies an auxiliary line of 24V AC to the intermodule connector
for additional modules such as the ResurFX module.
The auxiliary line of 24V AC can be enabled from the Service screen.
This voltage is in use only when the capacitor bank energy is not in use
for the main handpiece connector via the switching module. When the
auxiliary line of 24V AC is activated, the capacitor is charged.
• 24V for Interface module

• 24V to cooling fan
• 16V for IPL head TEC
• 8V for Nd:YAG head TEC
The charger also supplies 550V to charge the capacitor bank. The
capacitor bank is discharged to the dump resistor.
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-25

Figure 5-13 LVPS and Power Supply Location
5-26
24V DC Power Supply:
• Input: Main AC power

• Output: 24V DC
LVPS Board:
• Board inputs:
• J1 gets direct 24V DC from the LVPS
• J5 12 V DC on signal from the Charger
• J2 gets commands from the Interface Module to enable power
to:
o Switching module
o Pump
Board outputs:
• J3 provide power to:

o 12V DC to the Display/Interface
o 5V DC to the PC/Interface
o 24V DC to pump/interface
• J4 provides 24V DC power to the Switching module

A supply two auxiliary lines of 24VAC to the Intermodule connector is
available for additional modules, and is in use only when the capacitor
bank energy is not in use for the main handpiece connector (via
switching module).
Enable PS SW version and capacitor voltage display on the service

screen using the CAN bus. This bus will in the future allow setting the
capacitor voltage value, and deliver fault descriptions.
Figure 5-14 illustrates the block diagram for the Power Supply.
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-27

Figure 5-14 Charger Block Diagram
5.6.1 General Principle of Operation

The charger and 24V DC power supply are operated by mains input
(100-240V AC). Once this input is available, the charger controller and
24V DC power supply is activated, and the ON/OFF switch power is
delivered to the ON/OFF Switch. When the ON/OFF Switch is pressed,
the charger is activated to produce energy for both charger and low volt
circuits. During this state the charger sends 24V to the Interface
module, and 12V to the LV II AUX Board.
5-28
When the charger receives a “charge” command, an output of 550V to

the capacitor bank is enabled. In this mode the charger delivers energy
to the capacitor bank for discharging to the main handpiece connector
using the switch module, or for delivering two lines of 24VAC to
additional modules (auxiliary option).
LVPS
Each LV output is controlled by a dedicated line (except 12V which is
always active). All outputs are monitored by the PS controller. Over
voltage indications will result in PS shut down.
Pressing the emergency button causes charge elimination and dump

operation by the hardware. The system’s software disables the low
voltage supply. 12V remains active for the LV II AUX Board.
TEC voltage output is constantly monitored by the system’s software.

Fan 24V is checked by system’s software during self test only. Charger
550V is monitored by system’s software using “End of Charge” and
“End of dump” I/O’s signals. This voltage is available for reading in
service application.
All LV voltages except the SWM 24V have LED indications on the
Interface module.
A CAN bus connects the charger to the main system’s controller. Using
this bus, data of current capacitor bank voltage and PS SW version are
delivered from the charger to the system’s controller. As a future
feature, this bus will allow sending faults data from the charger to the
system’s controller.
Figure 5-15 illustrates the LVPS block diagram.
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-29

Figure 5-15 LVPS Block Diagram
5.6.2 Logic Description

The Charger delivers 3.3V to the ON/OFF switch via SW_POWER
line, once mains input exist. Pressing the ON/OFF switch will send this
voltage back to SW_ON_OFF line, which will operate the power
supply. 24V for the Interface module is available once the charger is
operative and it is not dependant on a dedicated enable line. The
Interface module regulates all voltages required for the Interface board
and for the controller board using the Interface 24V.
2V for the LV II AUX Board is available once the power supply is

operative and it is not dependant on dedicated enable lines. This line is
delivered to the LV II AUX Board, which produces 5V and 12V to the
interface module, which are delivered to the GUI-Display module from
there.
24V for the pump is available on the LV II AUX Board. Once the
system’s software enables it by the Pump_ Enable line. Pump 24V is
5-30
delivered to the Interface module, being used for both water pump and
water level sensor. The system’s software enables the pump voltage
once the controller is working. Although pump voltage is delivered to
the Interface module, the pump will not start working until an
additional command line is active. This command resides internally in
the Interface module (PWM line from the DSP controller to the pump
bridge component), and the software activates this line during self test.
24V for the fan will be available once the system’s software enables it
by fan_Enable line. This line has four possible states:
• 0 –Fan is off.
• 58%DC –fan is slow. The fan works with this voltage up to water
temperature of 40°C,and receives this voltage again when water
temperature goes below 35°C.
• 79%DC –fan is in middle speed. The fan works with this voltage up
to a water temperature of 45°C,and receives this voltage again when
water temperature goes below 40°C.
• 100%DC (constant ‘1’)–fan is in full speed (24V).The fan works
with this voltage when water temperature is above 45°C.
This logic allows having minimal noise level where full speed is not
required. SW activates this line during self test. Activation is for 100%
DC and speed is lowered according to the actual water temperature
after self test.
24V for the switching module will be available on the LV II AUX

Board once the system’s software enables it by SWM_ Enable line.
24V is delivered directly to the switching module (not via the Interface
module). Using this voltage, the SWM generates its own voltages for
switching components and for lamp ignition. The system’s software
will enable switching voltage during self test, after water system was
activated and verified for proper operation.
TEC voltage will be available once the system’s software enables it by
TEC_Enable line. This line may have 3 states:
• 0V –while there is no TEC enable.

• 16V –while TEC enable is active and SEL_TEC_8_16 is low(0).
This voltage is supplied while IPL head is connected. SEL_TEC line
is controlled by the system’s software.
• 8V –while TEC enable is active and SEL_TEC_8_16 is high (1).This
voltage is supplied while Nd:YAG head is connected. SEL_TEC line
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-31

is controlled by the system’s software. This TEC voltage is delivered

to the Interface module, and is delivered to the TEC of the handpiece
module from there.
Charging to Capacitor Bank

The capacitor bank is charged for 550V once the charger receives a
“charge” command from the system’s software. As long as the
capacitor bank is empty, indication of “Fully Dump” from the charger
to the system’s software is active. During charging (Charge command
is active),“Fully Dump” and “charger done” indications are not active.
Once the capacitor bank is charged, a “charger done” from the power
supply to the system’s software is active.“Charge” command is sent
from the system’s software as the last operation of self test. After the
software recognizes normal operation of all other modules, a “Charge”
command is sent, and the system’s software waits for “end of charge”.
If EOC (End of Charge) is not received system’s software indicates a
fault.
Discharge of the capacitor bank to the dump resistor is active while

“Dump” command is received from the system’s software. During the
dump process both “EOC” and “Fully dump” indications are not active.
Once the capacitors are fully discharged, “Fully dump” indication is

active. The “Dump” command is sent to the charger in four instances:
• When the user replaces the handpiece.

• During a fault in the system.
• When a technician enters the service application.
• When the charger is off.
Auxiliary voltage is available once the capacitor bank is charged. Two
lines of 24VAC each are connected to the system’s Intermodule
connector. This power is required to operate additional modules as they
merge. This power is available only if capacitor energy is not used for
the main handpiece connector (IPL, Nd:YAG or any other handpiece
connected to the main connector). Additional modules cannot be
operated with a main connector handpiece at the same time.
5-32
End of Charge Fully Dump

Capacitor bank fully dumped Green Red
Charging/Discharging Red Red
Capacitor Bank is fully Charged Red Green
Illegal State Green Green
5.7 Capacitor Bank

The capacitor bank consists of 4 electrolytic capacitors. The capacitors
are connected in a series/parallel configuration that allows charging of
up to 550 V (constant). The total capacitance of the capacitor bank is
26 mF.
Figure 5-16 presents a diagram of the capacitor bank module.
Black (+)
point Black (+)
point
red (-)
point red (-)
point
Figure 5-16 Capacitor Bank
5.8 Switching Module

The main functions of the Switching module are to:
• ignite the Head Lamp.
• switch the HV capacitor bank energy to the lamp.
• send SWM statuses and faults to the interface module.
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-33

5.8.1 Signal Details

24VDC power – power from the HVPS, received upon software enable
command to the power supply. This DC voltage powers the simmer
board, the HV relay and SWM internal components.
Drive current: 0-3VDC representing the required lamp current

following the user GUI fluence demand.
Simmer on – Lamp ignition command.
The command appears only if:
• the cooling system is OK

• the simmer status is “off”
• the relay is “open “
IGBT Trigger – Trigger for switching the Capacitor energy to the
lamp following the user pulse GUI setup.
I2C – Communication with data storage chip. The data is relevant only
for the Module identification information and not for any status or
faults. This data is available for service only.
Simmer Status: indicates simmer on or off. ON means that lamp is

ignited.
Lamp current: indication of actual lamp current during the pulse. If it

is different than the required current, the “IGBT Trigger” signal will be
eliminated.
Relay switch: Status of HV relay – connected or disconnected.
IGBT leakage: current sensor – if there is a current without pulse

command then the signal sends an IGBT leakage fault.
Lamp over current: sends lamp current fault when the current exceeds
650A.
Switching Over temp: fault that indicates that the internal SWM
temperature is too high. One of the two temperature SWM internal
switches is open.
Lamp ignition: HV for igniting the lamp. The Voltage follows the line
connected via the HV relay.
5-34
Capacitor HV: The capacitor bank is charged with 550VDC.
Lamp HV: Discharged voltage from the capacitor bank via the IGBT.
For each IGBT_trigger command, the IGBT is operated and the
capacitor bank discharges the energy to the lamp.
GND: Ground is connected to the HV relay and operates the HV relay

to connection status. GND is supplied by the SWM as long as the
simmer board indicates that the simmer is on.
Figure 5-17 illustrates the Switching Module Block diagram.
Lamp Ignition
24V from PS
Switching Board
FROM INTERFACE
Drive Current SIMMER

BOARD
Simmer On 550VDC From
Capacitor Bank
IGBT Trigger
IGBT Driver Lamp HV
2
IC and Snubber
24V
GND HV Relay
Relay Switch
TO INTERFACE
Status
Simmer Status
Lamp Current
Relay Switch
IGBT Leakage LAMP
Faults
Lamp Over Current

SWM Over Temp.
Figure 5-17 Switching Module Block Diagram
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-35

5.9 Handpiece Components
5.9.1 Handpiece Connector

The M22 handpiece's connector (see Figure 5-18) incorporates the
following:
• Data Transfer Port – D-type, 24-pin connection port for data

transfer
• HV Connection Port – the HV (High voltage) port incorporates two
high voltage connection points and ground points, which come into
contact with the lamp electrodes.
• Water Connection Port – the tube from the cooling system
connects to this port to create the water circulation via the connected
handpieces.
Figure 5-18 Handpiece Connector Location
5-36
Figure 5-19 Handpiece Connection Block Diagram
The M22 system is designed to operate with a Universal IPL (Intense

Pulsed Light) handpiece or a Multi-Spot Nd:YAG laser handpiece.
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-37

5.9.2 Universal IPL Handpiece

Figure 5-20 represents the Universal IPL handpiece block diagram.
LIGHT IPL LAMP CAVITY WATER FAST CONN FAST CONN WATER
GUIDE FOR WATER FOR WATER
Filter SW
UMBILICAL
CABLE
HVR
HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH VOLTAGE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR SW
TEC x 2 MALE FEMALE
3 PIN 3 PIN
TEC
PT100
REF AND A/D 12 BIT I2 C
TEMP
AMP SERIAL I2 C I2 C
SENSOR CONTROL CONTROL H_ID
0x4A / 0x4B CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Filter SW
MALE 24 MALE
FEMALE 24
Filter SW Filter SW SAFE
MOLEX 24 MOLEX 24
TRIGGER
FILTER FILTER PORT IN

DETECTOR AMP I2 C ARM
0x3C / 0x3D I2 C H_ID
EEPROM I2 C PORT OUT HEAD ID

TRIGGER I2 C
TRIGGER xxxxxx3A
SWITCHS 0x56 / 0x57 0x3E / 0x3F
IPL HEAD BOARD

HEAD CONNECTOR BOARD
Figure 5-20 Universal IPL Handpiece Block Diagram
The Universal IPL handpiece houses the mechanisms that generate and
deliver the light pulse (Wavelength range 515-1200 nm). It includes:
• Lamp
• Filter and filter detector
• Lightguide and TEC
• Trigger buttons
• Head board
• Head connector and umbilical cable
Lamp
The lamp generates the treatment light pulses, according to the
electrical pulses which it receives from the Switching module.To
5-38
maximize its effectiveness, the lamp is situated within a highly

reflective housing (Reflector) which directs all of the light towards the
lightguide. During operation, the lamp generates a large amount of heat
energy which is removed by a constant flow of water from the cooling
system.
Filter and Filter Detector

A removable filter slides into the handpiece, between the lamp and the
lightguide. The filter is of the high-pass type and its purpose is to allow
only the passage of a specified wavelength range of the light spectrum.
The filter transmits all wavelengths which are higher than its cut-off
value. Filters are available for the following cut-off wavelengths: An
optical ID code is imprinted on each filter, which enables the Filter
Detector to identify the attached filter.The system uses the filter
identification to verify that the correct filter is being used. If an
incorrect filter is detected, the system instructs the user to change it.
• 515 nm
• 640 nm
• 560 nm
• 695 nm
• 590 nm
• 615 nm
Lightguide and TEC

The lightguide is the delivery medium which transfers the light from
the handpiece to the tissue and cools down the patient's skin. The
lightguide is made of sapphire and is available in the following sizes:
• 15×35 mm
• 8×15 mm
A thermoelectric cooler (TEC) within the handpiece is in tight contact
with the lightguide and constantly removes the heat energy from it.
Thus, the chilled lightguide cools the patient's skin upon contact. A
PT100 temperature sensor constantly monitors the temperature of the
lightguide and sends feedback to the TEC control.
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-39

Trigger Buttons
The Universal IPL handpiece has three trigger buttons at three different
locations (for right and left handed users and different grips). The light
pulse can be activated by pressing any of the trigger buttons.
Head Circuit Board

The head board contains control and communication circuits of the
handpiece. The board also includes a temperature sensor which
measures the ambient temperature within the handpiece.
Head Connector and Umbilical Cable

The head connector, at the proximal end of the umbilical cable, plugs
into the console connector and connects the handpiece assembly to the
system. Through the umbilical cable and the head connector, the
following tubes and wires are connected between the handpiece and the
machine console:
• Hot water tube

• Cold water tube
• High voltage wires (carrying HV pulses from the Switching module)
• Control signal wires (TEC,I2C and ID)
The head connector also holds the Head ID chip which contains data on
the handpiece.
5-40
5.9.3 Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece

Figure 5-21 represents the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece block
diagram.
FAST CONN WATER

FOR WATER
CAVITY
LIGHT LAMP AND CAVITY WATER FAST CONN
LAMP AND LASER
GUIDE LASER Electro Mechanical FOR WATER
Shutter HVR
UMBILICAL HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLE CONNECTOR SW
FEMALE
3 PIN
HIGH VOLTAGE
CONNECTOR
TEC x 1 MALE
3 PIN
Shutter Power
Shutter Power Shutter Enable

Shutter Enable TEC
PT100
REF AND A/D 12 BIT I 2C
TEMP
AMP SERIAL I2 C I2 C I2 C H_ID
SENSOR CONTROL CONTROL
0x4A / 0x4B CONTROL
CONNECTOR CONTROL
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR SAFE
MALE FEMALE
MALE
20 PIN24 FEMALE
20 PIN 24 TRIGGER
Shutter Open
Shutter Closed
LIGHT GUIDE FILTER PORT IN
DETECTOR I2 C ARM
0x3C / 0x3D I2 C H_ID
Shutter Power
Shutter Enable
EEPROM PORT OUT HEAD ID
SAFE SWITCH SAFE I2 C
Shutter Enable I2 C
AND
AND TRIGGER 1 Shutter logic xxxxxx3A
0x56 / 0x57 0x3E / 0x3F
TRIGGER TRIGGER 2
Shutter Open
YAG HEAD BOARD

Shutter Closed HEAD CONNECTOR BOARD
Shutter Motor
Shutter Motor Control
Figure 5-21 Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece Block Diagram
The Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece incorporates a solid-state Nd:YAG

laser, operating at a wavelength of 1064 nm. The handpiece houses the
mechanisms that generate and deliver the laser pulse. It includes the
following:
• Nd:YAG laser assembly

• laser cooling components
• safety switch and indicator
• laser trigger
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-41

• light guide assembly that determines the spot size and delivers
the laser beam to the treated area.
• Light guide TE cooler
• built-in mechanical shutter
• Calibration device (for details, see IPL Handpiece Calibration
Using the IPL Calibration Device on page 8-69).
Laser Head
The laser head includes the laser cavity, the xenon flashlamp and the
Nd:YAG rod.
The laser cavity houses the flashlamp and the Nd:YAG rod within a
reflector.
The flashlamp and the Nd:YAG rod are positioned within the laser
cavity in parallel with each other. The flashlamp is the light source
which pumps the Nd:YAG rod to generate the laser pulses, according
to the electrical pulses which the flashlamp receives from the
Switching module.
The Nd:YAG rod is 110 mm (4.33")long and has a diameter of 8 mm

(0.31")and includes mirrors at its proximal and distal ends.The mirror
at the proximal (lower) end is 100% reflective.The mirror at the distal
(upper) end is partially reflective which allows a fraction of the
generated light to exit as the laser beam.
The laser head is situated within the handpiece's handle assembly. It

emits the laser beam towards a 90° folding mirror which reflects the
beam towards the lightguide. During operation, the lamp generates a
large amount of heat energy which is removed by a constant flow of
water from the cooling system through the laser head.
Lightguide and Spot Size Detector

The lightguide is the delivery medium which transfers the laser beam
from the handpiece to the tissue and is cooled down by the system. The
lightguide is made of sapphire and is available in the following spot
size diameters:
• 6 mm
• 2 x 4 mm
5-42
The diameter of the laser beam which is generated within the handpiece
is 9 mm.Therefore, by using smaller diameter lightguides, a smaller
spot size (and larger fluence) can be achieved. The lightguide assembly
has a coded surface of physical grooves which is different for each spot
size. This enables the Spot Size Detector to identify the attached
lightguide. The system uses the spot size identification to verify that the
correct lightguide size is being used. If an incorrect lightguide is
detected, the system instructs the user to change it.
TEC
A thermoelectric cooler (TEC), within the handpiece, is in tight contact
with the lightguide and constantly removes the heat energy from it.
Therefore, the chilled lightguide cools down the patient's skin upon
contact.
In order to prevent condensation of the inner side of the chilled

lightguide, a constant flow of dry air from the cooling system is applied
to that area.
A PT100 temperature sensor constantly monitors the temperature of the

lightguide and sends feedback to the TEC Control.
Safety and Trigger Buttons

Pressing the Safety button enables the mechanical shutter to open after
pressing the trigger. Pressing the trigger button while the mechanical
shutter is open activates the laser pulse.
Head Circuit Board

The head circuit board contains control and communication circuits of
the handpiece. The board also includes a temperature sensor which
measures the ambient temperature within the handpiece.
Head Connector and Umbilical Cable

The head connector at the proximal end of the umbilical cable plugs
into the console connector and connects the handpiece assembly to the
system. Through the umbilical cable and the head connector, the
following tubes and wires are connected between the handpiece and the
system's console:
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-43

• Hot water tube

• Cold water tube
• High voltage wires (carrying HV pulses from the Switching module)
• Control signal wires (TEC,I 2 C and ID)
The head connector also holds the Head ID chip which contains data on
the handpiece.
The umbilical cable is an extremely flexible cable; it may be coiled

tightly to fit in its carrying case without risk of damaging its internal
lines.
5.10 Cooling System

The cooling system removes the heat generated by the handpieces
during the light/laser pulses and by the thermoelectric coolers (TECs).
The system is a closed-loop, circulating de-ionized water.
The cooling system incorporates a water pump, water tank, a fan-

cooled radiator, deionizer, flow switch and temperature sensor. The
system circulates deionized water from the fan-cooled radiator to the
handpiece.
The cooling system is comprised of the following components:
• Water tank
• Water level sensor
• pump
• Flow switches
• Radiator
• Fan
• Thermal switch
• Temperature sensor
• De-ionizer
The cooling system receives its electrical power from the power supply
via the interface module.
The Cooling system is controlled by the interface module.
5-44
Cooling system activation is controlled by the system’s DSP via the

FPGA. Activating each element is by enabling the element’s voltage,
by sending enable command to the power supply.
Fan speed is controlled by the system’s software depends on water

temperature. Control is by sending a PWM to the power supply enable
line. There are three speeds for the fan:
1. Low speed (58% DC). This speed is used if water temperature is

below 40°C.
2. Medium speed (79% DC). This speed is used if water temperature
is above 40°C but below 45°C.
3. High Speed (100% DC). This speed is used if water temperature is
above 45°C.
Lowering fan speed is performed if water is cooled below 40°C (for

going from high speed to medium speed), and if water is cooled below
35°C for going from medium speed to low speed).
Fan operation (On and Off) and fan speed control is available for the
service engineer.
Pump voltage enable is controlled by the system’s software. It is used

both for pump activation logic and for the level sensor operation. This
voltage is enabled as a default once the DSP is working for activating
the level sensor. Pump voltage activation is available for the service
engineer.
Pump activation logic (pump control) is performed by the Interface

board, controlled by the system’s software (DSP). While pump 24V is
active, the DSP controls the pump operation using two lines:
1. PWM line – controls pump speed. Activation is by low DC which

increases gradually and constantly up to 100% DC. De-activation is
by lowering the DC gradually from 100% to 0.
2. Dir. line – By this line, the software controls the direction of the
water pump – flowing water to the handpiece, or draining the water
from the cooling system and the head back to the water tank.
Pump activation is available for the service engineer.
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-45

Water Level Flow Sensor

The water level flow sensor status is delivered to the DSP via the
interface module, indicating that the water flow is coming out of the
pump in the correct direction and amount of flow.
Water Level Sensor (series 002 only)

Level sensor status is delivered to the DSP via the Interface module.
The SW uses this indication as a condition to operate the cooling
system and all other sub-systems. Water level sensor shows if there is
enough water in the water tank to operate the cooling system properly.
Water level status indication is available for the service engineer as
long as 24V pump is active.
Flow switch status is delivered to the DSP via the Interface module.
The SW uses this indication as a condition to allow operation of the
SWM and of the charger. Once water pump is active, the SW expects to
receive flow status from the flow switch. If this status is not received
the SW indicates a flow fault. Water flow status indication is available
for the service engineer.
Water Temperature Reading

Water temperature reading is available using an LM35 temperature
sensor located on the water tube close to the heat exchanger. This
sensor receives 5V, which is regulated and sent from the Interface
module. Sensor data is received in the DSP A/D via the Interface
module. This reading is used for controlling the fan speed and for
stopping system’s operation due to an over temp of the water situation.
The water temperature reading is available for the service engineer.
5-46
Block Diagrams
Figure 5-22 presents a block diagram of the cooling system with the
water level flow sensor:
Figure 5-22 Cooling System Block Diagram -

with Water Level Flow Sensor
Figure 5-23 illustrates the water flow of the cooling system with water
level sensor (for series 002 only):
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-47

Figure 5-23 Cooling System Water Flow Diagram -

with water Level Sensor (Series 002 only)
5.10.1 Water Tank

The water tank is the main reservoir of the cooling system. The water
tank hold a maximum of 900 cc. An external level sensor located
outside of the water tank constantly monitors the water level. If the
water level drops below the minimum allowed value, the level sensor
sends an error signal to the Cooling Control.
5.10.2 Pump
A water pump draws water from the tank and pumps it into the
handpiece, thus circulating the water through the system. The Pump
Control controls the operation of the pump and its speed, as per the
commands which it receives from the Cooling Control.
5-48
5.10.3 Flow Switch

A flow switch connected between the handpiece and heat exchanger. It
continually monitors the rate of water flow through the cooling system.
If the water flow drops to below the minimum allowed value (e.g. due
to a leak), the flow switch sends an error signal to the Cooling Control.
The water, passing through the handpiece, absorbs the heat energy
from the lamp and the TEC and cools it down.
5.10.4 Radiator and Fan Assembly

The heated water leaves the handpiece and passes through the radiator.
The fan blows air into the radiator, removing the heat energy from the
warm water. The Fan Speed Control controls the operation of both fans
and their speed, as per the commands which it receives from the
Cooling Control. The radiator and fan assembly includes a temperature
sensor which causes the system to stop operating when the water
temperature exceeds 55°C.
The radiator and fan assembly is illustrated in Figure 5-24. When

ordering the fan and radiator assembly as spare parts, the assembly is
shipped with the water tubes and temperature sensor. The calibration
tool is needed for calibrating the system temperature values when
replacing the radiator and fan assembly. When replacing the radiator
and fan assembly for the first time, follow the procedure Installing the
New Radiator for the First Time on page 10-40.
PB-1042431 Rev D 5-49

fan
temperature sensor
radiator
Figure 5-24 Radiator and Fan Assembly
5.10.5 System Temperature Sensor

The cooled water from the radiator passes through a thermal switch and
a temperature sensor. The temperature sensor continually monitors the
water temperature and reports it to the Cooling Control. The thermal
switch acts as a thermostat. If the water temperature rises above the
permitted limit, the thermal switch sends an error signal to the Cooling
Control.
5.10.6 DI Filter
The water, after passing the thermal switch and a temperature sensor,
divides into two branches.
The main branch, containing about 90% of the water, flows directly
back into the water tank.
The other branch, containing about 10% of the water, flows into the
water tank through the de-ionizer which maintains the purity of the de-
ionized water. Therefore, the system constantly de-ionizes about 10%
of its water.
5-50
ResurFX Module
C H A P T E R
RESURFX MODULE
6.1 Introduction
The ResurFX module is indicated for use for the following dermatolog-
ical applications:
• Coagulation of soft tissue.

• Skin resurfacing procedures.
• Treatment of dyschromia, such as but not limited to melasma.
• Treatment of acne scars and surgical scars.
• Treatment of striae.
• Treatment of periorbital wrinkles.
Environmental Specifications
Operating Environment: 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F), relative
humidity 10 to 90% non-condensing.
Storage: -20°C to 70°C (-4°F to 158°F), relative humidity 10 to 90%

non-condensing
When the system is used intensively it will emit heat. Therefore, it is

PB-1042431 Rev D 6-1

Figure 6-1 ResurFX Module Control Panel
When installing the ResurFX module, one block from the base of the
cart must be removed in order to lower the cart to the proper height.
6-2
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-2 ResurFX Module with Cart - Final Installation
6.2 Functional Description

Figure 6-3 represents all the systems main functional modules with the
ResurFX module.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-3

Figure 6-3 ResurFX Functional Modules Diagram
6-4
ResurFX Module
The product is divided into the following main sub-assemblies:
PC & Display Unit PC
touch-screen
Basic Unit Interface & Main Controller
Switching Module
Cooling System:
• water reservoir
• coolant pump
• radiator
• fan
• flow switch sensor
• water temperature
sensor
LVPS and distribution board
Capacitor Bank
Charger
Rear Panel
Handpiece Connector
Main harness (52-pin)
Locking mechanism
Covers
ResurFX Fiber laser
Tip cooling system
ResurFX controller
Scanner controller
Handpiece
Footswitch
Power Supply
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-5

Figure 6-5 is a block diagram illustrating the ResurFX module main

components.
Figure 6-4 ResurFX Block Diagram
Figure 6-5 is a block diagram illustrating the ResurFX module

interface with the M22 system.
6-6
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-5 ResurFX Module Interface Diagram
6.3 Module Specifications

The following list describes the ResurFX module technical specifica-
tions.
• Energy Source: Diode Laser

• Wavelength: 1565 nm
• Fluence range: 10 - 70 mJ
• Pulse repetition Rate: 0.5, 1, 3 seconds
• Skin cooling: continuous contact cooling, 7 - 13°C
• Umbilical cable length: 170 cm / 67 inches
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-7

Scanner:
• Pattern shapes: Line, square, rectangle, circle, ring, hexagon

• Tip size: 18 mm Ø
• Beam density: up to 500 7µbeam / cm2
• Ambient Operation Temperature: 10°C - 30°C / 60°F - 86°F
• Ambient Relative Humidity: 70% at 30°C (non condensing)
• Storage Air Temperature: 1-5°C - 45°C
• Storage Relative Humidity: 5-95%
6.4 Major Module Components

The ResurFX module is comprised of the following major components:
ResurFX Power Supply
ResurFX controller
Scanner controller
Tip cooling system
Fiber laser
Footswitch
Handpiece
6.4.1 Low Voltage Power Supply

The LVPS produces all the module voltages (20V to the pump, 8V to
the TEC, 5V, +24V to the scanner fan) from 24V DC input, and 24V
DC for the fiber laser from 24V AC input. Each voltage is controlled
and monitored by the controller.
The LVPS contains two modules:
• LVPSA - Low voltage power supply– this power supply block

is designed to supply all the required low voltages: cooling
system (+24V TEC, pump) and scanner system. The DC input
for this block is the 24VDC from the M22 low voltage power
6-8
ResurFX Module
supply. The 24V DC from the M22 LVPS is passed via the 52-
pin connector.
• AC/DC converter: The module consists of AC to DC converter
and converts the 24VAC Aux. power supplied by M22 main
console to 25VDC. The converted DC output provides the input
power for the fiber laser module only, controlled by a relay.
[160W max for the Fiber Laser module with cooling fans].
The relay connects the voltage to the fiber laser after receiving
PS ON from the DSP.
• DSP Control - ON_OFF_PS: Enable the power supply (digital
signal) and activates the PS relay, which provides power to the
fiber laser module, only after successful communication
between the ResurFX module to the M22 controller interface.
• Input-12-36VAC, 25 KHz-250 KHz, 12A - from the Charger
Aux. PS section; to be used as 25VDC power for the fiber laser
module after AC/DC conversion.
• Protection - Output: over voltage, over current, over
temperature
Figure 6-6 ResurFX LVPS Block Diagram
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-9

6.4.2 ResurFX Main Controller

The main controller is responsible for operation and monitoring of all
internal subsystems of the module. The controller is powered from the
M22 inter-module connector by 12V DC. Internal power supply
produces 3.3 VDC for DSP, MCU and other logic elements, 1.8 V DC
for DSP core, 5 V DC for analog circuitry and for the scanner
controller.
DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE
Scanner controller +15V DC

- 5V DC
+ 5V DC
Water Pump +20V DC
Fan +24V DC
PTEC 0 - 8.5V DC
Fiber Laser Power Feedback 4V DC
Fiber Laser Power Monitor 4V DC
Pin Name Signal Description
1 PS_ON_OFF Control Digital active high Control signal from the DSP.
Enables the PS when high level
(+3.3V).
2 GND_A GND
3 PTEC_Control Control Digital PWM Control signal from the DSP. PWM
10KHz 3.3VP-P, Adjust the TEC
output voltage between 0.5v-8.5v.
4 GND_A GND
5 PTEC Power 0.5v-8.3v 3.5Amp. To the DSP. (For the TEC.)
6 P24V_laser Power 24V To the DSP. (For sensing)
7 P15V Power +15V 0.5Amp. To the DSP.

(For the Scanner)
8 N15V Power -15V 0.35Amp. to the DSP.

(For the Scanner)
9 Pump Power +20V 1Amp. to the DSP.

(For the Pump.)
10 Pump_on_off Control Digital active high Control signal from the DSP.
Enable the Pump when high level
(+3.3V).
6-10
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-7 presents the ResurFX main controller board block diagram.
Figure 6-7 ResurFX Controller Block Diagram
Figure 6-8 presents the ResurFX main controller board electrical

diagram.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-11

Figure 6-8 Controller Board Electrical Wiring Diagram
6-12
ResurFX Module
6.4.3 Scanner Controller

Controls and monitors scanner operation. The scanner communicates
with main controller using Can-Bus communication and discrete lines.
The scanner controller includes the DSP software and micro-controller

software.
6.4.4 Scanner Controller Board

The scanner controller board controls the beam position by translating
commands from the user interface PC into precise motion of the galvo
motors that control the scanner’s mirror to create specific shapes for
each application. Each shape is application and specialty specific.
The Scanner Controller Board controls displacement of two Galvo

motors in the scanner head; X and Y axis Galvo motor.
The scanner board contains:
• Two analog servo controllers for each axis.

• Galvo motor encoder interface circuit.
• Digital command generator for analog servo controllers.
• Isolated interface to Interface Card.
The Scanner controller board receives 15VDC from the LVPS to feed
the scanner operation (including galvo motors), and 5VDC for internal
“logic” operation of the board.
Scanner Connections
• Connector to the O.P Controller
• Connector to the Scanner motors
• Standard JTAG Connector
• RS-232 Connector
• Test connector
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-13

Scanner Controller Board Power
Input voltage: + /-15V DC

-+5V DC 0.1 Amp
Output Voltages: +15V ±5%, 2 Amp

-15V ±5%, 2 Amp
+3.3V ±1%, 0.3 Amp
+1.8V ±1%, 0.5 Amp
Isolation: Input to output 2500V DC
Figure 6-9 illustrates the scanner module electrical diagram.
Figure 6-9 Scanner Module Electrical Diagram
6-14
ResurFX Module
Galvo Position Demodulator
Figure 6-10 Galvo Position Demodulator
ResurFX Beam Synchronization
Point to Point Scanning
After the scanner is positioned on the first scan point it sets AT_POS
indicating that the position is reached and lasing can commence.
Upon receiving the NEXT_POS interrupt the scanner moves to the next
point and sets AT_POS again.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-15

Figure 6-11 Galvo Control Closed Loop
6.4.5 Cooling System

The cooling systems consists of a water pump, fan, filter, radiator,
reservoir, Thermal sensor, flow switch, and TEC which are responsible
for the cooling of the handpiece tip.
Note
The cooling system uses distilled water only.
6-16
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-12 ResurFX Cooling System Diagram
Water Tank
The water tank can be filled or drained by the CE by using the water
refill/drain tool. The min/max water level of the water tank can be
viewed through the grill at the back of the system. The water tank
contains a LED board to enable easier viewing of the water level for the
user.
Coolant Pump
The ResurFX coolant pump is used to circulate coolant for cooling the
TEC inside the ResurFX handpiece. This allows the tip to be cooled
during treatment.
Radiator
The radiator’s function is to cool the water in the system. The radiator
contains a temperature sensor which measures the coolant temperature.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-17

Temperature Sensor
The temperature sensor measures the coolant temperature. If the
temperature exceeds the accepted range, an error occurs. The sensor is
located on the radiator.
Fan
The fan’s function is to cool the radiator. If the temperature of the
radiator is above the acceptable range, an error is displayed.
Flow Switch
The flow switch identifies that the coolant circulation is occurring; if
not, an error is displayed.
Line Filter
The line filter prevents debris from accumulating in the handpiece. It
can be disassembled from the system, opened and cleaned under fresh
water.
Refill/Drain Port
The water level in the coolant reservoir is very important to maintain
for proper functioning and safety of the system. The water level should
always be between the MIN. LEVEL and MAX. LEVEL marks on the
reservoir.
reservoir should be removed from the system during transportation of
any method.
The refill/drain tool is used for both refilling and raining the distilled
water from the system. The tool is connected to the refill/drain port at
the back of the system.
Add water to the system as follows:
6-18
ResurFX Module
Draining the Water:

the open air hole on the left side (see Figure 6-13).
push down to release
air hole
on left side
Figure 6-13 Refill/Drain Port
2. Lower the tube so that the open end of the tube is lower than the
drain port, and using a bucket to catch the liquid, drain the water
from the module.
Refilling the Water:

the open air hole on the left side (see Figure 6-13).
2. Raise the refill tool so that the funnel is at a higher level than the
port connection.
3. Pour the distilled water into the refill tool’s funnel until the water
reaches the Max line. (The Min/Max line of the water tank can be
observed through the grill of the back cover).
Note
Do not fill the beyond the MAX level; it will over flow out of the drain
tube.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-19

Figure 6-14 Filling Water for ResurFX Water Tank
4. Disconnect the refill tool from the port.
6.5 Fiber Laser Module

When the laser is operated, the fiber laser communicates with the main
controller using discrete lines. It has an option to communicate with
external PC using serial port.
Table 6-1 presents the optical characteristics of the fiber laser.
Table 6-1. Optical Characteristics of Fiber Laser

Parameters Value Unit
Laser wavelength 1565, +/- 3 nm nm
Operation Mode CW and Pulsed
Nominal output power 15 W
Output power tenability 10 - 100 %
Long term stability (RMS, over 1h@20°C) <+- 2 %
Minimum pulse duration 0.5 ms
Minimum off duration 0.5 ms
Rise time of the pulse 0.2 ms
Off time of the pulse 0.2 ms
Signal line width (FWHM) <3 nm
6-20
ResurFX Module
Laser output configuration Gaussian

profile
Output isolation 35 dB
Figure 6-15 Fiber Laser Module
Fiber Holder
The fiber holder is used for docking the fiber laser tip when the
handpiece is not connected to the system.
6.6 Footswitch
The ResurFX modules uses a footswitch as a trigger for lasing during
treatment. The user can select either the footswitch or the handpiece
trigger during treatment; they cannot be used simultaneously during the
same treatment.
When the M22 system is equipped with the optional ResurFX module,
its footswitch must be connected; place the footswitch on the floor and
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-21

Figure 6-16 ResurFX Footswitch and Connector
6.7 ResurFX Handpiece

The optional ResurFX handpiece incorporates a laser operating at a
wavelength of 1565 nm.
The handpiece is based on a galvanometric scanner for delivery of

fractional patterns. The scanner connects to the fiber laser and to the
scanner controller. The thermo-electric cooler (TEC) is connected to
the cooling system and controls the tip temperature; when the TEC is
on, it provides continuous light guide cooling at a range of 7°C - 13°C.
The TEC can be activated or disabled via the service screen. (Default is
activated).
6-22
ResurFX Module
• Tip identification components

• Tip cooling components + PT100
• Sapphire Lightguide tip – 18 mm Ø
• Umbilical with handpiece connector
• Laser trigger.
• Lightguide thermo-electric cooler
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-23

Figure 6-18 Handpiece Optical Path and Tip Connection
6.7.1 Trigger and Tip Identification

The trigger switch and tip identification are connected to the main
controller. The tip has a mechanical usage identification.
6.7.2 Aiming Beam

The aiming beams turns on when the module is on.
The aiming beam density is controlled via the GUI.
6.7.3 Handpiece Connector

The ResurFX module handpiece connector can be connected only to its
designated system handpiece connection.
6-24
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-19 ResurFX Handpiece Connector - System Side
Figure 6-20 ResurFX Handpiece Connector
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-25

6.7.4 Lasing Control
Emergency Stop Button

emergency situations. The button actuator is a large, red mushroom-
shaped knob that is operated by pressing in. To release the switch to its
normal position, rotate the knob (direction is marked on the knob's
face).
The laser shutoff knob disables light output from the handpiece the
moment it is pressed. To release the laser shutoff knob, turn it
in an error state.
Note
The emergency stop button should be activated only in case of an
emergency.
6.7.5 ResurFX Rear Panel

The rear panel of the ResurFX module contains the following:
• Fiber Holder
• Footswitch Connector
• Refilling/Drain port
• Max/Min water Level indicator
6-26
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-21 ResurFX Rear Panel
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-27

6.8 ResurFX Software

The software uses the PC for GUI and non-real time functionality.
• The software uses controllers to perform real time functionality

and system monitoring.
• The software supports several treatment modules (treatment
modules are: IPL, Nd:Yag and ResurFX):
• Each treatment module operates separately and independently
from the other treatments modules (uses separate software
modules)
• Self-test and module operation is performed after selecting the
module.
• The software allows only one of the treatment modules to
operate at any given time.
Parameters Description
RS232 alarm and controls Permits control of amplifier by a RS232 port. All the
laser diode currents, temperatures, output power
are readable by this port.
Output power monitor 1 and 2 Permits the measure of output power (in a specified
range) with an accuracy of about ± 0.3 dB (over
wavelength and temperature). Two output power
monitors are used for redundancy
Automatic current control The electronic automatically adjusts the laser

(constant bias current) diodes to the programmed current.
Automatic power control (constant The electronic automatically adjusts the laser
bias power) diodes to have the desired output power.
Output power controlled by The electronic automatically adjusts the laser

external voltage diodes to have the output power proportional to the
external control voltage.
Laser temperature monitor Gives the internal temperature of the laser
Laser temperature alarm Sends an alarm if the laser if the laser internal
temperature is out of the diode’s operating range -
5°C/+65°C
Pump bias current alarm Sends an alarm if one or several laser diode
currents exceed 95% of end of life current.
Output power alarm Sends an alarm if the optical output power drops
below a set table threshold value
6-28
ResurFX Module
Nominal Output Power Range in% Sets the out of range threshold values for the output
power alarm. Default value is ± 10% and must
operate in Pulsed mode. Output power alarm is
activated if at least one of the two monitored output
signals gets out of this nominal output power range.
The set table range is ±10% or higher (e.g. ± 20%).
Red pilot diode current Allows adjustment of the red pilot diode current
from 0 mA to nominal current.
6.8.1 Graphic User Interface

• Screen size and resolution:8” -10”, 800X600 pixels (fixed)
• The software has a virtual keyboard screen to support entering
data.
• Login screen: has a virtual numeric keyboard for entering the
password without user name The system does not allow the
same password to be entered for two different users.
• Main screen: The main screen allows the user to select the
desired treatment module from a set of authorized modules.
• Idle screen: The Idle screen appears if no activity is detected for
more than half an hour.Touch the screen to release the Idle
screen and return to the Treatment screen.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-29

Figure 6-22 GUI Flow
• Authorization device (HASP): The HASP is used to enable the

software to display the authorized and unauthorized treatment
modules.
• The software saves user presets by clinical name (according to
clinical indication) or by name (the user writes a free text for
the saved preset):
• Each user has his own set of unlimited user presets per name.
Preference Screen
In this screen each user selects his preferences parameters. The
preferences contain:
• “Default clinical indication preset” is the default preset selection

(Lumenis presets or User presets)
• “Language preferences” - the user selects the GUI language.
Languages available: English (default), French, Spanish, German,
Italian, Chinese, Portuguese, Japanese
6-30
ResurFX Module
• “Sound preference” - select turn the sound on or off indicating a

fault or error has occurred.
The preferences factory default parameters are: Lumenis preset as

default, GUI language – English and sound- ON for fault or Error.
Treatment screen
• The software supports the following functionality: Select Treatment
parameters: The user selects the treatment parameters according to
the desired module. Each treatment module has its own treatment
parameters.
• Ready / Standby functionality: treatment screen includes Ready and
Standby buttons. In order to perform the actual lasing operation the
user must press on the Ready button.
• Any change in one of the treatment parameters will take the system
to Standby.
• Select application: The software has a select application screen from
the treatment screen. The list of applications depends on the
treatment module (different applications for IPL, Nd:YAG and
ResurFX).
• Tools option: the software has a Tools screen that has a set of
additional tools to operate the module (calibration, handpiece
information, module information etc.) open from treatment screen.
Treatment Parameters
• Scan shapes: square, rectangle, circle [up to 18mm diam], ring,
line, hexagon
• scan sizes: mm
• Density: Spot/cm2
Tip
• Tip size: 18 mm diameter
• Tip cooling operation: The system controls the tip temperature
in a range of +7°C to +13°C. If the tip temperature rises above
48°C, the system enters error mode.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-31

Tip Temperature:
The ResurFX module alerts the user when the tip temperature reaches
+48°C.
Handpiece ID / Tip ID
Each handpiece includes the Lumenis chip ID that identifies it.
The ID is read on system startup. When the system identifies the

handpiece the system enables operation of this module.
6.8.2 Calibration
No user calibration of the laser or scanner is needed. Calibration is
performed only by manufacture or service engineer.
Fiber laser - Energy output calibration: the fiber laser output energy is
not calibrated by Lumenis personnel. The output energy is only
measured and verified to be in acceptable tolerances (+-20%).
Scanner calibration: performed in production or by service using a

dedicated application. The parameters are saved in the ResurFX
handpiece chip ID.
When selecting the ResurFX module, a set of screens is opened to

operate the subsystem. Navigate between the screens using the tabs at
the top of the screen.
The GUI for the ResurFX screens uses the same basic GUI controls as
the other screens.
Set Auxiliary power:

This line is operational only in charger version 2.0 (in version 1.0 it is
always set ON). It sets the charger control loop (stabilizes the
capacitors voltage or the AUX voltage):
When setting the charger to “Charge” and the Aux IO is OFF the
charger stabilizes the voltage according to the capacitors voltage (
max 550V). The Aux voltage will be any voltage between 0-24V.
6-32
ResurFX Module
When setting the charger to “Charge” and the Aux IO is ON the

charger stabilizes the voltage to reach 24V in the auxiliary line. The
capacitors voltage will be any voltage between 0 -550 V
When setting the charger to “Dump”, regardless of the state of the Aux
IO, both voltages (Aux and Capacitors) will be 0.
Note
The AUX power status can be changed only when the system is in
“Dump” state.
Figure 6-23 Set Auxiliary Power
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-33

6.8.3 ResurFX Module Screens

Service Mode has a series of screen which are specific to the ResurFX
module. They are:
• Module Info
• Power Supply
• Cooling System
• External Indication
• Handpiece
• Scanner
• Fiber Laser
• RF Controller
• End User
• Diagnostic
ResurFX Module Service Screen- Diagnostic
Figure 6-24 ResurFX Service Screen - Diagnostic Tab
6-34
ResurFX Module
When entering the ResurFX Diagnostic screen, a self test appears and
executes.
The service engineer cannot move to any of the other tabs while the self
test is in process. The progress of the self test is indicated by a
progress bar, and a “Self Test Completed” checkbox appears when
completed.
In case of error during the self test, the error is displayed in the error log
below the progress bar and the service engineer will be able to navigate
to the other service tabs.
ResurFX Power Supply Screen

The Power Supply screen displays the ResurFX power supply’s various
voltages and M22 capacitors’ voltage.
Figure 6-25 ResurFX Service Screen - Power Supply Tab
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-35

# Component Component Controller Description

Name Type Name
1 Power Supply IO Out PS_ON_OFF_D Enables the module, the

power supply starts to
operate only when this
GPIO is High (AH)
2 24V Laser AD P24V Monitors the system 24

DC
3 +15V AD P15V_SCN Monitors the 15V entering

Scanner the scanner
4 -15V Scanner AD N15V_SCN Monitors the -15V

entering the scanner
5 5V Scanner AD 5V_SCN Monitors the -15V

entering the scanner
6 M22 Cap. AD M22 Cap AD Monitors M22 capacitor

Voltage voltage
ResurFX Cooling System Screen

The ResurFX Cooling service screen monitors the operation of the
ResurFX cooling system.
Figure 6-26 ResurFX Screen - Cooling System Screen
6-36
ResurFX Module

Name Type Name
1 12V pump AD P12V_PUMP Monitors the pump

voltage
2 Pump On/Off IO Out PUMP_ON_OF Operates the pump

F_D
3 Water AD COOL_TEMP(L Monitors the cooling water

M-35) temp.
4 Flow Switch IO in IN_5P/ Indication of cooling

FLOW_SWITC system flow
H
5 Controller AD Internal line Monitors the internal

Temp. temperature of the
ResurFX controller
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-37

ResurFX External Indication Screen

The External Indication screen operates and monitors the external
indicators provided from M22 console.
Figure 6-27 ResurFX Service Screen - External Indication Tab
# Component Name Component Controller Description

Type Name
1 Interlock status IO in M22 line M22 interlock in /

out status
2 Laser stop status IO in M22 line M22 laser stop

pressed /
released
3 Turn Laser Indication IO out M22 line Operate laser

Lamp lamp ON/OFF
4 Turn Buzzer IO out M22 line Operate M22

Buzzer ON /OFF
5 Blink Yellow LED IO out M22 line Operate laser

lamp in blink
mode
6-38
ResurFX Module
ResurFX Handpiece Screen

The Handpiece screen monitors and operates all functionalities of the
handpiece.
Figure 6-28 ResurFX Screen - Handpiece Screen

Name Type Name
1 Head IO in Head_EXST Indicates when the

connection handpiece is connected.
Ack
1 Source Select IO out TRG_SOURCE The two lines (source

1 _SEL_1 select 1,2), select which
input to use as trigger:
0-0 not selected

0-1 hand switch
1-0 foot switch
1-1 Optional for wireless
footswitch
In order to change the

trigger source use the
combo box
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-39

2 Source Select IO out TRG_SOURCE

2 _SEL_2
3 Trigger IO in IN_3P/ Reads value of trigger

Switch 1 TRG_SW_1 switch 1 (AH). The input
source selected by
trigger source select
4 Trigger IO in IN_6P/ Read value of trigger

Switch 2 TRG_SW_2 switch 2 (AL)
Tip AD TIP_TEMP(PT1 Monitors the handpiece

Temperature 00) tip temp.
Tip SW 1 IO in IN_7P/ Identifies tip 1 connected

TIP_SW_1 (AL)
Tip SW 2 IO in IN_10P/ Identifies tip 2 connected

TIP_SW_2 (AL)
Tip SW 3 IO in IN_8P/ Identify tip 3 connected

TIP_SW_3 (AL)
Tec On/Off IO out PTEC Sets the TEC voltage by

adjusting the PWM.
Adjust the TEC output
voltage between 0.5V-
8.3V. TEC is allowed to
be ON only when cooling
is operating
8V Tec SNS AD 8V_TEC_SNS Monitors the 8V DC of

the TEC
M
6-40
ResurFX Module
ResurFX Scanner Screen

The scanner screen monitors the functionality of the ResurFX scanner.
Figure 6-29 ResurFX Screen - Scanner Screen

Name Type Name
1 Shape Combo Box Selects the shape

Selection
2 Shape Size Edit Box Selects the shape size
3 Density Edit Box Selects the density
4 Set Button Sets the scan parameters

Parameters
5 Scanner Fail IO out IN_2P/ Indication from scanner of

SCN_FAIL failure
6 Number of Edit Box Holds the number of spots

spots in the selected scan
7 Spot time Edit Box The requested time of

lasing in each spot (in
microsec)
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-41

8 Scan time Edit Box Estimated time for the

total scan time (in
seconds)
9 Scan ! Button Performs a scan when

pressed
10 Laser IO out Sets the laser operation to

operation ON or OFF during the
scan, if the laser if OFF
when pressing the scan
button, the scan still
performs but without
actual energy.
11 Alignment Use this button to align

buttons the default position of the
scanner mirror.
12 Scale Up/Down Sets the X and Y scale of

the scanner
13 Scan pot Displays the scanner

params controller potentiometers’
parameters
14 Save Buttons Saves the alignment,

parameters scale and potentiometers
parameters to memory
device.
ResurFX Fiber Laser Screen

The Fiber laser screen monitors and operates the fiber laser.
6-42
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-30 ResurFX Screen - Fiber Laser Screen

Name Type Name
1 Power Control PWM FL_PWR_CTRL Set the fiber laser power

by adjusting the PWM (0-
4V is 0-15W)
2 CW Laser IO out FL_Lasing Sends command to

Operation operate the laser in CW,
the number of seconds
decided in the On Time
edit box.
3 Power AD FL_PWR_MON Monitors the fiber laser

Monitoring power
4 Power AD FL_PWR_MON Monitors the fiber laser

Monitoring 2 2 power 2nd Photodiode
5 Temperature AD FL_TEMP Monitors the fiber laser

temperature
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-43

6 Temperature IO in IN_2S_/ Set if the laser

Alarm FL_TEMP_ALR temperature exceeds the
M specified operational
temperature limits.
Low level: normal
operation. High level:
alarm activated
7 EOL Alarm IO in IN_1S/ Set if any internal pump

FL_PUMP_BIA laser is operating at
S_ALRM greater than or equal to
95% of its end of life
value.Low level: normal
operation. High level:
alarm activated
8 Power Alarm IO in IN_4S/ Receives from fiber laser

FL_POWER_A when the power is out of
LRM excepted tolerance (10%)
9 Fire On IO out IN-1P/ Receives feedback for the

Feedback LASER_FIRE_ laser Fire status. The
FEEDBACK controller uses it to
monitor the actual status
given to the scanner.
10 Fire Enable IO out FL_DISABLE_D Enables the fire on line.
11 Set calibration Button Open screen which saves

parameters the maximum aiming
beam current and the
power factor.
6-44
ResurFX Module
ResurFX Module MCU (Microcontroller) Screen

The MCU Screen monitors and operates the functionality of the
microcontroller.
Figure 6-31 ResurFX Service Screen - MCU Tab

Name Type Name
1 Pulse Width Edit Box Displays the pulse width of the

MCU monitors
2 Working Edit Box Displays the working mode of the

Mode MCU.
3 Ready/ Buttons Displays the status of the state of

Standby monitor mode (ready or standby)
4 Error Type Edit Box Holds the number of errors if

occurred. The error is identified by
the MCU when monitors the
ResurFX main controller (DSP).
5 Reset Error Button Clears the error
6 Error GPIO IO out GPIO Error
7 Comm Status IO out Communication button
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-45

8 Burn MCU Button Burns the MCU
ResurFX End User Screen

The End User Screen operates the ResurFX system as end user with all
end user functionality. The Service Engineer selects the desired scan
parameters, trigger source, tip cooling on or off and selects Ready to
perform a treatment.
An additional functionality is the spot time in µsec and number of spots

in a scan, which are not available to the user.
Figure 6-32 ResurFX Module Service Screen - End User Tab
6-46
ResurFX Module
ResurFX Module Information Screen

The Module Info screen displays: software version, DSP controller
version, RF controller, Scanner, and Fiber Laser.
Figure 6-33 ResurFX Module Service Screen - Module Info Tab
Component Description
Name
CRC number of the DSP code.

There are two numbers; one
received from the DSP; the other is
DSP CRC and the expected number saved in the
1
expected CRC GUI. The two numbers should
match. If they do not, a “CRC
mismatch” error appears in the
error box.
Displays the ResurFX software
2 Service SW
version
ResurFX DSP Displays the ResurFX controller
3
version (DSP) version
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-47

ResurFX Displays the ResurFX MCU

4
microcontroller version
ResurFX
Displays the ResurFX scanner
5 scanner
controller version
controller
ResurFX Fiber Displays the ResurFX Fiber Laser
6
Laser version version
6-48
ResurFX Module
6.9 ResurFX Software Installation
6.9.1 Introduction
The ResurFX module has three types of software:
• ResurFX Controller Software (DSP)

• MCU software
• Scanner Controller software
The ResurFX Controller software and the MCU software are used for
the MCU board. The scanner controller software is used for the
Scanner Controller board.
The MCU board is located above the Scanner Controller.
6.9.2 ResurFX Controller Software (DSP)

The software is shipped to the FSE on a CD-ROM, which should be
copied to a USB “Disk-on-Key”.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-49


Figure 6-35).
Figure 6-36).
37).
6-50
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-37 desktop Screen
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-51

touch the USB Disk icon, Software files appeared (see Figure 6-40)
6-52
ResurFX Module
The FlashWriter Screen appears (see Figure 6-42).
Figure 6-42 FlashWriter Screen
9. Select ResurFX and make sure that COM3 is selected, and Full
Erase, Erase, Program, and Verify checkboxes are selected.

PB-1042431 Rev D 6-53

Figure 6-43 My Devices Folder
11. Double-touch to select USBDisk; the Aquarius.OUT file appears (see

Figure 6-44).
6-54
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-44 Select Aquarius File
12. Double-touch the Aquarius.OUT file.

PB-1042431 Rev D 6-55

Figure 6-45 FlashWriter Progress Bar
14. When software installation is complete, the Verification Successful

message appears (see Figure 6-46).
15. Disconnect the USB Disk-On-Key.

ResurFX Controller Software Version Verification

2. In Service screen, select the Module Info tab and verify that the
ResurFX Controller software version is correct and matches the
software version burned.
6-56
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-47 ResurFX Series 000 Controller Version Verification
Note
The ResurFX series 001 has DSP controller SW V3.1.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-57

6.9.3 MCU Software Installation

copied to a USB “Disk-on-Key”.

Figure 6-49).
6-58
ResurFX Module
4. From the Utility screen, press Service; the Service screen appears
(see Figure 6-52).
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-59

Figure 6-51 Service Screen
5. In the Service screen, press the ResurFX tab.The ResurFX self test
runs (see Figure 6-52); wait until it completes the Self Test
successfully (see Figure 6-53).
6-60
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-52 ResurFX Service Screen
6. From the ResurFX service screen, press the MCU tab

(see Figure 6-53).
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-61

Figure 6-53 ResurFX Service Screen-MCU Tab
7. Insert the disk on key with the software into the USB port at the
back of the system.

Figure 6-54 MCU Tab - My Devices Folder
9. Double-touch to select USBDisk; the Receiver_Simple_Code file

6-62
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-55 USBDisk/Receiver_Simple_Code File
10. Double-click the Receiver_Simple-Code file and press Burn MCU.

The progress bar runs, and MCU software burning executes (see
Figure 6-56).
Figure 6-56 MCU Software Burning
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-63

11. When the MCU burning is complete, the message “Burning MCU
Success” appears in the progress status window (see Figure 6-57).
Figure 6-57 Burning MCU Success Message
12. Disconnect the disk on key from the USB port at the back of the
system.
6-64
ResurFX Module
MCU Software Burning Verification

2. In the Service screen, select the Module Info tab and verify that the
MCU software version is correct and matches the software version
burned.
Figure 6-58 MCU Software Burning Verification
6.9.4 Scanner Controller Software Installation

1. Open the ResurFX Top Cover (see Removing the ResurFX Module
as a Unit on page 6-80).
Note
Some scanner controller modules have an opening at the front side
of the assembly in order to access the dipswitches. In this case,
there is no need to open the top cover of the scanner controller
module.
2. Open the scanner controller cover by removing the 5 Allen screws.

3. Locate the 2 dipswitches on the bottom left side of the scanner
controller board (see Figure 6-59).
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-65

Figure 6-59 Moving Scanner Controller Dipswitches Up
4. Push both dipswitches into the UP position.

5. Close the scanner controller cover without using the screws (the
dipswitches need to be returned to their original position at the end
of the procedure).
6-66
ResurFX Module
6. Disconnect the J2 plug from the MCU.
Figure 6-60 Disconnect J2 from MCU
7. Connect the communication cable tool in its place:

a. Connect the male side of the communication cable tool to J2.
Figure 6-61 Connecting COmmunication Cable [1]
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-67

b. Connect the female side of the communication cable tool to

the MCU.
Figure 6-62 Connecting COmmunication Cable [2]
8. Connect the ResurFX to the PC unit using the extension cable.
Figure 6-63 ResurFX Connected to PC
6-68
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-65).
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-69

12. From the Utility screen, press Service; the Service screen appears
(see Figure 6-67).
6-70
ResurFX Module
13. In the Service screen, press the ResurFX tab. The ResurFX service
screen runs a self test (see Figure 6-68) and stops with a scanner
error (this is normal, due to the communication cable tool
connection; ignore the error).
Figure 6-68 ResurFX Service Screen
14. Insert the disk on key with the software into the USB port at the
back of the system.
15. Navigate to the Power Supply screen and press ResurFX Power
Supply ON (see Figure 6-69).
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-71

Figure 6-69 ResurFX Power Supply ON
16. From the ResurFX service screen, press the Module Info tab
(see Figure 6-70).
Figure 6-70 ResurFX Service Screen-Module Info Tab
6-72
ResurFX Module
17. From the Module Info screen, press Run; the Flashwriter icon
appears.
Figure 6-71 Run FlashWriter
18. Double-click the FlashWriter icon; the FlashWriter screen appears.
Figure 6-72 FlashWriter Screen
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-73

19. Select Scanner (2808); make sure that COM3 is selected, and Full
Erase, Erase, Program, and Verify checkboxes are selected.
Figure 6-73 Select Scanner in FlashWriter

6-74
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-74 USBDisk Folder
21. Double-touch to select USBDisk; the ScannerEmbedded file

Figure 6-75 USBDisk/ScannerEmbedded File
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-75

22. Double-click the ScannerEmbedded.OUT file and press Start. The

progress bar runs, and scanner software burning executes (see
Figure 6-56).
Figure 6-76 Burning Scanner Software
23. When the scanner software burning is complete, the message

“Verification Successful” appears in the progress status window
(see Figure 6-57).
6-76
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-77 Burning Success Message
24. Disconnect the disk on key from the USB port at the back of the
system.
26. Disconnect the communication cable tool, reconnect ResurFX
harness J2 back to the MCU.
27. Push the 2 dipswitches back to the DOWN position (see Figure 6-
78).
Figure 6-78 Push Dipswitches Down
28. Tighten the 5 Allen screws back to the scanner controller cover.
29. Reinstall the PC unit back onto the system.
30. Close all covers.
Software Burning Verification

2. In Service screen, select the Module Info tab and verify that the
scanner controller revision is correct and matches the software
version burned.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-77

Figure 6-79 Software Burning Verification
6-78
ResurFX Module
6.10 ResurFX Parts Replacement
6.10.1 General
This section describes the replacement procedures for the M22 system ResurFX
module components.
WARNING
Before performing any replacement of modules or parts,
turn off the system and disconnect it from the main power,
unless the procedure to be followed indicates otherwise.
6.10.2 Covers Removal

The ResurFX module is protected by the following covers (see Figure
6-80):
• Top cover
• Front cover
• Left and right side covers
• Rear cover
• Bottom Cover, on which the ResurFX is mounted.
Figure 6-80 ResurFX Covers Layout
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-79

It may be necessary to remove one or more of these covers in order to

gain access to the internal components of the ResurFX module.
6.10.3 Removing the ResurFX Module as a Unit

1. Remove the PC Unit as described in PC Unit Assembly
Replacement on page 10-8.
2. Unlock the metal latches on the top of the back cover.
Figure 6-81 Rear View, Metal Latches
3. Pull the front locking latch all the way out.

4. Lift the ResurFX module up and out of its position.
Caution
The ResurFX module is very heavy. Lift it carefully.
6-80
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-82 Removing ResurFX Module from Unit
ResurFX Module Left/Right Side Covers Removal

This procedure describes the removal of either the right or the left side
panel of the ResurFX module.
1. Remove the ResurFX module from the unit (see Removing the
ResurFX Module as a Unit on page 6-80).
2. Remove the 2 Allen screws on the side of the cover (see Figure 6-
83.
Figure 6-83 Removing Screws from Side Cover
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-81

3. Remove the 2 Allen screws connecting the side cover at the back of
the module (see Figure 6-84).
Figure 6-84 Removing Back Screws of Side Covers
4. Remove the side cover by gently lifting it off its pins (see Figure 6-
85).
Figure 6-85 Removing Side Cover
6-82
ResurFX Module
Back Cover Removal
Note
If you need to replace the metal frame of the back cover, see
Removing the Back Cover Metal Frame on page 6-84.
1. Unplug the system from the main wall power.

2. Release the upper and lower metal latches.
3. Remove the ResurFX back cover - 4 Allen screws.
Figure 6-86 Removing ResurFX Module Back Cover
4. Remove the back cover.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-83

Removing the Back Cover Metal Frame

The ResurFX back cover comes with a metal bracket, 2 metal latches,
and the fiber storage port.
The metal bracket holds the metal latches and the fiber storage port.To
replace any of these parts, do the following.

2. Remove the Metal Bracket:
a. Remove 10 Allen screws holding the metal frame to the back
cover.
b. Remove the metal frame.
Figure 6-87 Remove Metal Frame From Back Cover
Front Cover Removal

1. Remove the Top Cover of the ResurFX as described in section Top

Cover Removal on page 6-86.
6-84
ResurFX Module
2. Remove the side covers of the ResurFX module as described in

section ResurFX Module Left/Right Side Covers Removal on
page 6-81.
3. Refer to Figure 6-88: From the front of the unit, slide the small
slider panel upward and remove it.
4. From the front of the unit, remove the 4 Allen screws holding the
front panel.
5. Remove the front cover.
Figure 6-88 Front Cover Removal
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-85

Top Cover Removal

1. Remove the ResurFX Module from the unit (see Removing the
ResurFX Module as a Unit on page 6-80).
2. Release 4 Allen screws and then remove the top cover of the
ResurFX module (see Figure 6-89).
Figure 6-89 Top Cover Removal
Bottom Cover Removal

1. Drain the water tank from the ResurFX module:
a. Connect the water drain/refill tool. Make sure it is connected
with the open air hole on the left side.
b. Lower the tube so that the open end of the tube is lower than
the drain port, and using a bucket to catch the liquid, drain the
water from the module.
2. Remove the ResurFX module as a unit (see Removing the ResurFX
Module as a Unit on page 6-80).
3. Turn the ResurFX module upside down and lay it on a flat surface.
4. Remove the 8 Allen screws holding the cover in place (see Figure
6-90).
6-86
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-90 Bottom Cover Removal
6.10.4 ResurFX Handpiece Replacement

1. Open the handpiece: Remove the 2 screws holding the back cover
of the handpiece (see Figure 6-91.)
Figure 6-91 Remove Handpiece Cover
2. Remove the cover and unscrew the fiber nut, pull out and remove
the fiber out of its socket (see Figure 6-92).
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-87

Figure 6-92 Fiber Nut
3. Open the zipper of the umbilical sleeve all the way until the end on
the connector side. The fiber laser is exposed (see Figure 6-93).
Figure 6-93 Unzipping Umbilical Sleeve
4. Remove the handpiece connector by turning counter-clockwise (see

Figure 6-94).
6-88
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-94 Removing Handpiece Connector
5. After installing the new handpiece, perform ResurFX Energy Test

and Scan Shape Density Test on page 3-117.
6. Verify that the new handpiece parameters are loaded in the “Pot
parameters” section of the scanner screen (see Figure 6-95).
Figure 6-95 Scanner Screen - POT Parameters
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-89

7. Set shape size Hexagon, 18 mm and verify that the scanning beam
shape is coaxial; use the UP/DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT buttons to
adjust if needed (see Figure 6-96 and Figure 6-97). When aligned,
press Save Params to save the parameters.
Figure 6-96 Scanner Shape Coaxial Adjustment
Figure 6-97 Coaxial Adjustment Example (UP/DOWN Correction)
6-90
ResurFX Module
6.10.5 Power Supply Replacement

1. Turn off the system disconnect the unit from the mains wall power.
2. Remove connectors J4, J10 from the power supply (Figure 6-98).
Figure 6-98 Power Supply Connections
3. Remove the 4 Allen screws holding the power supply to the chassis
(see Figure 6-99), and then remove the power supply.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-91

Figure 6-99 Screws Holding the Power Supply
6.10.6 Fiber Laser Replacement
Caution
Do not disconnect the fiber from the fiber laser module.
Remove the fiber module with the fiber attached.
1. Remove the large plug connected to the fiber laser module (2 flat
screws - see Figure 6-100).
Figure 6-100 Remove Plug
2. Slide the small slider panel upward and remove it (see Figure 6-
101).
6-92
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-101 Removing Slider Panel
3. Remove the front cover (see Front Cover Removal on page 6-84.)
4. Push the fiber up through the small hole where the small sliding
panel was, until it is completely free from the chassis.
Note
The fiber is flexible; do not bend the fiber so as not to break it.
Handle it with care.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-93

Figure 6-102 Pushing Fiber through Small Hole
5. Remove 5 screws holding the fiber laser in its position: 3 Allen

screws on the back track, 2 Allen screws on the front track (see
Figure 6-103).
6-94
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-103 Remove Screws from Tracks - Top View
6. Remove the fiber laser module with the fiber still attached.
6.10.7 MCU Replacement

1. Remove the following harnesses: P1, J2, J5, J7, J4, J1, J9, J8.
See Figure 6-104.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-95

Figure 6-104 MCU Connections
2. Remove the ground wires.

3. Remove the 4 Allen screws holding the MCU module to the
scanner controller (see Figure 6-105).
Figure 6-105 Removing Screws from MCU
6-96
ResurFX Module
6.10.8 Scanner Controller Replacement

1. Remove the MCU board by removing the 4 Allen screws only.
2. Remove the 3 front plugs of the scanner controller.
Figure 6-106 Scanner Controller Connections
3. Remove the 4 screws holding the scanner controller to the ResurFX

chassis.
Note
Remove the ground harness screws and remember to reattach them
after replacing.
6.10.9 Handpiece Connector Replacement

1. Drain the water from the water tank. (see Filling the Water Tank on
the ResurFX Module on page 3-106).
2. Remove the front cover.
3. Remove the 4 Allen screws of the handpiece connector (see Figure
6-107).
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-97

Figure 6-107 Screws of Handpiece Connector
4. Remove the 4 Allen screws of the handpiece connector plate in

order to gain access to the water tubes and ground connections and
harnesses (see Figure 6-108).
Figure 6-108 Handpiece Connector Plate
5. Remove the tube from the pump side, and remove one tube from
the bottom side of the flow switch (see Figure 6-109).
6-98
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-109 Tubing
Note
The tube is routed internally to the flow switch on the side of the
chassis; use this same route when reattaching the new tube.
6. Remove the ground wire.

7. Remove the harness going to J6 on the MCU, and its ground
connection.
Note
Do not forget to reattach the ground connection after replacing.
8. Remove the locking latch.

9. Remove the handpiece connector.
6.10.10 Flow Switch Replacement

1. Remove the top cover.

2. The flow switch is attached to the chassis with a tie wrap. Cut the
tie wrap.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-99

Top
quick-connect
Bottom
quick-connect
2-pin harnesses
Figure 6-110 Flow Switch Removal
3. Disconnect the 2 quick connectors (top and bottom fittings).

4. Disconnect the electrical connections (2-pin harnesses).
5. Remove the flow switch.
6.10.11 Radiator Replacement

1. Remove the thermal sensor harness from the chassis.
2. Remove the 2 side fittings, right and left (see Figure 6-111).
Note
The fan is attached to the radiator with 4 screws and 1 harness going
to the chassis.
6-100
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-111 Tubing Connections to Radiator
3. Remove the 4 screws holding the radiator to the chassis.

4. Remove the radiator.
Fan Replacement
1. Remove the radiator.
2. Remove the harness connection.
3. Remove the 4 screws holding the fan to the radiator.
6.10.12 Water Tank Replacement

1. Drain the water from the water tank.
3. Remove the harness connected to the illumination LEDs (see
Figure 6-112).
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-101

Figure 6-112 Harness to Illumination LED
4. From the back of the system, remove the 2 screws of the bracket
holding the water tank in place.
Note
The bracket is made of soft material to protect the tank from
scratches and vibration; do not remove the foam from its location.
5. Remove the tubes connection from the top of the water tank and
remove the water tank.
6-102
ResurFX Module
6.10.13 Water Line Filter Replacement

1. Cut the tie wrap holding the line filter to the chassis.
2. Remove the 2 tubes connected to the quick-connectors (top and
bottom).
3. Remove the water line filter.
Line
Filter
Figure 6-113 Line Filter Replacement
6.10.14 Pump Replacement

1. Drain the water from the water tank.
Note
When disconnecting the pump, a small amount of water may drip;
use paper towels to absorb the water.
2. Remove the harness connecting the pump to the system chassis.

3. Remove the 4 screws holding the pump to the chassis (see Figure
6-114).
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-103

Figure 6-114 Pump Replacement
6.10.15 Locking Latch Replacement

1. Open the top cover.
2. Remove the 2 screws holding the locking latch ( Figure 6-115).
Figure 6-115 Locking Latch Replacement
Note
When installing a new locking latch, you may need to adjust its
position in order to have smoother locking of the ResurFX module.
If needed, adjust the height level of the ResurFX Assembly by
turning the height adjustment pin on the inside of the assembly.
Unscrew the small locking screw and turn the pin clock-wise to lower
6-104
ResurFX Module
the assembly; turn the pin counter-clockwise to raise the assembly.

Turn the pin in half-turn increments until the correct height is
achieved. Then tighten the small locking screw. See Figure 10-9.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-105

6.11 Troubleshooting ResurFX Module
6.11.1 Handpiece Errors
Error Internal Name Fault Description Corrective Action/Parts Affected

#
254 Head ID Mismatch Head ID is different than • Verify proper closure of ResurFX
the connected umbilical connector to module
handpiece.
• Replace ResurFX handpiece
• Replace M22 interface
2060 ResurFX head Handpiece is • Verify proper closure of ResurFX
disconnected disconnected when umbilical connector to module
entering treatment
screen
2061 Trigger switches Both switches are high or • Verify proper closure of ResurFX
error both low umbilical connector to module
• Replace ResurFX Main controller
2062 Controller Error Mismatch requested • Replace ResurFX main controller
source select and return
IO’s
2063 Tip overheated Tip Temperature above • Take out the tip.
maximum allowed range
• Remove the machine and
handpiece from warm location
• Replace ResurFX main controller
2068 TEC Min. voltage The TEC is above the • Replace ResurFX handpiece
error minimum voltage for off
state (1V)
• Replace ResurFX LVPS
2069 TEC Max. voltage The TEC is out of voltage • Replace ResurFX handpiece
error range for max ON state
(8.6V±10%)
2070 Controller error Mismatch duty cycle • Replace ResurFX main controller
command and response
6-106
ResurFX Module
6.11.2 Cooling System Errors
Error Internal Name Fault Description Corrective Action/Parts

# Affected
2064 Cooling system error Flow switch off while • Verify good closure of
pump is on (starts ResurFX umbilical connector
after 0.5 sec) to module
• Verify water filling in
ResurFX tank
• Replace ResurFX flow switch
• Replace ResurFX water filter
• Replace ResurFX water
pump
• Replace ResurFX main
controller
2065 Cooling system low LM35 (first test is • Verify presence of machine
temperature error before operating the and handpiece at room
cooling system) temperature for at least two
hours
• LM35 on cooling system
heatsink
• Replace ResurFX controller
2066 Cooling system high LM35 • Verify presence of machine
temperature error and handpiece at room
temperature for at least two
hours
• LM35 on cooling system
heatsink
2067 Controller Error Mismatch IO and • Replace ResurFX main
command controller
2071 Pump min. voltage Pump voltage above • Replace ResurFX pump
error 0.5V in OFF state
controller
2072 Pump max voltage Pump is out of • Replace ResurFX pump
error voltage range for ON
state (20V ± 10%)
controller
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-107

2087 Flow switch error The flow switch stays • Replace ResurFX flow switch
ON when the pump
• Replace ResurFX water
is OFF.
pump
2094 Cooling On error Test the TEC cooling: • Replace ResurFX handpiece
test drop of 2 deg. or
10 deg. on PT100. If
controller
not achieved in this
test in 30 sec, this • Replace ResurFX LVPS
error appears.
6.11.3 Fiber Laser Errors

# Affected
2073 Fiber Laser Internal thermistor • Replace ResurFX
overheated fiber laser
• Replace ResurFX
main controller
2074 Fiber laser power Start 300ms after start pulse; • Replace ResurFX
error when the average of last 8 fiber laser
pulses is out of range in more
• Replace ResurFX
than 20%, or the last pulse
main controller
energy is out of range more
than 50% • Replace ResurFX
LVPS
2075 Fiber laser power During pulses only (300 • Replace ResurFX
error microsec after start pulse); fiber laser
difference between 2
• Replace ResurFX
photodiode more than 10%
main controller
• Replace ResurFX
LVPS
2077 Fiber laser Fiber laser temp alarm • Replace ResurFX
overheated indicator raise fiber laser
• Replace ResurFX
main controller
2078 Fiber laser error Fiber laser pump bias alarm • Replace ResurFX
indicator raise fiber laser
• Replace ResurFX
main controller
2079 Fiber laser error Fiber laser power alarm • Replace ResurFX
indicator raise fiber laser
• Replace ResurFX
main controller
6-108
ResurFX Module
2080 Controller error Fire on GPIO mismatch to • Replace ResurFX

command fiber laser
• Replace M22
interface
2081 Controller error Disable IO mismatch to • Replace ResurFX
command main controller
• Replace M22
interface
2092 Fiber laser error Multiple IO errors in fiber laser • Replace ResurFX
main controller
• Replace ResurFX
fiber laser
6.11.4 RF Controller Errors

# Affected
2082 Controller error RF monitors that the pulse • Replace ResurFX
width is longer than requested main controller
(more than 100-200µs)
• Replace ResurFX
fiber laser
2083 Controller error RF monitor that the pulse • Replace ResurFX
given in standby main controller
2084 Controller error RF monitor that the pulse • Replace ResurFX

given when no trigger is main controller
pressed (more than 100-
200µs)
2090 Controller error RF monitor that the received • Replace ResurFX
pulse parameters are out of main controller
range
• Replace ResurFX
fiber laser
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-109

6.11.5 Scanner Errors

# Affected
2093 Scanner error Timeout • Replace ResurFX
scanner controller
• Replace ResurFX
main controller
• Replace ResurFX
handpiece
6.11.6 Communications Errors

# Affected
2051 ResurFX M22 CAN_BUS error • Replace ResurFX
communication error main controller
• Replace M22
interface
2054 ResurFX scanner CAN_BUS error • Replace ResurFX
communication error scanner controller
• Replace ResurFX
main controller
• Replace ResurFX
handpiece
2055 ResurFX fiber laser RS-232 error • Replace ResurFX

communication error fiber laser
• Replace ResurFX
main controller
2085 Controller error SPI error • Replace ResurFX
main controller
• Replace M22
interface
6-110
ResurFX Module
6.11.7 Power Supply Errors

# Affected
2056 Fiber laser 24V Range in allowed tolerance of • Replace ResurFX LVPS
error ±10% • Replace ResurFX main
controller
• Replace ResurFX Fiber
Laser
2057 Scanner 15V error Range in allowed tolerance of • Replace ResurFX LVPS
±10% • Replace ResurFX main
controller
• Replace ResurFX scan-
ner controller
2058 Scanner -15V error Range in allowed tolerance of • Replace ResurFX LVPS
controller
• Replace ResurFX scan-
ner controller
2059 Controller 5V error Range in allowed tolerance of • Replace ResurFX LVPS
controller
2086 Controller error Power ON IO mismatch to • Replace ResurFX main

command controller
6.11.8 Warnings

# Affected
--- Tip Temp. is above Special message with option • Cool the ResurFX
50°C/122°F. Please of ignore (as in IPL) tip at room
wait several minutes temperature
for the tip to cool.
2088 Please release the Trigger is not released when • Release the trigger
trigger before entering READY. of ResurFX
selecting READY. handpiece
2089 Please check that Trigger is not released when • Release the
the footswitch is not entering to READY ResurFX footswitch
pressed before (footswitch)
selecting READY.
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-111

6.12 Spare Parts for ResurFX
6.12.1 Covers and External Components
1 2
3 5
4
8
7
Figure 6-116 ResurFX Covers
6-112
ResurFX Module
Figure 6-117 illustrates the locations of the various covers for the
ResurFX module.
Figure 6-117 ResurFX Module Covers
Item Description Part Number

1 ResurFX Top Cover (M22 base top cover) SP-1047360
2 ResurFX Bottom Cover SPMI-1120600
3 ResurFX Left Side Cover SPMM-
1132990
4 ResurFX Right Side Cover SPMM-
1133000
5 Latch Cover SP-1047470
6 ResurFX Back Cover SPSA-1120620
7 ResurFX Front Cover SPMM-
1133010
8 Slider Cover SPMM-
1133030
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-113

6.12.2 ResurFX Handpiece Components
2 3
Figure 6-118 ResurFX Handpiece Components

1 ResurFX Handpiece SPSA-1146410
2 ResurFX Handpiece cover SPMM-
1145001
3 SapphireCool Tip for ResurFX KT-10000965
6-114
ResurFX Module
6.12.3 ResurFX Electrical Modules
3
4
Figure 6-119 ResurFX Electrical Modules

1 ResurFX Fiber Laser module SPSA-1121310
2 LVPSA (Low Voltage Power Supply Assembly) SPEA-1107690
3 Scanner Controller SPSA-1121060
4 Controller Board (DSP controller + MCU) SPEA-1107980
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-115

6.12.4 ResurFX Electrical Harnesses
1 2
3 4
5
6
10
11
9
Figure 6-120 ResurFX Electrical Harnesses
6-116
ResurFX Module

1 ResurFX main harness (52-pin) SPHS-1117900
2 ResurFX Handpiece Machine Connector SPSA-1121170
3 ResurFX Thermal Sensor Harness SPHS-10005250
4 ResurFX Controller Power Harness SPHS-1117910
5 ResurFX Cooling System Harness SPHS-1117920
6 ResurFX Fiber Laser Harness SPHS-1117930
7 ResurFX Scanner Power Harness SPHS-1117940
8 Scanner Harness SPHS-1117950
9 Emergency Switch Harness HS-1018570
10 Footswitch Internal Harness SPHS-1117960
11 Scanner Controller Burn Harness SPHS-10000330
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-117

6.12.5 ResurFX Cooling System Components
3
2
6
5
9
10
Figure 6-121 ResurFX Cooling System Components
6-118
ResurFX Module

1 Cooling Unit (Radiator and Fan) SPSA-1117110
2 ResurFX Flow Switch SPSA-1118000
3 Water Line Filter SPSA-1121440
4 Water tank LEDs Assy SPEA-1136530
5 ResurFX Coolant Reservoir (excluding fittings) SPSA-1113810
6 Water tank holder assy SPSA-1127870
7 ResurFX Pump Assy SPSA-1121190
8 Pump anti- vibration bumpers (x4) SPEL0000516
9 Straight quick connection fitting 6mm OD HA7288003
10 Radiator tube fitting, mini type (x2) SPMP-
1001608
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-119

6.12.6 Miscellaneous
4
2
5
6
Figure 6-122 ResurFX Miscellaneous
6-120
ResurFX Module

1 ResurFX Footswitch SPSA-1138520
2 52-pin connector mounting screw (x2) SPHA0000619
3 Upper locking part SP-1047490
4 Locking Bracket Assembly SP-1047460
5 Steel Spring Latch SPHA0000616
6 ResurFX Safety Glasses (physician) AX0000130
NS Patient Safety Goggles AX-1000269
NS Grommet GEE62F-A-C HA0002050
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-121

6.12.7 ResurFX Service Tools
1 2 3
4 5
Figure 6-123 ResurFX Service Tools

1 Laser footprint paper 3207-0091
2 OPHIR Power Meter Detector MD1675900
3 OPHIR External Power Meter Display Unit TA0021010
4 Water Refilling/Drain Tool SA6794000
5 52-pin extension harness assembly TA-1047220
6 ResurFX Hollow Tip Tool D18mm TAMM-1140580
6-122
ResurFX Module
PB-1042431 Rev D 6-123

6-124
Q-Switched Nd:YAG Laser Handpiece
C H A P T E R
Q-SWITCHED ND:YAG LASER

HANDPIECE
7.1 Introduction
The optional Q-Switched Nd:YAG laser handpiece is indicated for use
for the removal of dark tattoos and treatment of pigmented lesions.
The Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece operates with six different

treatment tips (2.0, 2.5, 3.5, 5.0 & 6 mm) and one lens assembly.
7.2 Functional Description

The main function of the QS Nd:YAG laser treatment head is to
generate the actual treatment Q-Switched laser pulse.
A Q-Switched Nd:YAG laser treatment head incorporates the

following:
• Laser cavity – A highly reflective optical cavity of special

geometry in which the laser is generated.
• Laser medium – Yttrium Aluminum Garnet crystal, doped with
Nd3+ (Neodymium) impurities (Nd:YAG).
• Q-Switch – Chromium:YAG crystal with a 100% reflective
coating on the rear side.
• Flash lamp – Acts as the pumping source for generating the
laser.
• Safety button – Enables a 15 second window for pressing the
trigger (opening the shutter). Each press of the trigger opens a
PB-1042431 Rev D 7-1

new 15 second window. Continuous operation negates the use

of the safety button.
• Front shutter – Blocks laser emission of the laser beam when it
is shut. Once opened, upon pressing the trigger the laser is
emitted.
• Trigger button – Triggers the laser pulse.
• Focusing lens– Focuses the laser beam to the treatment area.
• Head ID chip – Stores the head information.
• Head umbilical – The cord (between the head and the
connector) contains:
• Cold water tube, carrying the water from the cooling
system to the head.
• Warm water tube, carrying the water from the head to the
cooling system.
• Electrical wires, carrying control signals and power.
• Head connector – Connects the head (umbilical) to the
system.
Figure 7-1 Q-Switched Treatment Head Internal Parts
7-2
A schematic illustration of the treatment head connections is shown in

Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece
7.2.1 Beam Homogenizer

The beam homogenizer smooths out the irregularities in a laser beam
profile and creates a more uniform one.
PB-1042431 Rev D 7-3

7.2.2 Treatment Tip

The Q-Switched Nd:YAG lens assembly is comprised of a sapphire
lens in a metallic housing. The treatment tip that are that is connected to
it determines the spot size (2.0, 2.5, 3.5, 5.0 & 6.0 mm). The following
table indicates the spot size and corresponding fluence range.
Spot Size Fluence Range

[mm] [J/cm2]
2.0 2 - 14
2.5 2.5 - 9
3.5 3.5 - 4.6
5.0 5 - 2.25
6.0 6 - 1.6
7.2.3 Lasing Control
Emergency Stop Button

emergency situations. The button actuator is a large, red mushroom-
shaped knob that is operated by pressing in. To release the switch to its
normal position, rotate the knob (direction is marked on the knob's
face).
The laser shutoff knob disables light output from the handpiece the
moment it is pressed. To release the laser shutoff knob, turn it
in an error state.
Note
The emergency stop button should be activated only in case of an
emergency.
7.2.4 Lens Assembly and Treatment Tips

Remove the lens assembly's protective cap before inserting the lens
assembly into the Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece.
7-4
Figure 7-3 Q-Switched Lens Assembly and Protective Cap
It is very important to keep the lens assembly clean at all times. The
lens assembly should be cleaned after each patient.
To clean the lens assembly, first wipe it with a dry cloth. Then clean it
with a cloth moistened with ethyl alcohol or isopropyl alcohol. Wipe it
with a lint-free cloth until it is thoroughly dry.
Press the spring button on the bottom side of the handpiece to eject the
lens assembly.
The Q-Switched Nd:YAG treatment tips can be changed routinely

Caution
Keep your hand underneath the lens assembly when pressing
the spring button to prevent it from falling to the floor.
Do not press the lens assembly ejection button when changing

or removing the treatment tip.
PB-1042431 Rev D 7-5

Figure 7-4 Q-Switched Lens Assembly and Treatment Tip
7.2.5 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece Calibration

Calibration of the Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece is necessary to
user and can also be required by the system. When beginning
treatment, the system checks if the handpiece requires calibration and
will instruct the user to perform calibration.

Caution
The energy output of a handpiece decreases over time. Thus,
if calibration is performed after a long time interval, the energy
7-6

automatically initiate calibration in the form of a pop-up warning
message:

• Whenever 50,000 pulses have been emitted from the module
without performing calibration.
1. Connect the Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece's calibration device

(see Figure 7-5) to the system's service panel (see arrow #4 in
Figure 7-5).
2. Remove the lens assembly from the handpiece and mount the
handpiece on the calibration device as shown in Figure 7-5.
3. Press the Calibrate button on the pop-up window and carefully
follow the on-screen instructions to complete the calibration
process.
Note
Press and hold the handpiece's trigger until all calibration pulses are
complete. Releasing the trigger too early can result in erroneous
calibration results.
Any intermediate calibration procedures (before reaching 50,000

pulses) is not prejudicial to the handpiece and may actually be
considered if the handpiece has not been used for a long period.
Figure 7-5 Mount Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece on the Calibra-

tion Device
PB-1042431 Rev D 7-7

7.2.6 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Factor Calibration Using

the Service Screen
Q-Switched Nd:YAG Factor calibration is performed automatically via
the user screen during installation using the Q-switched Nd:YAG
calibration device tool. However, if the performance of the calibration
device tool needs to be checked by authorized service personnel,
perform this test manually via the service screen.
1. Connect the Q-Switched Nd:YAG calibration tool to the system.
Figure 7-6 Connect Q-Switched Calibration Tool to System
2. Access the Service screen (see Figure 7-7).
7-8
3. From the Service Screen, select the Head tab. Verify that the Q-
Switched Nd:YAG handpiece was selected (see Figure 7-8).
Figure 7-8 Service Screen, Head Tab
4. Select the End User Screen tab; verify that the instructional
message in the status window appears at the bottom of the screen
(see Figure 7-9).
PB-1042431 Rev D 7-9

5. Select the following parameters (if they do not appear):

• Frequency: 4 Hz
• Current (Amp): 650
]
Figure 7-9 End User Screen Tab - Start QS Calibration Timing
6. See Figure 7-11: Press Calibrate QS Timing; the system goes to

Ready.
7. Enable the handpiece by pressing the handpiece’s safety button.

8. Fire into the calibration tool continuously while observing the
results window at the bottom of the screen for the calibration
results.
7-10
Figure 7-10 Firing into the Calibration Device Tool
9. Observe the messages that appear in the status window at the

bottom of the screen; for example:
• The message “300 jumped” (see Figure 7-11) indicates that the
system has found the T1 value (Pulse Width = 300 μs).
• After further continuous firing, the message “Pulse 420”
appears in the status window (see Figure 7-12). This indicates
that the system has found the T2 value (Pulse Threshold = 420
μs).
PB-1042431 Rev D 7-11

Figure 7-11 Finding T1 (Pulse Width 300 μs)
Figure 7-12 Finding T2 (420 μs) and Final Average Timing (360)
7-12
Note
Example for calculating QS Nd:YAG factor:
The system first finds T1 (300 μs) then findsT2 (420 μs).
The final results are calculated as follows:
(T2-T1)/2 + T1 (300μs). This factor 360μs is saved by the system
after pressing Save Factor.
10. Press Save Factor to save the values.
Save Factor Verification

1. Go to the Head Data tab.
2. Verify that the correct Factor value was saved (see Figure 7-13).
Figure 7-13 Save Factor Value Verification
PB-1042431 Rev D 7-13

7.2.7 Q-Switched Nd:YAG Energy Test Using External

Power Meter (for Troubleshooting Only)
Note
IMPORTANT: The service personnel should only use the calibration
device tool for system testing; see Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece
Calibration on page 7-6. However, when troubleshooting is needed,
the procedure below can be followed using the external power meter
with the parameters in Table 7-1.Performing this test often can
reduce the life time of the power meter type FL-250.
This procedure is performed in order to check the performance of the

calibration device tool to read the correct energy.
Setting up the Ophir Power Meter

1. Set up the Ophir power meter as follows:
Figure 7-14).

set to Watts (W).
f. Press the red circular Menu button twice.
7-14
g. Press the MORE (right triangular) button.

h. Choose the AVERAGE position (left triangular) button.
j. Press the red circular Menu button once.
k. Choose the lowest power value (3/30W); this will ensure that
the OPHIR will be able to read the power value (middle
triangular button).
l. Press the EXIT button to confirm;
m. Using the middle triangular button, select from the menu the
TYPE=CONTINUOUS.
n. Press the GO button to confirm.
o. Press the EXIT button.
p. The power meter is now ready for measuring the Q-Switched
Nd:YAG handpiece.
2. Attach the Q-Switched Nd:YAG hollow tool tip to the handpiece to
simulate treatment tip.
Figure 7-15 Connect Hollow Tool to QS Handpiece
3. Select the following parameters (if they do not appear):

• Frequency: 4 Hz
• Current (Amp): 650
PB-1042431 Rev D 7-15

Figure 7-16 End User Screen Tab - Start QS Calibration Timing
4. Fire continuously into the external power meter for 10 seconds and
observe the reading.
Figure 7-17 Energy Check - Firing into Power Meter
5. Calculate the value according to the table below:

FL-250 PM Reading Value x 1.12
7-16
6. Record the result in the table below.
Table 7-1. Energy Test Results Table - Q-Switched Nd:YAG

(for troubleshooting only)
Tool Pulse Parameters from Measured Energy on External Power Meter

Service Screen
Q- Continuous firing for 10 sec Acceptable Range

Switched calculation*: [W]
Hollow
4Hz 650 Amp
Service
Tool
1.4 - 2.08
*Fire continuously for 10 seconds into the FL-250 power meter; calculate the
reading using the formula: PM Reading value x 1.12. Record the result in the
table.
PB-1042431 Rev D 7-17

7.3 Spare Parts for Q-Switched Laser

1 2
4 5 6 7
8 - 12 13
17
14, 15
16
Figure 7-18 Q-Switched Laser Spare Parts
7-18

1 Q-switched Nd:YAG laser handpiece SA-1020221
2 Q-switched Nd:YAG handpiece calibration device SA-1033835
3 Q-Switched lens assembly & 6mm Metal treatment Tip Kit KT-10024830
4 Disposable Tip spot size 2 mm KT3750060
5 Disposable Tip spot size 2.5 mm KT3750030
6 Disposable Tip spot size 3.5 mm KT3750040
7 Disposable Tip spot size 5 mm KT3750050
8 M22 Q-Switched metal treatment tip kit size 2mm KT-10024880
9 M22 Q-Switched metal treatment tip kit size 2.5 mm KT-10024870
10 M22 Q-Switched metal treatment tip kit size 3.5 mm KT-10024860
13 M22 Q-Switched lens assembly kit KT-10024890
14 Multi-Spot & Q-Switched Nd:YAG safety eyewear AX0000066
(physician, patient)
15 Multi-Spot & Q-Switched Nd:YAG safety eyewear AX0000067
16 Opaque Eye Protectors (patient) AX0000060
17 Service hollow Tool for Q-switched TASA-10019950
NS Q-Switched Nd:YAG Upgrade Kit UG-1000400
Figure 7-19 Q-Switched Handpiece Components
PB-1042431 Rev D 7-19

7-20
Tests, Calibrations and Maintenance
C H A P T E R
TESTS, CALIBRATIONS AND

MAINTENANCE
8.1 Service Screens and Calibrations

The M22 system’s central computer is an industrial PC, and the
operating system is Windows® CE Embedded, residing on a compact
flash memory card.
The M22 system is equipped with self-testing software that

continuously monitors system operation. If a system malfunction is
detected, an error message will appear on the display screen.
The group of Service Module screens allows the service engineer to

directly adjust the parameters that control the hardware components.
The following sections offer views, definitions and explanations of the

various windows in the Service Module screens, and the options and
calibrations they offer.
8.1.1 Accessing the Service Module Screens

To access the service module screens:
initialization process, until the Login screen appears.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-1


screen appears.
8-2
3. In the Select Mode screen, press the Utility Menu Icon. The
Utility Menu screen appears.
4. Touch the Service button once; the Service screen appears (see
Figure 8-4).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-3

The main functions of the Service screen are (see Figure 8-4):
The red and green colors displayed in the LED status buttons do not
indicate a fault or OK status; they are only a binary indication of the
system status:
Red LED = “0”

Green LED = “1”
8.2 Software Installation/Upgrade

Procedures
The M22 system’s central computer is an industrial PC, and the
operating system is Windows® CE Embedded, residing on a compact
flash memory card, including the operating system and GUI software.
The Flash DSP software is located in the micro-controller in the

system's controller card, located in the interface module.
The GUI software should always be installed first and then the Flash
DSP software installed thereafter.
Software should be installed when:
• There is a software problem in the field

• Upgrades are made available by Lumenis
• There is a new released software available for the field.
Note
After installing the DSP Flash software, there is no need for
performing calibrations.
Note
When replacing the interface module, perform calibrations and
system serial number Burning. See Burning the System Serial
Number on page 8-56.
The DSP and upgrade GUI software installations do not require the
removal of any system covers.
8-4
Before performing any software installation or upgrade, perform

backup of user presets.
Complete software installation includes performing the following steps

in the order in which they appear below:
1. Backup the user preset (Section 8.2.1 ).

2. Fully Install the GUI software (Section 8.2.2 )
3. Install the Flash DSP software (see Section 8.2.3 )
4. Restore the User presets (Section 8.2.1 )
5. Perform all system calibrations using the System Calibration Tool
6. Test the system energy.
• For Universal IPL Handpiece see IPL Energy Test on page 3-
53.
• For Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece see Post-Installation
Checks - Nd:YAG Energy Test on page 3-67.
• For Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Handpiece see Post-Installation Tests:
ResurFX Module on page 3-117.
8.2.1 Backup/Restore User Presets

The system's software allows the user to create and save user presets in
its database. Certain procedures will erase this data. Therefore, backup
of this data should be performed in the following cases:
• installing GUI software

• performing system upgrades
• before replacing the PC module or computer
Backup and restoring of the data is performed using a Disk-On-Key.
Backup
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-5


screen appears.
8-6
4. From the Utility Screen, press Database. The Backup/Restore

Screen appears.
Figure 8-8 Backup/Restore Screen
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-7

5. Press Backup.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen and take the USB Disk-On-
Key and insert it into its connection port at the back of the system.
(see Figure 8-9).
Figure 8-9 USB Connected to System
7. Press OK. The system saves the user presets database onto the USB.
Note
Do not remove the USB while the backup is in progress!
Figure 8-10 Backup in Progress
8. When the process is complete, the message “Backup procedure

finished successfully!” appears.
8-8
Figure 8-11 Backup Successful
Restore

screen appears.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-9

8-10
4. From the Utility Screen, press Database. The Backup/Restore

Screen appears.
Figure 8-15 Backup/Restore Screen
5. Press Restore.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen and take the USB Disk-On-
Key and insert it into its connection port at the back of the system.
(see Figure 8-16).
Figure 8-16 USB Connected to System
7. Press OK. The system restores the user presets from the USB back
into the database (see Figure 8-17).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-11

Note
Do not remove the USB while the backup is in progress!
Figure 8-17 Restore in Progress
8. When the process is complete, the message “Restore procedure

finished successfully!” appears (see Figure 8-18).
Figure 8-18 Restore Successful
8-12
8.2.2 GUI and Operating System Software Installation

The GUI and Operating System software are located on the Compact
Flash (CF) memory attached to the industrial computer module. For
more information on the computer, refer to the section Industrial PC on
page 5-7.
Software installation is performed when reinstalling the existing

software, or updating system computer with the needed software
version.

copied to a PC.
Note
Use only the Compact Flash provided by Lumenis; not all Compact
Flash cards are suitable for this procedure.
Tools required:
• Compact Flash card reader

(local purchase)
• PC/laptop (defined as
Administrator)
CF Card Reader
To install the operating system and GUI software, do the following:
1. Perform backup of patient database before beginning installation

(see Backup/Restore User Presets on page 8-5).
2. Open the system PC Unit Assembly (see PC Unit Assembly
Replacement on page 10-8).
3. Remove the CF from the system’s computer (see Replacing the
Compact Flash (CF) on page 10-45).
4. Connect the card reader to the PC.
5. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD drive of the PC and copy the file
from the CD to the PC.
6. From your PC, double-click to open the file; the Self Extractor
Wizard opens (see Figure 8-19).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-13

Figure 8-19 Self-Extractor Screen
7. Click Next.
8. From the drop-down list, select the drive to which the CF reader is
connected (ignore all other ports, see Figure 8-20). Click Create.
create
Figure 8-20 Select Drive from Drop-Down List
8-14
9. At the overwrite prompt, click Yes (see Figure 8-21); the system
starts to burn the software onto the CF (see Figure 8-22). This
process takes about five minutes.
Figure 8-21 Overwrite Prompt
Figure 8-22 Software Burning Progress
10. When the burning process is complete, the following success

message appears (see Figure 8-23). Click OK.
Figure 8-23 Burning Success Message
11. Exit the application, disconnect the card reader from the PC, and
remove the CF from the card reader.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-15

12. Reinstall the CF back into the M22 system PC.

13. Close the M22 system covers.
14. Perform all voltage and temperature calibrations (see sections 8.4-
8.8).
15. Restore Patient database (see section 8.2.1)
16. Operate the system and perform the relevant handpiece energy
test(s) (see Universal IPL Energy Test on page 8-67 and IPL
Handpiece Calibration Using the IPL Calibration Device on
page 8-69).
Software installation is complete. When needed, proceed to perform

System Flash DSP Installation on page 8-16.
8.2.3 System Flash DSP Installation

The DSP software is shipped on CD media.
Installing the software requires having the

software available on a USB "Disk-on-Key"
device.
Lumenis will deliver the software CD to the FSE, and the FSE should
copy the software to the disk-on-key device.
To install the DSP software, do the following:
Note
This software installation does not require the removal of any system
covers.
8-16
Figure 8-24 Flash-DSP SW on Controller Board
8.2.4 System Controller DSP Software Installation

The DSP software is shipped on CD media. Installing the software
requires having the software available on a USB "Disk-on-Key"
device. Lumenis will deliver the software CD to the FSE, and the FSE
should copy the software to the disk-on-key device.
Figure 8-25 DSP Software Files
Note
This software installation does not require the removal of any
system covers.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-17

Figure 8-26 Controller Board, Flash Memory Card Location
initialization process, until the Login screen appears (see Figure 8-
27).
8-18

Figure 8-29).
30).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-19

Figure 8-30 M22 Desktop Screen
8-20
touch the USB Disk icon (see Figure 8-33).
9. The FlashWriter Screen appears (see Figure 8-35).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-21

Figure 8-35 Flash Writer Screen
10. Make sure that COM2 and Main, Erase, Program, and Verify
checkboxes are selected.

8-22
Figure 8-36 Select My Device
12. Double-touch to select USBDisk\MRIPL.OUT file (see Figure 8-37).
Figure 8-37 MRIPL.OUT File
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-23

Figure 8-38 Flash Writer Progress Bar
8-24
14. When the Flash installation is complete, a “Verification Successful”

message appears (see Figure 8-39), and 2 beeps are heard.
15. Disconnect the USB, and press Exit to return to the My Device
screen.
DSP Software Version Installation Verification

2. Open the Service screen.
3. Verify that the correct software version appears and that the
Controller CRC and “Expected” values are the same.
4. Verify that the correct system serial number appear in the screen.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-25

Figure 8-40 Software DSP and CRC Verification
5. Return to User mode and test the system for proper operation.
6. After installation is complete, perform the following tests:
• IPL Energy Test on page 3-53
• Post-Installation Checks - Nd:YAG Energy Test on page 3-67
8.3 Water Level Sensor Calibration

This procedure is for calibrating the water level sensor on systems with
series number 002 only, which have not been upgraded.
The water level sensor is an electro-magnetic sensor that senses the

water level from outside of the water tank. The water level sensor needs
to be calibrated in the following cases:
• when replacing the water level sensor

• When checking whether the water level sensor is functioning
properly.
The following tools are needed for this procedure:
8-26
• water level sensor calibration jig

• A narrow flat screwdriver
To calibrate the water level sensor, do the following:
Note
The water level inside the water tank should be at the MAX. level
indicated on the tank.
1. Remove the water tank.

2. Remove the back cover (see Back Cover Replacement on page 10-7).
3. Refer to Figure 8-41: Assemble the Water Level Calibration Jig
tool onto the back of the system with two screws. Make sure that it
does not come into contact with the sensor.
Figure 8-41 Assembling the Water Level Calibration Jig
4. Fill the water tank with water, between 5-10 mm above the MIN
line. Return the water tank back to its position. Verify that it locks
into its place with a “click”. At this point, when turning on the
system, the sensor’s LED status is not important.
6. From the Service screen, open the Cooling Diagnostic screen (see
Figure 8-42).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-27

Figure 8-42 Cooling Diagnostics Screen

7. )Using a narrow, flat screwdriver, gently turn the potentiometer
clockwise a full turn until the orange LED is lit. (See Figure 8-43).
Figure 8-43 Calibrating the Water Level Sensor
8. Gently turn the potentiometer counter-clockwise until the LED

turns off.
9. Gently turn the potentiometer clockwise again, until the LED
illuminates, this is the final LED status. The objective is to find the
exact mid-point between when the Led turns on and turns off.
10. In the Cooling System screen, verify that the Water Level Status is
Green (see Figure 8-42).
8-28
11. Remove the water tank, verify that the sensor’s orange LED turns
off, and the water level status on diagnostic screen turns to Red.
12. Empty the water from the water tank to about 3-4 mm from the
MIN water level line.
13. Return the water tank back into its location; verify that it locks into
place with a “click”.
14. Verify that the sensor’s orange Led is OFF and the water level
status on diagnostic screen turns to Red.
15. Remove the water tank and add water again, to about 5 mm above
the MIN water level line.
16. Verify that the sensor’s orange LED turns ON and the water level
status in Diagnostic screen is Green.
17. Fill the water tank until the water level is close to the MAX lines.
18. Insert the water tank in place and verify that the sensor’s orange
LED is lit and the water level status in Diagnostic screen is Green.
19. Calibration is successfully completed. If one of the steps is not
completed successfully, perform the entire procedure again from
the beginning.
Note
Note regarding the water level flow sensor: The water level flow
sensor replaces all other water level sensors that were installed in
previous systems (series numbers 002 to and including 004).
The water level flow sensor does not require any calibration.
Figure 8-44 Water Level Flow Sensor Location
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-29

8.4 Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)

Module Testing and Calibration
The LVPS is part of the HVPS module.
In order to achieve accurate voltage readings from the system, the 12V
DC and 5VDC of the power supply needs to be calibrated whenever the
HVPS is replaced, or whenever a low voltage error occurs.
Calibration is done for 5 VDC and then for 12V DC.
This and some of the next procedures require the System Calibration
Tool.
The System Calibration Tool TA-1043510 includes the following (see

Figure 8-45):
• Tester box (see also Figure 8-46)

• 25-pin harness - used for calibrating 5VDC 12 VDC, voltages for
water pump, voltages for fan, and IPL head TEC DC power.
• 9-pin harness - used for system high and low temperature
calibration.
Figure 8-45 System Calibration Tool
8-30
Pins Selector
Knob
25-pin
connection
Temp Cal/Test Hi/Low

Selector Temperature
Selector
DVM (+) DVM (GND)

connection connection
Not in use
9-pin
connection
Figure 8-46 Interface Tester Box
8.4.1 Setting up the System for Calibration

• Interface tester box

• 25-pin interface tester harness
Do the following:
1. Remove the main power cable from the mains wall outlet.
2. Remove the PC unit assembly (see PC Unit Assembly
3. Remove the top cover (see Top Cover Replacement on page 10-9).
4. Disconnect the J1 connector from the interface module.
5. Connect the system calibration tool (25-pins) test harness Molex
plug female side to J1 of the interface module (see Figure 8-47).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-31

Figure 8-47 Connecting Tester Tool to J1 Connector
6. Connect the other side of 25-pin test harness Molex plug male side
to J1 harness which you disconnected in step 4.
Figure 8-48 25-Pin Test Harness Connected
7. Connect the test harness 25-pin test harness to the plug on the
interface tester box.
8. Install the PC unit assembly back into its location.
9. Connect the IPL handpiece to the system.
10. Plug the main wall power back into the wall.
8-32

12. Enter Service Mode (1111) from the Utility screen and then press
Service. The main Service screen appears (see Accessing the
Service Module Screens on page 8-1).
Note
Whenever performing calibration, use GAIN = 1, and OFFSET = 0
in the service Calibration screen; these values are used as a starting
point for calibration.
8.4.2 5V DC Calibration
Perform this procedure in the following cases:
• When installing a new PC GUI software

• When replacing the interface module
Do the following:
1. From the main Service screen, select Charger.
Figure 8-49 Charger Screen
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-33

2. In the 5V Input section, press Calibration. The Calibration: 5V Input

window appears.
Figure 8-50 Calibration: 5Volt Input Window
3. In Point 2, press the Read button. Verify that you get a reading
value in the Read Data window.
4. Set the Interface Tester as follows:
• Temp cal/Test switch to Test
• Hi temp/Low temp switch to Low temp
• Set the knob to 1 position
5. Use a DVM (set to DC Voltage) and measure the voltage between
the red and black sockets on the Interface Tester.
Figure 8-51 Measuring Voltage between Red and Black Sockets
6. In Point 2, press KB (keyboard); an on-screen keypad appears.
8-34
press to enter
decimal point
Figure 8-52 On-screen Keypad
7. Enter the DVM reading value into the keypad. To enter a decimal
point, use the Point button on the keypad. After entering the value,
press OK; The Calibration: 5V Input window reappears.
8. Press Calculate Gain & Offset and then press OK; the Charger screen
reappears.
9. In the 5V Input section, press Save button.
10. Continue to the next step if needed; otherwise turn off the system.
11. Disconnect the interface tester from the system.
Calibration is complete.
8.4.3 12V DC Calibration

Perform this procedure in the following cases:
• When installing a new PC GUI software

• When replacing the interface module
Do the following:
1. Perform the steps for Setting up the System for Calibration on

page 8-31.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-35

2. From the 12V Input section of the Charger Screen, press

Calibration. The Calibration: 12V Input window appears.
Figure 8-53 12V Input
4. Set the Interface tester as follows:
the red and black sockets on the interface tester.
press OK; the 12V Input screen reappears.
8. Press Calculate Gain & Offset and then press OK; the Charger screen
reappears.
9. In the 12V Input section, press Save.
10. Turn off the system
11. Disconnect the interface tester from the system.
8-36
8.5 Voltage Calibration for Operating the

Water Pump
1. Connect the IPL handpiece to the handpiece connector on the
system.
page 8-31.
3. From the main Service screen, press Cooling System. The Cooling
System screen appears.
Figure 8-54 Cooling System Screen
Note
The water level status indicator should be lit green.
Verify that the water level in the tank is close to MAX.
4. From the Cooling Power section, press Off; this will prevent 24V
DC from being supplied to the pump and the water level sensor.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-37

Note
The water level status indicator is now lit red.
5. From the Pump 24V section, press Calibration. The Calibration:

Pump 24V window appears.
Figure 8-55 Calibration: Pump24V Window
press OK.
11. From the Cooling Power section, press On. (The On button is
partially hidden behind the Calibration: Pump 24V window-see
Figure 8-55).
12. Verify that the voltage increased to approximately 24V DC.
8-38
15. In Point 2, press KB (keyboard); the on-screen keypad appears.
press OK; the Calibration: Pump 24V window reappears.
17. Press Calculate Gain & Offset and then press OK; the Pump 24V
window reappears.
18. In the Pump 24V section, press Save.
20. Disconnect the System Calibration Tool from the system (if no
more tests are needed).
8.6 Fan RPM Voltage Calibration

page 8-31.
2. From the Main Service screen, press Cooling System. The Cooling
3. Verify that the OFF button in the Turn Fan section is pressed (fan
is deactivated).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-39

Figure 8-56 Turn Fan Section
4. From the Fan 24V section, press Calibration. The Calibration: Fan
24V window appears.
Figure 8-57 Calibration: Fan 24V Window
• Hi temp/Low temp switch to Low Temp
8-40

the red and black sockets on the Interface tester.
press OK.
10. From the Turn Fan section, press On.
11. Verify that the fan starts to operate; (verify that you hear the fan
working).
press OK; the The Calibration: Fan 24V window reappears.
16. Press Calculate Gain & Offset and then press OK; the Fan 24V
window reappears.
17. In the Fan 24V section, press Save.
8.7 IPL Head TEC DC Power Calibration

1. Connect the IPL handpiece to the handpiece connector on the
system.
2. Perform the steps for setting up the system for calibration
(section 8.4.1 ).
3. From the Main Service screen, press Cooling System. The Cooling
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-41

Figure 8-58 Turn Fan section
4. In the Turn Fan section, press ON. The fan is activated.

5. In the Cooling Power section, press ON; 24 VDC is supplied to the
pump and water level sensor.
6. From the Turn Water Pump section, press ON; the water pump is
activated.
7. Verify that the water flow status indicator is lit green and you can
hear the pump working.
8. From the main Service screen, press Head. The Head screen
appears. The IPL Status indicator is lit green and the TEC 8/16V
status indicator is lit red.
8-42
Figure 8-59 Head Screen
9. From the TEC 8/16 Volt section, press calibration. The

Calibration: TEC 8/16 Volt window appears.
Figure 8-60 TEC 8/16V Window
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-43


press OK; the Head Screen reappears.
15. From the Turn Tec section, press On.
press OK.
20. Press Calculate Gain & Offset and then press OK; the Head screen
reappears.
21. In the TEC 8/16 V section, press Save.
22. From the Turn Tec section, press Off.
23. From the cooling system screen, turn the water pump OFF, and
turn the Fan OFF.
8-44
8.8 High and Low System Temperature

Calibration
This procedure is required for calibration of software readings. Voltage
is sampled by the software, and the software monitors the voltage and
indicates a fault once the read voltage is out of range.
Voltage sampling is taken by the controller board - interface module.

For this reason, calibration is required when the interface module is
replaced.
Calibration data is saved on the GUI PC. FOr this reason, calibration is
required when the GUI PC is replaced.
• Interface tester box

• 9-pin interface tester harness
Do the following:
1. Remove the main power cable from the wall outlet.

2. Remove the back cover (see Back Cover Replacement on page 10-
7).
3. Remove the PC unit assembly (see PC Unit Assembly
4. Remove the top cover (see Top Cover Replacement on page 10-9)
5. Remove J6 connector from the interface module (see Figure 8-61).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-45

Figure 8-61 Removing J6 Connection
6. Connect the System Calibration Tool 9-pin harness female side to

J6, from which P6 was just removed.
7. Connect the other side of the 9-pin harness to the 9-pin plug on the
Interface Tester box (see Figure 8-62).
Figure 8-62 System Calibration Tool Setup
8. Install the PC unit assembly back into its location.

9. Connect the IPL handpiece to the system.
10. Plug the main wall power back into the wall.
8-46

12. Enter Service Mode (1111).
13. From the Utility screen and then press Service. The main Service
screen appears.
14. From the main Service screen, press Cooling System. The Cooling
Figure 8-63 Cooling System Screen - Temperature Section

• Temp Cal/Test switch to Test
• Turn the knob to any position (position is not important).
16. In the Temperature section, press Calibration; the Calibration:
Temperature (C) window appears.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-47

Figure 8-64 Temperature Calibration Window
17. On the interface tester, move the Temp cal/Test switch to Temp cal.
21. Enter the DVM reading value multiplied by 100 into the keypad
(should be approximately 24V). To enter a decimal point, use the
Point button on the keypad. After entering the value, press OK.
22. On the interface tester, move the Hi temp/Low temp switch to Hi

temp.
26. Enter the DVM reading value multiplied by 100 into the keypad
(should be approximately 57V). To enter a decimal point, use the
Point button on the keypad. After entering the value, press OK.
27. Press Calculate Gain & Offset and then press OK; the Cooling
System screen reappears.
28. In the Temperature section, press Save.
29. Turn off the system and disconnect the interface tester from the
system.
8-48
8.9 Capacitor Voltage Calibration

1. From the Main Service screen press Charger. The Charger screen
Figure 8-65 Main Service Screen
2. Verify that the Charger Dump is pressed OFF (see Figure 8-66).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-49

Figure 8-66 Charger Screen - Cap. Voltage Calibration
3. From the Charger screen, press Calibration (see Figure 8-67).
Figure 8-67 Read Point 1
4. In the Point 1 section, press Read Point.
8-50
WARNING
The following steps include high voltage
measurements; work carefully and take any
necessary safety precautions.
5. Connect the DVM to the capacitor (+) and (-) terminals as shown in
Figure 8-68.
Figure 8-68 Connect DVM to Capacitor Terminals
6. Observe the reading on the DVM.

7. Enter the reading for point 1: press KB to open the on-screen
keyboard and enter the DVM value for point 1. Press OK when
done.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-51

Figure 8-69 Enter the Point 1 Reading
8. Press the Charge/Dump to ON.

9. In the Point 2 section, press Read.
10. Observe the DVM reading.
11. Enter the reading for point 2: press KB to open the on-screen
keyboard and enter the DVM value for point 2. Press OK when
done.
8-52
Figure 8-70 Enter the Point 2 Reading
12. Press Calculate Gain & Offset and then press OK.
Figure 8-71 Calculate Gain & Offset
13. Press the Charge/Dump to OFF.

14. Press Save to save the values.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-53

Figure 8-72 Capacitor Voltage Calibration - Save Values
Capacitor Voltage calibration is complete.
8.10 Capacitor Voltage Test

Perform the Capacitor Voltage Test whenever low voltage on the
capacitors is observed.
This procedure must be performed whenever replacing the following

modules:
• capacitor bank
• HVPS
• Switching module
• Interface module
The capacitor voltage does not require any calibration. However, you
do need to verify that the capacitor bank is charged to maximum
voltage.
8-54
Note
This procedure can be performed with the System Calibration Tool
still attached to the system; however, this procedure does not
require the use of the System Calibration Tool.

2. From the Utility screen press Service. The main Service screen
appears.
3. From the main Service screen, press Charger; the Charger screen
appears.
4. Verify that in the Capacitors Are Fully Charged window, the status
indicator is lit red.
5. Verify that in the Capacitors Are Fully Dumped window, the status
indicator is lit green.
6. In the Capacitor Voltage section, verify that the value is 6 ±3 V.
7. From the Charge/Dump section, press On. Both status indicators
illuminate red (charging is in process).
Capacitors Fully
Charged
Capacitors Fully
Charged
Charge/Dump
section
Cap. Voltage section
Figure 8-73 Capacitors are Fully Charged/Dumped
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-55

8. After a few seconds, the Capacitors are Fully Charged status

indicator turns green and the Capacitors are Fully Dumped status
indicator is red. This means that charging the capacitors is
completed successfully.
9. In the Capacitor Voltage section, verify that the value is 550 VDC
±3 V.
10. When finished, in the Charge/Dump section, press OFF.
11. Verify that the two status indicators are red for a few seconds
(dump process).
12. When dumping is completed, verify that the Capacitors are Fully
Charged status indicator is red and the Capacitors are Fully
Dumped status indicator is green.
13. Turn the system off.
14. Disconnect the System Calibration Tool from the system (if it was
connected).
The Capacitor Voltage Test is now complete.
8.11 Burning the System Serial Number

Burning the updated system serial number is required after replacing
the interface module.
An external USB keyboard is needed for this procedure.
Note
Only Lumenis-authorized personnel may perform this procedure.
Note
This procedure is intended to enhance the efficiency of spare parts
replacement. Unauthorized use of this burning action for any other
purpose is forbidden.
1. Connect an external USB keyboard to the USB port at the back of

the system.
8-56
3. Go to Service mode (see Accessing the Service Module Screens on

page 8-1); the Main Service Screen appears (see Figure 8-4).
Note
If you are already in any one of the service screens, you can press
one of the blank cells on the right-hand menu to return to the first
service screen (see Figure 8-77).
type in serial
number
Figure 8-74 First Service Screen
4. Press Default.
5. Using the external keyboard, type in the serial number in the
Machine SN field.
6. Press Write.
7. Verify that the burning was executed as expected by pressing the
Read button and review the serial number that appears in the
Machine SN field.
System serial number burning is complete.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-57

8.12 Procedures for Universal IPL

Handpiece by Service
The IPL handpiece must be calibrated by Lumenis-authorized service
personnel after every 50,000 pulses after the last calibration. After
emitting 50,000 pulses from the IPL handpiece, the system will display
the following message: The handpiece should be calibrated by Lumenis
to ensure continued operation efficacy. Please Contact Lumenis
Service. If the handpiece is not calibrated according to schedule,
Lumenis cannot be held responsible for the handpiece's performance.
Note
After calibrating the handpiece, the handpiece allows an additional
50,000 pulses before requiring an additional calibration.
The pulses warranty for the handpiece remains as defined by
Lumenis.
8.12.1 Using the Ophir External Power Meter

To measure the energy, the full lightguide footprint is used (aimed at
the center of the power meter detector at a distance of 1-2 mm).
Theory of Measurement
Note
The calculations are fully supported by the M22 software as
described in this Chapter.
To calculate the fluence, from the measured energy, the OPHIR

reading is divided by the actual spot size. The lightguide area (cm2) is:
• 5.25 cm2 for large 15 x 35 mm lightguide

• 1.2 cm2 for small 15 x 8 mm lightguide
Note
Keep the OPHIR detector clean at all times. Make sure you are
working with a calibrated OPHIR power meter at all times. (Calibrate
the power meter as instructed on the Ophir label at the back of the
device).
8-58
Fluence calculated for large lightguide (15 x 35 mm):
Fluence (J/cm2) = Energy Reading (J) / 5.25
Fluence calculated for small lightguide (15 x 8 mm):
Fluence (J/cm2) = Energy Reading (J) / 1.2
Setting Up the OPHIR Power Meter for the Universal IPL

handpiece
Note
For a description of the OPHIR power meter controls and indicators,
refer to the manufacturer's manual.
To operate the OPHIR power meter for the Universal IPL handpiece:
1. Connect the FL-250A detector head to the power meter (see Figure
8-75).
2. Turn the power meter ON (button on left side).

3. Press the red circular Menu button twice.
4. Press the LASER scale (left triangular button) until <.8u or VIS is
displayed in the upper right corner of the screen (depending on your
personal detector).
5. Press the red circular Menu button twice and choose the ENERGY
scale (left triangular button); the readings are now set to Joules (J).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-59

6. Press the RANGE (triangular right) button and set it to the highest
setting (between 200-300 Joules, depending on your personal
detector).
7. Exit the RANGE scale by pressing Exit (triangular right button).
8. Press the MORE (central triangular) button.
9. Choose the THRESHOLD position.
10. Press the GO button to confirm.
11. Choose MED value threshold; this will ensure that the OPHIR will
not be too sensitive to random noise.
12. Press the EXIT button to confirm; the power meter is now ready for
measuring the Universal IPL handpiece.
8.12.2 Universal IPL Handpiece Energy Calibration by

Service
For these next steps, use the customer Universal IPL handpiece.
Caution
safety eyewear.
1. Connect the customer Universal IPL handpiece to the handpiece

connector and insert the large light guide.
2. Insert the Calibration filter.
Note
Verify that the light guide and calibration filter are clean of dirt and
gel.
3. Turn on the system and go to the Utility Screen (see Accessing the
Service Module Screens on page 8-1).
8-60
4. In the Service Screen, Press Service; the Service Screen appears

(see Figure 8-77).
5. In the Service Screen, press End User Screen. The End User Screen
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-61

Figure 8-78 End User Screen
6. Verify that the Turn TEC button is OFF (see Figure 8-77). If it is not,
press OFF.
7. Press Calibrate IPL Head; the IPL Head Calibration window
Figure 8-79 IPL Head Calibration Screen
8-62
8. Verify that the Setup parameters displayed at the bottom of the

screen are as follows: Current 131Amp, Double, T1=10ms,
D1=50ms, T2=10ms. (See Figure 8-80).
Note
These parameters are Lumenis setup parameters that can be
updated from time to time only by Lumenis manufacturing.
9. From the End User screen, press the System On button; the pump
and fan starts to operate.
10. Press Ready.
Figure 8-80 Setup Parameters
11. Position the handpiece 1-2 mm from the external power meter
aperture (see Figure 8-81).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-63

Figure 8-81 Position the handpiece on External Power Meter
12. Fire a shot into the external power meter.

13. Refer to Figure 8-82: Enter the power meter reading in the first
field box:
press KB by the first field box (the top field); the numeric keypad
appears. Type in the value (to enter a decimal point, use the Point
button), and then press OK. The system goes to STBY.
1st field
box
readings field boxes

numeric keypad
Figure 8-82 Record the Power Meter Readings
8-64
14. Verify that the value that you entered appears in the first reading
field box.
15. Press READY.
16. Repeat steps 11-14 another four times, while waiting 15 seconds in
between each shot. Enter the reading after each shot.
|
Figure 8-83 All Reading Values Entered
17. After all 5 reading values have been entered in the reading fields,
press Calculate Factor (Figure 8-84). The factor should be between
0.8 and 1.5.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-65

Figure 8-84 Calculate Factor
Note
If the factor is below 0.8, repeat the calibration. If after repeating the
calibration it is still low, replace the IPL handpiece.
18. When the factor is within the accepted range, press Save Factor; the
factor is saved.
19. From the screen, press the System Off button.
20. Verify that the system factor was saved (see Figure 8-85):
a. From the Service Screen press Head Data; the Head Data
screen appears.
b. Press the Search button.
c. Press the drop down arrow to verify the Head ID, and press on
the ID number to enter it in the box.
d. Press Read; Verify that in the calibration section, that Factor 1
is equal to the factor you saved in step 17. If not, repeat the
entire calibration procedure from the beginning.
8-66
search button
Head ID
Calibration
Factor 1
Figure 8-85 Head Data Screen
8.12.3 Universal IPL Energy Test

The M22 system's energy must be checked at least once a year. The
calibration check and – if necessary – the calibration procedure are
performed only by Lumenis-authorized service personnel.

For example, when filter 515 is selected with treatment preset of

If the readings are not within the acceptable range value as shown in
Table 8-1, perform Universal IPL Handpiece Energy Calibration by
Service on page 8-60, or replace the handpiece.

PB-1042431 Rev D 8-67

To test the Universal IPL handpiece, do the following:
1. Set up the Ophir power meter as described in section Using the

Ophir External Power Meter on page 8-58.
Figure 8-86 Energy Test Preset 1 (example)
Note
The test uses three different filters and different presets for each
filter. Perform three shots for each filter and calculate the average
value.

Table 8-1. Energy Test Results Table - IPL

[J/cm2]
515 13 0 0 - - 10 48-58
590 10 40 10 - - 35 166-202
695 6 60 6 60 6 17 81-99
8-68
3. If the readings of the M22 fluence are different from the Ophir
power meter readings and are out the acceptable range, repeat
Universal IPL Handpiece Energy Calibration by Service on
page 8-60, or replace the Universal IPL handpiece.
8.12.4 IPL Handpiece Calibration Using the IPL

Calibration Device
Calibration can be initiated by the user and can also be required by the
system. When beginning treatment, the system checks if the treatment
head requires calibration and will instruct the user to perform
calibration.
After emitting 50,000 pulses from the IPL treatment head, the system
will display the following pop-up window: Head Requires Calibration
(see Figure 8-87).
The buttons on this pop-up window perform the following functions:
A Replace Head Displays the main screen where you can press
the Modules Update button and replace the
treatment head.
B Calibrate Transitions the system to the Tools screen
C Continue Transitions the system back to the Treatment

screen. The system will continue presenting the
warning message every day until calibration is
performed
Note
The user may continue to operate the system without calibrating the
treatment head (by pressing the Continue button), but if the
treatment head is not calibrated according to schedule, Lumenis
cannot be held responsible for the head's performance.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-69

Figure 8-87 Treatment Head Calibration Warning Pop-Up

Window (system software version 2.0 and higher)
To calibrate the IPL handpiece using the IPL calibration device, do

the following:
1. Connect the IPL handpiece's calibration device (see Figure 8-88) to

the system's service panel (see arrow in Figure 9).
Figure 8-88 Connection to Service Panel
2. Insert the dedicated Calibration filter into the handpiece (see Figure
8-89).
8-70
Figure 8-89 Insert Calibration Filter
3. Remove the Large Light Guide: open the latch (A) to release the
light guide (B) and extract it from the IPL handpiece. Remove the
light guide assembly from the handpiece by gripping both sides of
the light guide (C) and pulling out from the bottom (see Figure 8-
90).
Figure 8-90 Light Guide Removal
4. Mount the handpiece on the calibration device as shown in Figure

8-91: Ensure that the light guide latch is open and position the
handpiece over the calibration device's built-in light guide (A).
Press the handpiece all the way down (B) and close the light guide
latch (C).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-71

Figure 8-91 Mount IPL Handpiece on Calibration Tool and Lock
5. Wait for the screen to appear after the self test bar runs
successfully.
6. Go to the M22 Select Mode Screen and press to get into

treatment screen (See Figure 8-92).
8-72
Figure 8-92 Screen After Self-Test
7. Press to change it to red, indicating that the TECs are off.
Figure 8-93 Treatment Screen
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-73

8. From the Treatment screen, press . The Tools screen

appears.
9. From the Tools screen, press the Calibration button and carefully
follow the on-screen instructions to complete the calibration
process (see Figure 8-94, A-D).
Figure 8-94 Calibration
10. Press the IPL trigger button, waiting 15 seconds in between each
shot, and follow the on-screen instructions.
8-74
Figure 8-95 On-Screen Instructions
11. After 4 cycles the message “Calibration Succeeded” will appear. If

not, repeat the process.
12. Press to exit the screen (see Figure 8-96).
Figure 8-96 Calibration Succeeded Screen
13. From the Tools screen, press Head Information (see Figure 8-97).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-75

Figure 8-97 Tools Screen - Head Information
14. Record the Internal Head Factor value (see Figure 8-98).
Internal Head Factor = ________________________
Figure 8-98 Internal Head Factor Value
8-76
8.12.5 Resetting the IPL Calibration Device Factor

The factor of the IPL calibration device needs to be reset once a year.
This is done to ensure that the calibration of the IPL energy is accurate.
Setting up the OPHIR Power Meter for the IPL Treatment

Head
Note
8-99).
2. Set the power meter:

a. Turn the power meter ON (button on left side).
b. Press the red circular Menu button twice.
c. Press the LASER scale (left triangular button) until <.8u or
VIS is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-77

d. Press the red circular Menu button twice and choose the
set to Joules (J).
e. Press the RANGE (triangular right) button and set it to the
personal detector).
f. Exit the RANGE scale by pressing Exit (triangular right
button).
g. Press the MORE (central triangular) button.
h. Choose the THRESHOLD position.
j. Choose MED value threshold; this will ensure that the OPHIR
k. Press the EXIT button to confirm; the power meter is now
ready for measuring the IPL handpiece.
3. Connect the IPL Calibration device to the calibration port at the

back of the system (see Figure 8-100).
Figure 8-100 IPL Calibration Tool Connected
4. Insert the large guide into the IPL handpiece.

5. Insert the calibration filter into the IPL handpiece.
6. Go to the Service Screen and select Head screen (see Figure 8-
101).
8-78
Figure 8-101 Head Screen
7. Verify that the screen shows that the Calibration filter is selected
(see Figure 8-101).
8. From the screen, verify that the Turn TEC is turned OFF.
9. From the Service menu, press Calibration Device; the Calibration
Device screen appears (see Figure 8-102).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-79

Figure 8-102 Calibration Device Screen
10. From the Calibration Device screen, press Read Device.
11. Wait for to appear in the status message at the bottom of

the screen (see Figure 8-103).
Figure 8-103 Calibrate PM Button
8-80
12. Press Calibrate PM; the Calibration PM screen appears.

13. Press System On, then press Ready (see Figure 8-104).
Figure 8-104 Calibration Field Boxes at Zero Start Point
Caution
The next steps involve firing the treatment head; wear the
appropriate safety eyewear.
14. From a distance of 2 mm fire the laser once into the center of the
external power meter (see Figure 8-105).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-81

Figure 8-105 Fire IPL Head into External Power Meter
Figure 8-106 Calibration Field Boxes at Zero Start Point
8-82
15. .Refer to Figure 8-107: Observe the reading on the external power
meter display and enter the reading in the first field box: press KB
by the first field box (the top field); the numeric keypad appears.
Type in the value (to enter a decimal point, use the Point button),
and then press OK (see Figure 8-108). The system goes to STBY.
Figure 8-107 Using Keypad to Enter Reading
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-83

Figure 8-108 First Reading Entered
16. Press READY.

17. Repeat the steps 12-14 another four times, while waiting 15
seconds in between each shot. Enter the reading after each shot (see
Figure 8-109).
8-84
Figure 8-109 All Five Readings entered - Find Peak
18. When all the values are entered in the field boxes, select the Find
Peak checkbox (see Figure 8-109).
Caution
The next steps involve firing the treatment head; wear the
appropriate safety eyewear.
19. Remove the light guide from the IPL handpiece. (Keep the
calibration filter inside the IPL handpiece).
20. Mount the IPL handpiece on the Calibration Tool and lock the
latch (see Figure 8-110).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-85

Figure 8-110 Inserting the IPL Handpiece into the Calibration Tool
21. Press READY.

22. Shoot five times into the calibration device, waiting 15 seconds in
between each shot. Observe that the readings are automatically
entered into the fields (see Figure 8-111).
Figure 8-111 All Readings Entered
8-86
23. When all the fields have been filled, record the Calculated factor;
the accepted range is 60-100. (see Figure 8-112).
24. Press Save Factor (see Figure 8-112); the Calibration Device
screen reappears.
Figure 8-112 Save Factor
IPL Calibration Tool Factor Verification

1. From the Main Service screen, press Head Data; the Head Data
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-87

Figure 8-113 Head Data Screen
2. Press the Search button.

3. Press the drop down arrow to verify the Head ID, and press on the
ID number to enter it in the box.
4. Press Read; Verify that Factor 1 (Figure 8-114) is the same as the
saved calibration value. If not, repeat the entire calibration
procedure from the beginning.
Note
Factor Value requirement is between 60 - 100.
8-88
Figure 8-114 Factor Value
Resetting the IPL Calibration Tool and Factor Verification is complete.
Note
Make sure to insert the Light Guide back into its location after
completing the Calibration.
8.13 Procedures for Nd:YAG Handpiece
8.13.1 Nd:YAG Energy Test

For example, when the 6 mm tip is selected with treatment preset of

using a calibrated Ophir power meter and the Nd:YAG hollow tool tip.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-89

To test the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece, do the following:

Figure 8-115).

set to Joules (J).
personal detector).
button).
2. Attach the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG hollow tool tip to the handpiece to
simulate 6 mm light guide or 2 x 4 mm light guide.
8-90
Note
The test uses two different spot sizes for each preset, simulated by
the hollow tool tip.

Table 8-2.
Figure 8-116 Energy Test Preset 1 - Nd:YAG

aperture, perform three shots for each light guide and calculate the
average value. (The test uses three different filters and different
Note
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-91

Figure 8-117 Firing Nd:YAG into Power Meter
6. If the readings are not within the acceptable range value as shown
in Table 8-2, perform IPL Handpiece Calibration Using the IPL
Calibration Device on page 8-69, or replace the handpiece.
Table 8-2. Energy Test Results Table - Nd:YAG
Pulse Parameters from User Screen Measured Energy on External Power

Meter
Multi-Spot T1* D1* T2 D2 T3 Required E1 E2 E3 AVG Acceptable

Hollow [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] Fluence [J] [J] [J] [J] Range [J]
ToolTip [J/cm2]
Position
6 mm 7 0 0 0 0 20 5.3 – 7.2
6 mm 6 70 6 70 6 150 40.1 – 54.2
2 x 4 mm 4 0 0 0 0 75 5.9 – 8.0
2 x 4 mm 3 20 3 20 3 225 17.8 – 24.1
8-92
8.13.2 Nd:YAG Handpiece Calibration Using the

Nd:YAG Calibration Device
Calibration of the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece is necessary to
ensure performance optimization.Calibration can be initiated by the
user and can also be required by the system.When beginning treatment,
the system checks if the handpiece requires calibration and will instruct
the user to perform calibration.
Regardless of how the calibration process is started –system

requirement or user initiation –the process is the same.
Caution

automatically initiate calibration in the following instances:

• When 3,000 pulses have been emitted from the module without
performing calibration.
Procedure
1. In the Select Mode screen, press on the Replace Head button (see
Figure 8-118).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-93

Figure 8-118 Replace Head Button
2. When the message “it is now safe to replace the head” appears,
connect the Nd:YAG handpiece and press OK.
Note
No tip should be inserted into the handpiece.
3. When connecting the handpiece to the system for the first time, a
warning message “the head requires calibration; please perform
calibration in “tools” window” appears (see Figure 8-119). Press
OK; the treatment screen appears.
8-94
Figure 8-119 Head Requires Calibration Warning Message
4. From the treatment screen, press the Tools button (see Figure 8-
120); the Tools screen appears.
Figure 8-120 Treatment Screen - Tool Button
5. from the Tools screen, press Calibration; the Calibration screen

PB-1042431 Rev D 8-95

Figure 8-121 Tools Screen
6. If the calibration device is not connected, a message prompting to

connect it appears (see Figure 8-122); connect the calibration
device to the calibration port at the back of the system (see Figure
8-123).
Figure 8-122 Calibration Device Not Connected Prompt
8-96
Figure 8-123 Calibration Device Connected
7. Press the X in the top right-hand corner to exit the screen; the Tools
screen re-appears. Press Calibration (see Figure 8-124); the
defrosting screen appears (see Figure 8-125).
Figure 8-124 Calibration Screen - Calibration Button
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-97

Figure 8-125 Defrosting Progress Screen
8. After defrosting is finished, the calibration screen appears with the

message “head replacement verification” (see Figure 8-126).
Figure 8-126 handpiece Replacement Verification
9. Insert the handpiece into the cradle of the calibration device (see
Figure 8-127); the handpiece is inserted properly when you hear a
“click”.
8-98
Figure 8-127 Inserting YAG handpiece in Calibration Device
10. The Calibration in Process screen appears with a progress bar (see
Figure 8-128).
Figure 8-128 calibration in Process - Press Safety Button
11. Press the safety button and verify that the safety LED is
illuminated.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-99

safety LED
Figure 8-129 Nd:YAG handpiece Safety LED
Caution
safety eyewear.
12. Press and hold the trigger continuously. Calibration is executed.

13. Follow the on-screen instructions and fire the laser another three
times.
14. Calibration is complete when the message “Calibration Succeeded”
appears.
8.13.3 Resetting the Nd:YAG Calibration Device

Factor by Service
The factor of the Nd:YAG calibration device needs to be reset once a
year. This is done to ensure that the calibration of the Nd:YAG energy
is accurate.
8-100
Setting up the OPHIR Power Meter for the Nd:YAG hand-

piece
Note
8-130).
2. Turn the power meter ON (button on left side).

3. Set the power meter:
a. Press the red circular Menu button twice.
b. Press the LASER scale (left triangular button) until YAG or.8-
6 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen
c. Press the red circular Menu button twice and choose the
set to Joules (J).
d. Press the RANGE (triangular right) button and set it to the
personal detector).
e. Exit the RANGE scale by pressing Exit (triangular right
button).
f. Press the MORE (central triangular) button.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-101

g. Choose the THRESHOLD position.

h. Press the GO button to confirm.
i. Choose MED value threshold; this will ensure that the OPHIR
j. Press the EXIT button to confirm; the power meter is now ready
4. Connect the Nd:YAG Calibration device to the calibration port at
the back of the system (see Figure 8-131).
Figure 8-131 Nd:YAG Calibration Device Connected
5. Remove the lightguide from the Nd:YAG handpiece.

6. Insert the hollow Multi-Spot tool (P/N # TA-004329) in place of
the light guide.
7. Go to the Service Screen and select Head screen (see Figure 8-132).
8. Rotate the tool until the side marked 6 mm Ø is facing up. Verify
that the screen shows 6 mm lightguide (see Figure 8-132).
8-102
Figure 8-132 Resetting the Nd:YAG Calibration Device Factor
9. From the screen, verify that the Turn TEC is turned off (see Figure
8-132).
10. From the Service menu, press Calibration Device; the Calibration
Device screen appears.
11. From the Calibration Device screen, press Read Device.
Figure 8-133 Read Device Button
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-103

12. A message “Preparing to read calibration device...please wait”

appears in the status box. Wait until the Calibration PM button
appears.
Figure 8-134 Calibration Device Screen
13. Press Calibrate PM; the Calibration PM screen appears.

14. Press System On then press Ready (see Figure 8-135).
8-104
Figure 8-135 Calibration PM Screen
Caution
safety eyewear.
15. From a distance of 2 mm fire the laser once into the external power
meter (see Figure 8-136).
Figure 8-136 Fire Nd:YAG handpiece into External Power Meter
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-105

Figure 8-137 Calibration Field Boxes at Zero
16. Refer to Figure 8-138: Observe the reading on the external power
meter display and enter the reading in the first field box:
press KB by the first field box (the top field); the numeric keypad
appears. Type in the value (to enter a decimal point, use the Point
button), and then press OK. The system goes to STBY (see Figure
8-139).
8-106
Figure 8-138 Using Keypad to Enter Reading
Figure 8-139 First Reading Entered
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-107

17. Press READY.

18. Repeat the steps 8-10 another four times, while waiting 15 seconds
in between each shot. Enter the reading after each shot (see Figure
8-140).
Figure 8-140 All Five Reading Entered
19. When all the values are entered in the field boxes, select the Find
Peak checkbox (see Figure 8-141).
8-108
Figure 8-141 Find Peak Checkbox
20. Remove the hollow Multi-Spot tool and insert the handpiece into
the calibration device; the handpiece is inserted properly when you
hear a “click” (see Figure 8-142).
Figure 8-142 Inserting the Nd:YAG Head in Calibration Device
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-109

Caution
safety eyewear.
21. Press READY.

22. Shoot five times into the calibration device, waiting 15 seconds in
between each shot. Observe that the readings are automatically
entered into the fields (see Figure 8-143).
.
Figure 8-143 Reading Automatically Entered from Cal. Device
23. When all the fields have been filled, press Save Factor (see Figure
8-143).
Calibration Device Saved Factor Verification

1. From the Main Service screen, press Head Data; the Head Data
screen appears.
8-110
2. Verify that the system factor was saved (see Figure 8-144):
a. Press the Search button.
b. Press the drop down arrow to verify the Head ID, and press on
the ID number to enter it in the box.
c. Press Read;
d. Verify that Factor 1 is similar to the saved calibration value
(see Figure 8-143 and Figure 8-144).If not, repeat the entire
calibration procedure from the beginning.
Figure 8-144 Factor 1 Value
Note
Make sure to remove the hollow Multi-Spot tool after completing the
Calibration.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-111

8-112
8.14 Preventive Maintenance

This section describes routine maintenance procedures such as:
cleaning the system, cleaning optical components, calibration of
handpieces, and replacing the light guides.
Preventive maintenance should be performed once a year.
The procedures in this section may be performed by the user.

All other service procedures must be performed by Lumenis-authorized
personnel only.
WARNING
Maintenance by user should be performed only when
the system is shut down and disconnected from
power. Performing maintenance procedures with the
system on may be hazardous to the user and/or
destructive to the system.
Only Lumenis authorized service personnel may

service the M22 system, especially inside its
protective covers. This includes making internal
adjustments to the power supply, cooling system, etc.
Dangerous voltages are present inside the system.
8.14.1 Cleaning the System

The system's console should be cleaned with a clean cloth and a mild
detergent. The touch-screen monitor should be cleaned periodically
with a dedicated screen cleaning solution, available from any office
supply store.
Take special care to ensure that liquids do not spill on the system.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-113

8.14.2 Caring for the Handpieces

The Universal IPL, Multi-Spot Nd:YAG, and ResurFX handpieces
contain components that may be damaged if the module is dropped.
Except during treatment, the handpiece should be kept at all times in its
cradle or storage case.
Do not allow sunblock or sunscreen products to come in contact with

the handpiece.The ingredients found in these products may cause
deterioration or damage to the handpiece material. If sun block or
sunscreen does contact the handpiece, clean it immediately to prevent
possible damage.
Never immerse the handpiece in water, nor hold it under running water
to prevent any penetration of water into the module.
IPL ExpertFilters
Intense Pulse Light (IPL) ExpertFilters, which control the spectral
output of the system, are under warranty from Lumenis to be in perfect
working condition upon receipt. No additional warranty applies.
Under normal working conditions, the performance of these filters is

likely to deteriorate with time and they will require replacing. Defects
such as stains on the coated surface, spots where the coating chips or
lifts off the substrate, can adversely affect the treatment outcome.
Although these filters are consumables, their life span may be extended
considerably if the proper care and maintenance is given. Filters
directly affect the results of a procedure and therefore maintaining
clean, damage-free filters is essential to achieving the desired results.
Caution
It is very important to keep the filter clean at all times, otherwise
it can harm the patient and cause damage to the handpiece.
Replace the filter if it is broken or if the coating is damaged (i.e.,
spots cover more than 15% of coating surface).
8-114
To clean the filter (refer to Figure 8-145):
1. Remove it by grasping the finger grip and sliding out the filter.
2. Gently dust the surface of the filter with a lint-free cloth.
3. Gently wipe off gel and fingerprints from the filter surface with
ethyl alcohol or isopropyl alcohol.
4. Wipe the surface of the filter (both sides) with a lint-free cloth.
5. After cleaning, reinsert the filter by sliding it in the handpiece while
holding the finger grip.
6. Store the filters in their plastic sleeves when not in use.
Figure 8-145 Extracting the IPL ExpertFilter
IPL SapphireCool Lightguide

Keep the lightguide free from dirt and gel at all times and clean it after
each patient.
Caution
Clean the lightguide only after it has cooled and not immediately
after treatment.
Keep the lightguide clean from dust since any particles or dirt on the
tips of the lightguide will get hot due to absorption of light and can
cause epidermal injury and increase patient discomfort.
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-115

To clean the lightguide (see Figure 8-146):
1. Place the handpiece on a soft, flat surface, open the latch (1) to release the
lightguide (2) and extract it from the IPL handpiece.
2. Remove the lightguide assembly from the handpiece by gripping
both sides of the lightguide (3) and pulling out from the bottom.
3. Remove the plastic cover holding the lightguide (4).
4. Wash both the cover and lightguide under warm running water to
remove any gel residues.
5. Wipe dry with a lint-free cloth.
6. Assemble the lightguide assembly, reinsert into the handpiece and
lock the latch.
Figure 8-146 Extracting the IPL SapphireCool Lightguide
8-116
Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Laser Lightguide Assembly

The Nd:YAG laser’s lightguide assembly can be changed routinely
It is very important to keep the lightguide clean at all times.Lightguides

should be cleaned after each patient. To clean the lightguide, first wipe
the tip with a cloth.Then clean it with a cloth moistened with ethyl
alcohol or isopropyl alcohol.Wipe it with a lint-free cloth until it is
thoroughly dry.
Figure 8-147 Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Lightguide
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-117

ResurFX Laser Tip Assembly

Keep the tip's optical surfaces free from dirt and gel at all times and
clean it after each patient.
Keep the tip's optical surfaces clean from dust since any particles or dirt
on the tip will get hot due to absorption of light and can cause
epidermal injury and increase patient discomfort.
To clean the tip, first wipe it with a cloth. Then clean it with a cloth
moistened with ethyl alcohol or isopropyl alcohol. Wipe it with a lint-
free cloth until it is thoroughly dry.
8-118
8.15 Preventive Maintenance Checklist

Preventive Maintenance (PM) of the system should be performed at
least once a year. The procedures should be carried out only by
Lumenis authorized FSEs.
The checklist below lists the preventive maintenance activities. Fill out
a photocopy of this checklist to ensure that all preventive maintenance
activities have been performed successfully. Keep the signed copy for
your records.
8.15.1 Preventive Maintenance ID

Date:
Technician:
System S/N:
handpiece S/N:
IPL S/N:
Nd:YAG S/N:
Q-Switched Nd:YAG:
ResurFX S/N:
Software Version:
Total handpiece Pulses:
IPL:
Nd:YAG:
Q-Switched Nd:YAG:
ResurFX:
Customer's Name:
Location:
Address:
Country:
Comments:
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-119

8.15.2 Preventive Maintenance Checklist

  At least 60 cm (2 ft.) from the wall at the rear and sides
  Adequate work area
Line supply of 100-230 VAC ±10% (90-253), 15A, 50/60 Hz with a

  suitable wall receptacle
  System far from heating ducts or other outlets
Inspect the system’s exterior surfaces for damage, including the power
  cable and plug.
  Remove the PC Display Unit
Remove all system panels, top, left, right, front, back, including ResurFX
  covers- inspect the cables, water tubes, harnesses and connectors, and
the interior’s general appearance.
  Fully drain both the cooling system’s water and the ResurFX water tank.
  Replace the deionizer filter.
  Clean the ResurFX inline water filter.
  Refill both of them with fresh deionized water.
Clean internal dust in the main system. Special attention to the radiator,
  power supply, and main radiator fan.
Clean internal dust in the ResurFX module. Pay special attention to the
  radiator, power supply, and fiber laser fans.
Turn the system on and check free air circulation and no water
  leakages.
  Check the system time and date.
  Reinstall the panels.
IPL Handpiece
  Perform IPL Calibration Device Factor Resetting
  Perform Calibration for Universal IPL handpiece
Perform Energy Test for Universal IPL handpiece with an external

  service power meter.
8-120
Perform IPL filter identification check for entire filter set. Check each
  filter visually for damage or contamination
Nd:YAG Handpiece
  Perform Nd:YAG Calibration Device Factor Resetting
  Perform calibration for Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece
  Perform Energy Test for Multi-Spot Nd:YAG handpiece
Perform Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Spot Size identification and Chiller check for
  entire LightGuide set. Check each LightGuide visually for damage or
contamination.
If the Multi-Spot Nd:YAG energy tests fail, perform appropriate power

  meter calibration procedures. Repeat handpiece calibration and then
repeat the energy test(s).
Q-Switched Nd:YAG Handpiece
  Perform Lens Assembly Identification Test.
Perform Q-Switched Nd:YAG Factor Calibration Using the

 
Service Screen on page 7-8 using the calibration device tool.
ResurFX Handpiece
  Perform Tip Identification for ResurFX.
Perform ResurFX Energy Test and Scan Shape Density Test and
  alignment (see ResurFX Energy Test and Scan Shape Density
Test on page 3-117 and page 6- 90).
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-121

Energy Test Results Table - IPL

[J/cm2]
515 13 0 0 - - 10 48-58
590 10 40 10 - - 35 166-202
695 6 60 6 60 6 17 81-99
Energy Test Results Table - Nd:YAG
Hollow T1* D1* T2 D2 T3 Required E1 E2 E3 AVG Acceptable

Multi-Spot [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] Fluence [J] [J] [J] [J] Range [J]
Tool [J/cm2]
6 mm 7 0 0 0 0 20 5.3 - 7.2
6 mm 6 70 6 70 6 150 40.1 - 54.2
2 x 4 mm 4 0 0 0 0 75 5.9 - 8.0
2 x 4mm 3 20 3 20 3 225 17.8 - 24.1
8-122
Energy Test Results Table -Q-Switched Nd:YAG

Table 8-3. Energy Test Results - Q-Switched Nd:YAG
(to be performed for toubleshooting only)
Tool Pulse Parameters from Measured Energy on External Power Meter

Service Screen
Q- Continuous firing for 10 sec Acceptable Range

Switched calculation*: [W]
Hollow
4Hz 650 Amp
Service
Tool
1.4 - 2.08
Test Results for M22 with Q-Switched Nd:YAG
# Spot Size Fluence Expected Result Actual Result

[mm] [J/cm2] [±20%]
1 2 14 11.2 - 16.8
2 2.5 9 7.23-10.8
3 3.5 4.6 3.68 - 5.52
4 5 2.25 1.8 - 2.7
5 6 1.6 1.28 - 1.92
ResurFX Energy Test and Scan Shape Density Test Tables
PB-1042431 Rev D 8-123

Figure 8-149 Shape Density Check
Figure 8-150 Coaxial Adjustment Example (UP/DOWN Correc-

tion)
I hereby certify that the preventive maintenance activities described in

this checklist have been performed successfully and to the satisfaction
of the customer.
This preventive maintenance was performed in accordance with the

instructions in the service manual and those items listed above.
Service Engineer Date

(Printed Name):
Signature:
8-124
Troubleshooting
C H A P T E R
TROUBLESHOOTING
9.1 Introduction
This chapter helps the FSE to identify, diagnose, and repair the fault in
the event of a malfunction. Except for the corrective actions that are
listed in the M22 operator's manual, no attempt should be made by the
end user to repair the system or any of its sub-systems.
WARNING
This equipment generates high voltages and emits pulsed
laser and light of high intensity which can cause serious
personal injury if handled improperly.
Before performing any maintenance, adjustment or repair

procedures, turn off the system and disconnect it from the
mains power, unless the procedure to be followed
necessitates otherwise.
Caution
All maintenance and repairs should be referred to and performed
only by a Lumenis-authorized field service engineer technician.
The M22 system is equipped with self-testing software that

continuously monitors system operation. If a system malfunction is
detected, an error message will appear on the display screen.
Figure 9-1 illustrates the system modes of operation.
PB-1042431 Rev D 9-1

Figure 9-1 System Modes of Operation Flow
9-2
Troubleshooting
9.2 Troubleshooting Guide Sections

The Troubleshooting Guide is divided into two sections:
Error Messages – Describes error messages that may appear on the

system's display following a system malfunction.
System Problems – Describes malfunction situations that are not
necessarily associated with an error message.
In each section of the Troubleshooting Guide, the system problems or

error messages are described using troubleshooting tables, as shown in
Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2 Sample Troubleshooting Table
Corrective actions may require the replacement of spare parts. This is

indicated in the Corrective Action/Parts Affected column by a bulleted
list of the parts in the order in which they are to be replaced. In all cases
when replacing parts, send all defective parts back to Lumenis and
reinstall all good parts back in the system or return them to the
warehouse.
9.3 Troubleshooting Guide
9.3.1 General
This section describes all error messages that may appear on the
system's display following a system malfunction.
Note
Error messages may appear intermittently if the mains power is
inadequate or unstable. Once the system issues an error message,
always check the mains power first.
PB-1042431 Rev D 9-3

The possible technical reasons for the appearance of each message are
explained after each error message in this section.
9.3.2 Error Messages - User

Table 9-1 presents several error messages that may appear on the
control panel's touch-screen, which can be corrected by the user. If the
corrective action does not resolve the problem, contact your Lumenis
distributor or service center and mention the error number and text.
Table 9-1. Error Messages for User
Error # Error Message Corrective Action
230 Head not connected. The treatment head is not connected or is

improperly connected to the port. Check the
connection and proceed with normal operation.
237 Laser stop pressed. The laser shut-off knob is engaged. Disengage
it and proceed with normal operation.
240 Remote interlock fault, The remote interlock of the M22 system is con-
please verify treatment nected the treatment room's door, and the door
room door is closed. is open. Close the door and resume operation.
250 Cooling overheating fault Turn the system off for at least 20 minutes and
- please wait 20 minutes resume normal operation.
for system to cool.
251 Water flow and level fault, Check the water tank in the system's rear panel.
verify water tank in place. Refill if necessary with deionized/distilled water.
353 Please restart the system Internal system malfunction; restart the system
and try again. and proceed with normal operation.
9.3.3 Error Messages - Service

Table 9-2 is a list of possible error messages that may require the
services of Lumenis-authorized personnel. Try to restart the system.If
the error message persists more than twice, shut the system down and
contact your Lumenis service representative.
A troubleshooting table is comprised of:
9-4
Troubleshooting
Error Number Includes (an ascending) heading number and the

following: Error number (in brackets), followed by the
error message text
Internal Name Description of the system error
Fault Warning message, Local Error, Fatal Error-R, Fatal
Description Error-NR, Laser Stop as a result
Corrective Provides the corrective action for each probable
Action/Parts cause, and the specific modules or components that
Affected are affected by the error, and which may need
replacement to correct the error.
Table 9-2. Error Messages for Service

No Internal Name Fault Description Corrective Action/
Parts Affected
1 IDS_ERROR_1 PC J1 (COM1) failed to Verify Upper Module
communicate with Interface connected to Lower
J9 Module
Communication error in init
state • Interface
2 IDS_UNRECOGNIZE_SUBSYS N/A N/A
TEM
10 IDS_COMM_FAILURE PC J1 (COM1) failed to Verify Upper Module
J9 Module
state • Interface
11 IDS_COMM_ERR_PING_FAIL PC J1 (COM1) failed to Verify Upper Module
J9 Module
state • Interface
12 IDS_COMM_ERR_FAIL_TO_TR PC J1 (COM1) failed to Verify Upper Module
ANSMIT communicate with Interface connected to Lower
J9 Module
state • Interface
223 IDS_SIMMER_ERROR Simmer Status Fault Use different IPL
Simmer Error handpiece to simulate
the error
224 IDS_SWITCHING_OVER_TEM Switching Module Over temp • SWM
P Fault • Interface
225 IDS_IGBT_LEAKAGE IGBT Leakage Current Fault • SWM
• Interface
PB-1042431 Rev D 9-5

226 IDS_HV_RELAY Verify that HVR Disc does not • HVR

stay in Upper position • SWM
HV Relay Status Fault
• Interface
227 IDS_SWITCHING_ENABLE_ER Switching Enable Fault • Interface
R Failure to set switching on - • HVPS
command from INTER. to
• SWM
HVPS to supply 24V to SWM
228 IDS_SIMMER_ON_ERR Simmer On Fault Use different IPL
Fail to set Simmer on handpiece to simulate
the error
• Head
• SWM
229 IDS_SWITCHING_ERR Switching module faults • SWM
multiple errors on Switching
230 IDS_HEAD_NOT_CONNECTE Head not connected Use different IPL
D handpiece to simulate
the error
• Head
• Interface
231 IDS_WATER_FLOW Water flow Fault-system • Flow Switch
recognized No water flow • Interface
while water should flow
• Water Pump
Flow switch fault
232 IDS_WATER_LEVEL Water level fault-verify that Re- Calibrate Water

green and orange LEDs are Level Sensor
illuminated constantly Add water
level switch fault
• Water Level
Sensor
• Interface
233 IDS_COOLING_FAN Cooling fan enable fault • Interface
failed to start cooling
234 IDS_PUMP_DIRECTION Pump flow direction fault • Interface
fail to set Pump direction
235 IDS_PUMP_ENABLE Pump Enable fault • Interface
Fail to set Pump on • HVPS
236 IDS_COOLING_ERR Cooling subsystem faults • Interface
multiple errors with Cooling • Water Pump
system
• HVPS
237 IDS_LASER_STOP_PRESSED Laser stop pressed • emergency
emergency button pressed switch
• Interface
9-6
Troubleshooting
238 IDS_COVER_OPEN Module Disconnected 52 Pins Harness(the

external module disconnected switch is soldered)
• Interface
239 IDS_EXT_INDICATION_ERRO External indication faults 52 Pins Harness(the
R multiple error of External switch is soldered)
indication subsystem
• Interface
240 IDS_DOOR_INTERLOCK Remote Interlock Fault, verify • Interlock connec-
Treatment Room door is tor
closed; Door interlock
• Interface
242 IDS_HEAD_ERROR Head SubSystem faults Use different IPL
multiple errors of Head handpiece to simulate
subsystem the error
• Head
• Interface
243 IDS_CHARGER_ERROR Charger fault N/A
244 IDS_SELFTEST_ERROR Self test fault N/A
245 IDS_SELFTEST_OFF_FAULT Self test Fault, system failed N/A
to initialize
246 IDS_PS_STATE_ERROR Power supply fault: different N/A
state than expected
247 IDS_PS_INTERNAL_ERROR Power supply fault: internal N/A
fault
248 IDS_PS_END_OF_CHARGE Power supply fault: not Use Charger
reached End Of charge Diagnostics Screen
failed to End of charge
• HVPS
• Interface
249 IDS_COOLING_TEMP_MIN Water Temperature below 10 cooling Temp below
Deg 10°C
250 IDS_COOLING_TEMP_MAX Cooling Overheating fault - Clean Air Vent
wait 20 minutes for System to Entrance
cool. Room Temp. is High
cooling Temp over 55
• Radiator
(Temp.Sensor)
251 IDS_WATER_LEVEL_AND_FL Water Flow and level fault verify water tank in
OW place; verify water
direction flow and level
• Interface
252 IDS_PARAMS_VERIFY_ERRO treatment parameters (GUI to • Interface
R Interface)check - failed • Software
Pulse parameters verification
• Computer
error
PB-1042431 Rev D 9-7

253 IDS_CURRENT_VERIFY_ERR treatment current (GUI to • Interface

OR Interface)check - failed • Software
Pulse current verification error
• Computer
254 IDS_HEAD_REPLACED Different Head identification Use different IPL
head in modality session is handpiece to simulate
different than the connected the error
head at start-up
• Head
• Interface
255 IDS_MISMATCH_DOOR_INTE Mismatch Door interlock IO's Door interlock has 2
RLOCK_IO FPGA-interlock different than lines, one goes to
DSP interlock DSP and other goes to
FPGA
Harness
• Interface
256 IDS_MISMATCH_EMERGENCY Mismatch Emergency buttons • Interface
_BUTTONS_IO IO's
FPGA-emergency IO different
then DSP emergency IO
257 IDS_SWITCHING_OVER_CUR Switching fault: Lamp over Use different IPL
RENT current handpiece to simulate
Over current the error
• Head
• SWM
• Interface
258 IDS_PS_5V_ABOVE_LIMIT Charger fault: 5V above limit Charger volt out of
range-recalibrate
• HVPS
• Interface
259 IDS_PS_5V_UNDER_LIMIT Charger fault:5v under limit Charger volt out of
range-recalibrate
• HVPS
• Interface
260 IDS_PS_12V_ABOVE_LIMIT Charger fault: 12V above limit Charger volt out of
range-recalibrate
• HVPS
• Interface
261 IDS_PS_12V_UNDER_LIMIT Charger fault:12v under limit Charger volt out of
range-recalibrate
• HVPS
• Interface
9-8
Troubleshooting
262 IDS_PS_FAN_ABOVE_LIMIT Charger fault: Fan volt above Charger volt out of
limit range-recalibrate
• HVPS
• Interface
263 IDS_PS_FAN_UNDER_LIMIT Charger fault:FAN volts under Charger volt out of
limit range-recalibrate
• HVPS
• Interface
264 IDS_PS_PUMP_ABOVE_LIMIT Charger fault: pump volts Charger volt out of
above limit range-recalibrate
• HVPS
• Interface
265 IDS_PS_PUMP_UNDER_LIMIT Charger fault:pump volts Charger volt out of
under limit range-recalibrate
• HVPS
• Interface
266 IDS_PS_TEC_ABOVE_LIMIT Charger fault: TEC volts Charger volt out of
above limit range-recalibrate
• HVPS
• Interface
267 IDS_PS_TEC_UNDER_LIMIT Charger fault:TEC volts under N/A
limit
268 IDS_PS_CAPACITORS_ABOV Charger fault: capacitors volts N/A
E_LIMIT above limit
269 IDS_PS_CAPACITORS_UNDE Charger fault:capacitors volts N/A
R_LIMIT under limit
270 Charger Error: End of Dump Use Charger
IDS_CHRGE_END_OF_DUMP_TI Timeout failure Diagnostics Screen
MEOUT End of Dump failure
• HVPS
• Interface
271 IDS_WATER_FLOW_SWITCH_FA Water flow switch failed, • Flow Switch
ULT display flow when no actual • Interface
pump flow
• HVPS
Water flow switch fault
272 IDS_HEAD_FACTOR_OUT_OF_R Head factor out of range Perform handpiece
ANGE the head factor is out of the factor and energy
allowed range calibration.
Use different IPL

handpiece to simulate
the error
PB-1042431 Rev D 9-9

273 IDS_SHUTTER_OPEN_IN_SELF_T Shutter failed to close Use Nd:YAG

EST the shutter in Nd:YAG, failed handpiece to simulate
to close in Self Test the error
Nd:YAG
Interface
300 IDS_HASP_KEY_IS_OK The system was upgraded Message
successfully
HASP messages
301 IDS_HASP_INTERNAL_ERROR Security Key Error!\nInternal Improper use of the
Error HASP. Bad HASP or
HASP messages connection.
302 IDS_HASP_DISCONNECTED_KEY Security Key Error!\nSecurity Improper use of the
Key Disconnected HASP. Bad HASP or
303 IDS_HASP_FOREIGN_MACHI Security Key Error!\nForeign Improper use of the

NE_KEY Key HASP. Bad HASP or
304 IDS_HASP_FOREIGN_APPLIC Security Key Error!\nThe Improper use of the
ATION_KEY main system key belongs to HASP. Bad HASP or
another Lumenis machine. connection.
\nInsert system and upgrade
keys and press OK when
ready!
HASP messages
305 IDS_HASP_NOT_SUPPORTED Security Key Error!\nKey is Improper use of the
not supported HASP. Bad HASP or
306 IDS_HASP_RAW_KEY Security Key Error!\nSecurity Improper use of the
key is not formatted HASP. Bad HASP or
307 IDS_HASP_FOREING_VENDO Security Key Error!\nNot Improper use of the

R_KEY Lumenis key HASP. Bad HASP or
308 IDS_HASP_DISCONNECTED_ Security Key Error!\nSecurity Improper use of the
UPGRADE_KEY is disconnected. HASP. Bad HASP or
\nPlease, plug in the security connection.
key and press OK
HASP messages
309 IDS_HASP_INVALID_UPGRAD Security Key Error!\nInvalid Improper use of the

E_KEY Security Key HASP. Bad HASP or
310 IDS_HASP_NOT_UPGRADE_K Security Key Error!\nKey is Improper use of the
EY not for update HASP. Bad HASP or
311 IDS_HASP_ALREADY_UPGRA Security Key Error!\nAlready Improper use of the
DED Updated HASP. Bad HASP or
9-10
Troubleshooting
312 IDS_HASP_WRONG_UPGRAD Security Key Error!\nWrong Improper use of the

E_PROTOCOL_VERSION Version HASP. Bad HASP or
313 IDS_HASP_FAILED_TO_ERAS Security Key Error!\nCould Improper use of the
E_UPGRADE_KEY not update the Security key HASP. Bad HASP or
314 IDS_HASP_INITIAL_READ_NO Security Key Error!\nNot Improper use of the

T_READY ready for update HASP. Bad HASP or
315 IDS_HASP_SUBSEQUENT_RE Security Key Error!\nUpdate Improper use of the
AD_TEMPORARY_LOCKED temporary locked HASP. Bad HASP or
316 IDS_HASP_OPERATION_STAR Security Key Error!\nThe Improper use of the

TED main system key is HASP. Bad HASP or
disconnected. connection.
\nInsert system and upgrade
keys and press OK when
ready!
HASP messages
317 IDS_HASP_TIMEOUT Security Key Error!\nTimeout Improper use of the
- couldn't update the key. HASP. Bad HASP or
\nPlease, try again.\nIf fails, connection.
contact Lumenis Support.
HASP messages
350 IDS_SOFT_PATCH_OK Completed successfully! Upgrade messages

351 IDS_SOFT_PATCH_INTERNAL Internal Error: please contact Upgrade messages
_ERROR Lumenis Support
352 IDS_SOFT_PATCH_OPEN_FIL Can not open the file. Please Upgrade messages
E_FAULT check if the update key is
inserted
353 IDS_SOFT_PATCH_THREAD_ Please, restart the machine Upgrade messages
FAULT and try again
354 IDS_SOFT_PATCH_OPEN_FIL Can not open the file. Please Upgrade messages
E_ERROR check if the update key is
inserted.
355 IDS_SOFT_PATCH_NO_PARA Bad update file. Please, Upgrade messages
MS_LINE contact Lumenis support.
356 IDS_SOFT_PATCH_EXTRACT_ Bad update file. Please, Upgrade messages
COMMAND_LINE_ERROR contact Lumenis support.
357 IDS_SOFT_PATCH_EXECUTIO Can not execute the software Upgrade messages
N_ERROR update.Please try again or
contact Lumenis support.
1000 IDS_NO_SYSTEM_ERROR System OK. N/A
1001 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_I2C_INV System fault: I2C invalid • Head
ALID_PARAM_ERROR parameters fault • Interface
PB-1042431 Rev D 9-11

1002 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_I2C_NO •
System fault: I2C NO DEVICE Head
_DEVICE_ACK_ERROR ACK • Interface
1003 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_I2C_AN System fault: I2C AN DEVICE • Head
_DEVICE_ACK_ERROR ACK ERROR • Interface
1004 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_I2C_BU System fault: I2C BUSY • Head
SY_ERROR ERROR • Interface
1005 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_I2C_TIM System fault: I2C TIMEOUT • Head
EOUT_ERROR ERROR • Interface
1006 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_I2C_INV System fault: I2C INVALID • Head
ALID_DATA_COUNT_ERROR DATA COUNTERROR • Interface
1007 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_I2C_INT System fault: I2C • Head
ERFACE_INSTANCE_ERROR INTERFACE INSTANCE • Interface
ERROR
1008 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_I2C_ILL System fault: I2C illegal status • Head
EGAL_STATUS_ERROR Error • Interface
1016 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_ONWWI System fault:ONE-WIRE • Head
RE_INTERFACE_INSTANCE_E INTERFACE INSTANCE • Nd:YAG PM
RROR ERROR
1017 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_ONWWI System fault: ONE-WIRE • Head
RE_BUSY_ERROR BUSY ERROR • Nd:YAG PM
1018 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_ONWWI System fault: ONE-WIRE NO • Head
RE_NO_PRESENCE_PULSE_ PRESENCE PULSE ERROR • Nd:YAG PM
ERROR
1019 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_ONWWI System fault: ONE-WIRE NO • Head
RE_NO_DEVICES_FOUND_ER DEVICES FOUND • Nd:YAG PM
ROR
1032 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_SPI_INT System fault: SPI • Interface
ERFACE_INSTANCE_ERRO INTERFACE INSTANCE
ERROR
1033 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_SPI_RE System fault: SPI RECEIVER • Interface
CEIVER_OVERRUN_FLAG_ER OVERRUN FLAG ERROR
ROR
1034 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_SPI_TX_ System fault: SPI TX BUF • Interface
BUF_FULL_ERROR FULL ERROR
1035 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_SPI_INT System fault: SPI INT FLAG • Interface
_FLAG_ERROR ERROR
1048 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_HEAD_ System fault: HEAD NO ID • Head
NO_ID_FOUND_ERROR FOUND ERROR • Interface
Fail to read Head SN -from
micro
1049 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_HEAD_I System fault: HEAD INVALID • Head
NVALID_PARAM_ERROR PARAM ERROR • Interface
Fail to read Head Data-from
micro
9-12
Troubleshooting
1050 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_HEAD_ system fault: The connected • Head

NO_LUMENIS_DEVICE head - No Lumenis Device • Interface
The connected head is not
Lumenis device
1064 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_POWER System fault:POWER METER Nd:YAG PM
_METER_INVALID_PARAM_ER INVALID PARAM ERROR
ROR Fail to read Nd:YAG PM data-
from micro
1065 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_POWER System fault:POWER METER Nd:YAG PM
_METER_NO_ID_FOUND_ERR NO ID FOUND ERROR
OR Fail to read Nd:YAG PM SN-
from micro
1080 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_ADC_IN System fault: ADC INVALID N/A
VALID_PARAM_FAULT PARAM ERROR
attempt to set incorrect
parameters to ADC
1081 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_FPGA_S System fault: error setting Interface
ET_PAREMA parameters in FPGA
fail to set FPGA prams
1082 IDS_SYSTEM_FAULT_FPGA_P System fault:FPGA pulse • Head

ULSE_ERROR safety error • Interface
the FPGA stop the pulse on
• SWM
safety
1096 IDS_DATA_LINK_STATUS_TRA System fault: Communication • Interface
NSMIT_INDEX_BUFFER_ERR error transmit buffer overflow.
OR the transmit buffer in the
controller reached overflow -
Controller to FPGA
1097 IDS_DATA_LINK_STATUS_PAC System fault: Communication • Interface
KET_CHECKSUM_ERROR error packet checksum error.
The received packet fail in
checksum state
1098 IDS_DATA_LINK_STATUS_LCK System fault: Communication • Interface
_TRANSMITTER_ERROR error transmit lock fail.
fail to transmit because the
transmit task didn’t complete
1099 IDS_DATA_LINK_STATUS_PAC System fault: Communication • Interface

KET_PAYLOAD_OVER_SIZE_E error packet payload
RROR oversize.
The received packet payload
size is over the maximum size
1100 IDS_DATA_LINK_STATUS_RE System fault: Communication • Interface
CEIVE_PACKET_ALLOCATE_E error receive packet allocation
RROR fail; Fail to allocate memory
for the received packet
PB-1042431 Rev D 9-13

1101 IDS_DATA_LINK_STATUS_RE System fault: Communication • Interface

CEIVE_PACKET_DATA_ALLOC error receive Data packet
ATE_ERROR allocation fail. Fail to allocate
memory for the received
packet data
1102 IDS_PROTOCOL_STATUS_FAI System fault: Communication • Interface
L_TRANSMIT_ALLOCATE error transmit packet
allocation fail; fail to allocate
memory for the transmit
packet
L_RECIVING_PING error ping receiving fail.
controller not receiving data
from PC (ping or commands)

L_TRANSMIT_PACKET error transmission fail.
controller fail to receive ack.
for transmitted message
1282 IDS_IPL_UNRECOGNIZE_SUB SubSystem recognition failure • IPL Head

SYSTEM fail to load IPL modality
1283 IDS_IPL_ENERGY_TO_CURR Energy to current algorithm • Interface
ENT failure; The calculation of • Computer
energy to Current in IPL
modality fail
1538 IDS_YAG_UNRECOGNIZE_SU SubSystem recognition failure • Nd:YAG Head
BSYSTEM Fail to load Nd:Yag modality
1539 IDS_YAG_ENERGY_TO_CURR Energy to current algorithm • Interface
ENT failure; the calculation of • Computer
energy to Current in Nd:YAG
modality failed
1540 IDS_SHUTTER_OPENED Shutter is open; shutter is • Nd:YAG Head
open in standby • Interface
1541 IDS_SAFETY_BUTTON Safety button operated in • Nd:YAG Head
Standby mode • Interface
safety button is on in standby
9-14
Troubleshooting
9.4 Malfunctions with No Error

Messages
Table 9-3 lists some possible power-related problems that may
manifest without an error message.If the corrective action listed in the
table does not solve the problem, contact Lumenis Service.
Table 9-3. Malfunctions with No error Message

Symptom Probable Cause Corrective Action
System does not 1. No AC power from wall 1. Check if AC power is available
function when plugged outlet. from wall outlet, and power cable
in and turned on. 2. Tripped circuit breaker is properly plugged into AC
(clinic power supply) outlet.
2. Reset circuit breaker (clinic
power supply).
System completely 1. Power surge. 1. Reset the system’s circuit
shuts down during 2. System malfunction breaker (turn it down and then
normal operation back up), restart the system and
resume normal operation.
2. Contact Lumenis Service
System will not switch System malfunction Contact Lumenis Service
to Ready mode.
Laser/light emission 1. System is not in Ready 1. Set the system to Ready mode.
does not occur when mode. 2. Contact Lumenis Service
treatment head trigger 2. System malfunction
is pressed.
System not 1. Control panel’s touch- 1. Calibrate the screen.
responding to touch- screen is out of 2. Contact Lumenis Service
screen commands calibration.
2. System malfunction
Laser/light emission Burnt LED
does not flash in
Ready mode.
PB-1042431 Rev D 9-15

9-16
Module Replacement
C H A P T E R
MODULE REPLACEMENT
10.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the replacement procedures for the M22 system modules.
WARNING
Before performing any replacement of modules or parts,
turn off the system and disconnect it from the main power,
unless the procedure to be followed indicates otherwise.
10.1.1 Structure of This Chapter

This chapter is divided first into modular group sections with level 1
headers that individually discuss the system's major modules.
Since most of the system's modules include more than one item of
hardware, each modular group section are divided into sub-sections
with level 2 headers, to discuss the replacement procedures for each of
the hardware items in that module.
Each of these level 2 sections are divided into two more level 3 sub-
sections, one discussing the removal and one discussing the installation
of the particular hardware item.
In instances where a complete system module consists of only one

hardware item, the level 3 sub-sections will not be employed.
When “Left” or “Right” are indicated, refer to the unit when facing
front.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-1

10.2 Covers Removal

M22 is protected by the following covers (see Figure 10-1):
• Front cover [1]

• Left and right side covers [2]
• Back cover [3]
• Left and right base panels [4]
• Top Cover [5], on which the PC unit assembly [6] is mounted.
• left and right handles [7].
.
Rear
Side
Left
Side 7
2
2
4 Right
Side
1 4
Front
Side
Figure 10-1 Covers Configuration
10-2
Module Replacement
Caution
Before removing the covers, always make sure that the system
is turned off and disconnected from the mains power supply.
10.2.1 Left/Right Side Base Panels Replacement

The left and right side base panels are identified by either an L or R
marked on the inner side of each panel. In is important to install the
correct panel in the proper location, as they are not interchangeable.
Figure 10-2 Left/Right Side Base Panels
Removal
1. Using a finger so as not to scratch the paint, carefully separate the
top of the side panel from the unit (see Figure 10-3).
2. Remove the side panel.
Figure 10-3 Removing Left/Right Base Side Panels
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-3

Installation
1. Align the upper and lower pin latches with the pins on the chassis
[A].
2. Firmly push the panel in so that it is on an even plane with the front
panel [B].
[B]
[A]
Figure 10-4 Installing Left/Right Side Base Panels
10.2.2 Front Cover Replacement
Removal
Before removing the front cover, the left and right side base panels
must be removed first. See Left/Right Side Base Panels
1. Remove the handpiece from the handpiece connector.

2. Remove the 4 Allen screws (two on each side) holding the front
panel to the chassis.
3. Remove the front panel.
10-4
Module Replacement
Figure 10-5 Removing Front Cover Screws
Installation
1. Mount the front panel on the front of the chassis, aligning the
handpiece connector and on/off button in their respective holes.
2. Tighten the 4 Allen screws (two on each side) to attach the front
panel to the chassis.
3. Install the left and right side base panels back in their locations.
4. Re-install the handpiece into the handpiece connector.
10.2.3 Left or Right Side Cover Replacement
Removal
Note
The removal instructions described below apply to the left cover.
Removal of right cover is identical but on the opposite side.
1. Release the four Allen screws (two in front and two in back; see
Figure 10-6).
2. Remove the side panel.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-5

front view back view
Figure 10-6 Removing Bracket Screws from the Left Side Cover
Installation
1. When installing the side covers, fit them on each side over the side
handles.
Figure 10-7 Installing the Side Covers
2. Tighten the four screws, 2 in front and two in back.
10-6
Module Replacement
10.2.4 Back Cover Replacement
Removal
Before removing the back cover, the water tank must first be removed.
(see Water Tank Replacement on page 10-31).

2. Remove the 4 Allen screws holding the back cover to the chassis
(see Figure 10-8).
metal latch metal latch
Figure 10-8 Removing Screws of Back Cover
Installing the Back Cover

1. Align and mount the back cover to the chassis.
2. Tighten the 4 Allen screws holding the back cover to the chassis.
3. Lock the top metal latches securely.
4. Reinstall the water tank.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-7

10.2.5 PC Unit Assembly Replacement
Removal

2. Pull the front locking latch all the way out.
Push in - In Position Pull out - Out Position
Figure 10-9 Front Locking Latch
3. Carefully lift the top PC Unit Assembly straight off the top cover
and put it aside.
Figure 10-10 Removing PC Unit Assembly
Installation
1. Make sure the front locking latch is pulled out (see Figure 10-9).
2. Mount the PC Unit Assembly onto the top cover.
10-8
Module Replacement
3. When the PC Unit Assembly is sitting firmly on the top cover, push
in the front locking latch (it should push in with a bit of friction).
4. Lock the metal latches on the top of the back cover.
Note
Make sure the PC Unit Assembly sits firmly on the top cover around
all sides. If the front locking latch does not push in all the way, the
height of PC unit assembly might need to be adjusted. If needed,
adjust the height level of the PC Unit Assembly by turning the height
adjustment pin on the inside of the assembly. Unscrew the small
locking screw and turn the pin clock-wise to lower the assembly; turn
the pin counter-clockwise to raise the assembly. Turn the pin in half-
turn increments until the correct height is achieved. Then tighten the
small locking screw.
Figure 10-11 Adjusting the Height Adjustment Pin
10.2.6 Top Cover Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the PC Unit Assembly (see PC Unit Assembly
2. Release the four Allen screws, two upper and two lower.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-9

upper
Allen
screws
inter-module connector
lower
Allen
screws
Figure 10-12 Top Cover Replacement
3. Remove the top cover.
Installation
1. Mount the top cover carefully, using the large mounting pins and
the inter-module connector as guides.
2. Tighten the four Allen screws, alternating between them as you
tighten; two upper and two lower (see Figure 10-12).
10.2.7 Replacing the Top Cover Alignment Pin

1. Remove the PC Unit Assembly as described in PC Unit Assembly
2. Once removed, carefully flip the PC unit Assembly on its front
side, with the top cover facing up.
3. With a screwdriver, may a mark on the threads of the Pin to
reference how deep the pin is currently located. This will help
install the new pin to a similar depth.
10-10
Module Replacement
4. Release the small Allen screw to release the pin, and manually
unscrew the pin from its location (see Figure 10-13).
Figure 10-13 Replacing Top Cover Alignment Pin
5. Take the new alignment pin and hold it next to the old pin; observe
where the scratch was made on the old pin and make an identical
scratch on the new pin.
6. Manually screw the new alignment pin into its place until you get to
the scratch mark. Tighten the small Allen screw.
10.2.8 Side Covers Alignment

When one or more of the covers are replaced, the new covers may
require alignment in order for them to be installed firmly so that they
interlock and close evenly without any gaps. When covers alignment is
needed, perform the following procedure:
1. Remove all the covers except for the handles.

2. Use the adjustment screws as shown in Figure 10-14 to raise or
lower the handles on which the side covers are mounted.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-11

Figure 10-14 Side Covers Alignment
10-12
Module Replacement
10.3 Electrical System Components

The electrical system includes the following components:
• Power Supply
• Service Panel (On/Off Main Circuit Breaker)
• Capacitor Bank
• Interface
• Switching Module
10.3.1 Power Supply Replacement
Removal
1. Remove all the covers in the following order (see Covers
Removal on page 10-2:
• back cover
• side cover
• front cover and base panels
• top cover
2. Remove the right side handle by removing the four Allen screws
holding the handle to the chassis (see Figure 10-15).
2 upper
screws
2 lower
screws
Figure 10-15 Right Handle Removal
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-13

3. From the right side of the system, remove the five Allen screws
holding the power supply to the chassis and its brackets. Make note
of a single long screw coming from the oval opening (see Figure
10-16).
long screw
Figure 10-16 Remove Five Allen Screws
4. Disconnect the P6 6-pin Molex connector from the power supply

(see Figure 10-17).
Note
It is not necessary to remove the tie-wrap holding the bracket.
10-14
Module Replacement
P6
Figure 10-17 Disconnect P6
5. Disconnect the J10 cable by removing the two side small screws,
one on each side (see Figure 10-18).
Figure 10-18 Disconnect J10
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-15

6. From the left side of the system, disconnect the following plugs
(see Figure 10-19):
• P7 by removing the two small screws, one on each side.
• HV plug going to the main AC power, by removing two small
screws, one on each side.
Note
Do not disconnect the three main AC power wires from the terminal
block.
HV to Main
P7 AC
Release
screw on
each side,
do not
disconnect
3 wires
from block.
Figure 10-19 Disconnect P7 and HV Plug, System Left Side
7. Remove the two Allen screws from the left side.
10-16
Module Replacement
Figure 10-20 Removing Two Allen Screws from Left Side
8. Disconnect P6 and the 14-pin Molex connector (see Figure 10-21).
Figure 10-21 Disconnect P6 and 14-Pin Connector
9. From the right side of the system, remove the two Allen screws of
the bracket (see Figure 10-22)
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-17

Figure 10-22 Remove Two Allen Screws from System Right
10. Carefully slide the power supply to the right, out of its shelf, taking
care not to damage the components on top of the power supply (see
Figure 10-23).
Figure 10-23 Slide Power Supply Out
11. When installing the new power supply, perform the above steps in
reverse order.
12. After the power supply has been replaced, perform Voltage
Calibration for Operating the Water Pump on page 8-37.
10-18
Module Replacement
10.3.2 Capacitor Bank Replacement
Removal
WARNING
The capacitor bank carries dangerous voltages.
Before replacing the module, always turn off the
system, disconnect it from the mains power supply,
and make sure that the capacitors are not charged.
1. Open the following covers:

• Back cover
• Left and Right covers
2. Disconnect the (+) and (-) HV terminals and the Ground terminal
(green/yellow) on both sides of the capacitor bank.
Note
Take note that this ground terminal wire is connected to the (+)
positive side of the terminal. If necessary, mark the wire to enable
proper reconnecting. Retighten the screws back onto their location
so as not to lose them.
System Left Side System Right Side
Figure 10-24 Disconnect HV Terminals
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-19

3. From the right system of the system, remove the single Allen screw
holding the capacitor bank frame to the chassis. Completely remove
the screw from the frame.
Figure 10-25 Remove Allen Screw of Capacitor Bank - Right Side
4. From the left system of the system, remove the two Allen screws
holding the capacitor bank frame to the chassis. Completely remove
the screws from the frame.
Figure 10-26 Remove Allen Screw of Capacitor Bank - Left Side
5. From the left side of the system, disconnect J973 to enable easier
removal of the capacitor bank.
10-20
Module Replacement
Figure 10-27 Disconnect Cable to Access Capacitor Bank
6. From the left side of the system, slide the capacitor bank out of its
location.
Figure 10-28 Remove Capacitor Bank
Caution
Use caution when sliding the capacitor bank out; loosen or
remove the pump, or carefully push the coolant tubes out of the
way if necessary.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-21

Installation
1. Install the capacitor bank by sliding it in place. Make sure that the
surrounding wires and tubes are not in the way. The side with the
(+) red HV wire on the left side enters the chassis first.
Insert this side

first
Figure 10-29 Installing Capacitor Bank
2. Push the capacitor bank all the way in so that it is flat against the
chassis.
3. From the left system of the system, tighten the two Allen screws
holding the capacitor bank frame to the chassis.
4. From the right system of the system, tighten the single Allen screw
holding the capacitor bank frame to the chassis.
5. Reconnect J973 plug.
6. Reconnect the (+) and (-) terminal wires on both sides, taking care
to reconnect them in the correct locations. Reconnect the ground
(green/yellow) wire.
10-22
Module Replacement
10.3.3 Switching Module Replacement
WARNING
The switching module carries dangerous voltages.
Before replacing the module, always turn off the unit
and disconnect it from the mains supply.
Removal
1. From the left side of the system, disconnect the following
connections from the switching module:
• J975
• J973
• green HV terminal block- release 2 small screws on either side
of the plug.
HV terminal block
J975
J973
Figure 10-30 Disconnect from Switching Module - Left Side
2. From the right side of the system, disconnect the following

connections:
• White 2-pin Molex plug going to the HV relay
• HV terminal block - release 2 small screws on either side of the
plug.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-23

HV terminal
block
2-pin Molex
Figure 10-31 Disconnect from Switching Module - Right Side
3. From the left side of the system, loosen and turn the ground screw
to enable easier removal of the switching module.
4. Remove four Allen screws holding switching module to the
chassis; two Allen screws on the left side and Allen screw holding
the ground wire; and a single screw on the right side (see Figure
10-32 and Figure 10-33).
Figure 10-32 Remove Allen Screws from Switching Module (1)
10-24
Module Replacement
Figure 10-33 Remove Allen Screws from Switching Module (2)
5. Carefully slide the switching module out of its location, making

sure that no wires are interfering while doing so.
Figure 10-34 Remove Switching Module
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-25

Installation
1. Install the switching module with its fan side entering the chassis
first. Make sure that the module is inserted all the way so that the
fan side of the module touches the metal frame of the chassis.
no gap between
metal frame and
module
Figure 10-35 Switching Module Installation
2. Perform the above steps in reverse order.
10.3.4 High Voltage Relay
WARNING
The HV Relay carries dangerous voltages. Before
replacing the module, always turn off the system,
disconnect it from the mains power supply, and make
sure that the capacitors are not charged.
Removal
For this procedure, the front and side covers must be removed. See
Covers Removal on page 10-2.
10-26
Module Replacement
1. Remove the three Allen screws holding the bracket for the right
side base panel, in order to gain access to the HV relay (see Figure
10-36).
Figure 10-36 Removing Allen Screws on Bracket
2. Remove the four Philips screws and remove the plastic protective
cover of the HV relay assembly in order to gain access to the HV
connections (see Figure 10-37).
gold-colored nut gold-colored nut
Figure 10-37 Removing Plastic Protective Cover
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-27

3. Remove the two gold nuts securing the HV wires (see Figure 10-
37).
WARNING
Do not mix the order of the wires when reconnecting; mark
the wires if necessary. (The cables on the right go to the
switching module; the cables on the left, with the
additional white cable, go to the head connector).
4. Remove the three Allen screws, two on the side and a single screw
on the bottom.
Figure 10-38 Remove Allen Screws from HV Relay Mount
5. Remove the two tie-wraps in the front of the system. Disconnect the
4-pin Molex harness connector supplying power to the relay and
fan.
Molex Plug
tie-wrap
tie-wrap
Figure 10-39 Disconnect Molex Plug
6. Gently remove the HV relay from its location.
10-28
Module Replacement
Installation
1. Connect the 4-pin Molex harness connector supplying power to the
relay and fan, making sure that the cable is routed on the inside of
the chassis. Use tie-wraps to secure the harness to the chassis.
2. Mount the HV relay, using the alignment pins on the chassis.
3. Tighten the three Allen screws, two on the side and a single screw
on the bottom.
4. Reconnect the HV cables, making sure that they are located in the
correct side. Secure the two gold nuts.
5. Reattach the plastic protective cover, tighten it with the four Philips
screws.
6. Tighten the three Allen screws holding the bracket for the right side
base panel, in order to gain access to the HV relay.
10.3.5 Interface Module

The interface module is mounted with four Allen screws, one in each
corner. The controller is mounted on top of the interface board.
The interface module has ten connectors and various ground

connections. Make sure to reconnect them to the same locations; mark
them if needed.
Removal
1. Disconnect the following connections (from the bottom clockwise):
• J1
• J3
• J7
• J11
• J10
• J9
• J12
• J8
• J6
• J2
• Ground connections
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-29

2. Remove the four Allen screws, two upper and two lower holding
the interface module to the chassis.
Note
The upper screws are sitting on mounting hooks; they may only need
to be loosened, not removed completely. Figure 10-40 shows how
to gain access to loosening the upper Allen screws.
Figure 10-40 Disconnect Plugs from Interface Module
3. Remove the interface module with its plate.
Installation
1. Mount the interface module by first making sure the upper screws
are aligned through the mounting hooks and tightening the upper
screws.
2. Reconnect all plugs that were previously disconnected.
3. Reconnect the Ground connections in their original locations.
The interface module is now installed. After installation of the interface
module is complete, do the following:
1. Perform system calibration (see Setting up the System for

Calibration on page 8-31).
2. Burn the system serial number (see Burning the System Serial
Number on page 8-56).
3. Perform Energy Test (see Universal IPL Energy Test on page 8-
67).
4. Perform Voltage Calibration for Operating the Water Pump on
page 8-37.
10-30
Module Replacement
10.4 Cooling System Components

Replacement
The cooling system includes the following components:
• Water tank
• Pump
• Water level sensor
• Flow switch
• Deionizer
• Radiator
• Fan
Each of these components may be replaced individually. The water
tank must be removed in order to gain access from the back of the
system.(see Water Tank Replacement on page 10-31).
Perform the water draining procedure before replacing any or all parts
of the cooling system.
10.4.1 Water Tank Replacement
Removal
1. Grasp the water tank’s handle and push the water tank’s release
button in (see Figure 10-41).
2. Carefully slide the water tank out of its location and set is aside.
Figure 10-41 Removing the Water Tank
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-31

Installation
1. Make sure that the quick connector on the machine side is released
(the release pin has been pushed in).
2. Slide the water tank onto its track and push in firmly until you hear
a “click”.
10.4.2 Pump Replacement
Removal
1. Before performing this procedure, first drain the water from the
system. See Draining/Filling the Cooling System on page 10-56.
2. Remove the following covers:
• right side cover (see Left or Right Side Cover Replacement on
page 10-5).
• back cover (see Back Cover Replacement on page 10-7).
3. Disconnect the Molex plug going to the pump (see Figure 10-42).
Molex Plug
Figure 10-42 Disconnecting Plug to Pump
4. Release the two spring loaded flat screws (see Figure 10-43).
10-32
Module Replacement
Figure 10-43 Release Two Spring-Loaded Flat Screws
5. Carefully slide the pump out of its location.

6. Release the two tube quick-connectors from the coolant tubes.
Figure 10-44 Release Quick-Connectors
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-33

Installation
1. When installing a new pump, use the two small alignment pins to
mount the pump in the proper position (see Figure 10-45).
Figure 10-45 Alignment Pins for Mounting Pump
2. When installing the pump, perform the above steps in reverse order.
10.4.3 Water Level Sensor Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the back panel (see Back Cover Replacement on page 10-
7).
2. Remove the four Allen screws holding the water level sensor and
remove the water level sensor.
3. Disconnect J4 connector plug.
10-34
Module Replacement
J4 plug
Figure 10-46 Replacing Water Level Sensor
Installation
1. To install the water level sensor, perform the above steps in reverse
order.
2. After installation is complete, perform Water Level Sensor
Calibration on page 8-26.
10.4.4 Flow Switch Replacement
Removal
1. Disconnect J3 Molex connector plug from the flow switch.

2. Cut the two tie-wraps holding the flow switch to the chassis
3. Disconnect the two quick-connectors going to the flow switch and
remove the flow switch.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-35

quick-connector
tie wraps
J3 Plug
quick-connector
Figure 10-47 Flow Switch Replacement
Installation
When installing the flow switch, perform the above steps in reverse
order.
10.4.5 Deionizer Replacement
Removal
1. Release the four Allen screws of the bracket holding the deionizer.
10-36
Module Replacement
Figure 10-48 Release Four Allen Screws on Deionizer Bracket
2. Slide the deionizer partially out of its location and disconnect the
the quick-connector from the back end of the deionizer.
Note
It is not necessary to remove the power supply or any other
components to remove the deionizer; Figure 10-49 illustrates where
to insert your hand to push the deionizer out from the back.
back-end
quick-
connector
Figure 10-49 Slide Deionizer Partially Out - View from Top
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-37

3. Disconnect the front quick-connector of the deionizer.
Figure 10-50 Front-End Quick-Connector
4. Carefully slide the deionizer all the way out of its location.
5. Cut the tie wrap.
Figure 10-51 Tie Wraps from Deionizer
Installation
When installing the deionizer, perform the above steps in reverse order.
10-38
Module Replacement
10.4.6 Radiator and Fan
Removal
1. Open the following covers:
• Back cover
• Right cover
2. Release the service panel by releasing 3 Allen screws (1 at the top
and 2 at the bottom), and move the service panel out of the way.
3. Remove the four screws attaching the radiator to the chassis.
Figure 10-52 Remove Four Screws of Radiator
4. Disconnect the temperature sensor harness plug.
Note
The sensor is part of the radiator; disconnect the harness only from
the plug; do not disconnect the temperature sensor from the radiator.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-39

Figure 10-53 Temperature Sensor Location
5. Carefully slide the radiator and fan partially out of their location.
6. Disconnect the two coolant tubes, one upper and one lower.
Installing the New Radiator for the First Time

The new radiator comes with a new temperature sensor; removing the
old temperature sensor from the old radiator is not necessary.
The new radiator comes with an additional quick-connect water

connection. This quick-connector is used to connect to the tube of the
“T” fitting. Since the “T” fitting is difficult to remove, the tube will be
cut at a point before the “T” fitting to accommodate the new quick-
connector. Figure 10-54 illustrates the connection before and after
installing the new radiator.
Straight
connect
Before After
Figure 10-54 Before and After Cutting the Tube
10-40
Module Replacement
This procedure needs to be performed only if replacing the radiator for

the first time. This procedure is not needed for any subsequent radiator
replacements.
to “T” fitting fan plug

(cutting side)
to water flow meter
temp. sensor plug
Figure 10-55 New Radiator and Fitting
To install a new radiator for the first time, do the following:
1. Disconnect the water flow meter tube.
Figure 10-56 Disconnecting Water Flow Meter Tube
2. Verify that there is no water in the tube. If there is water in the tube,
put down paper towels in the system to absorb any leakage before
proceeding.
3. With a cutter, cut the tube 5 cm from the “T” fitting on the side
going in the direction of the radiator.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-41

Figure 10-57 Cutting the Tube
4. Take the new straight fitting from the new radiator and attach it to
the tube you just cut.
connect this straight fitting to

the cut tube side
Figure 10-58 Straight Fitting Connection
5. Connect the new straight fitting to the quick-connector of the new

radiator.
6. Reconnect the temperature sensor plug and the fan plug.
7. Reinstall the radiator in its position.
8. After all parts are securely in place, turn on the system and check
for leaks.
Removing the Fan

1. Remove the Radiator out of its location.
2. Release the four screws holding the fan to the radiator.
3. Disconnect the 3-pin plug going to the fan.
10-42
Module Replacement
10.5 Computer Module Replacement

The M22 system's control panel is a complete computer system,
incorporating monitor and touch-screen. The computer incorporates the
Windows® XP Embedded operating system, the IPL, Nd:YAG
software applications and the patient database.
If the need arises, the computer module should be replaced as a single

unit. There are no FSE-serviceable parts inside the computer module.
10.5.1 PC Module Replacement
Replacing the PC Module

3. Release the 10 Allen sunken screws bordering the top cover as
shown in Figure 10-59.
Figure 10-59 10 Sunken Allen Screws
4. Remove the four Allen screws securing the computer to its location.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-43

Top edge
bottom
edge
Figure 10-60 Removing Four Allen Screws from Computer
5. Refer to Figure 10-60: slightly lift the computer module up to gain

access and disconnect the following cables on the top edge side:
• PWR (located on the side)
• COM1
• LAN
• Speaker
• external USB
• Ground (keep the nut and washer in a safe place so as not to
lose them.)
• HASP (keep the HASP; you will need it for the new computer
module.
6. From the bottom edge of the computer module, disconnect the
following cables:
• 2 USB plugs
• PC J3 plug
• GND connection (keep the nut and washer in a safe place so as
not to lose them.)
• COM2
• Inverter plug and
• LVDS plug
10-44
Module Replacement
• GNDs of the inverter and LVDS plugs

7. Remove the computer module by carefully lifting it out.
8. Install the new computer module by following the previous steps in
reverse order.
Note
Make sure to install the HASP from the old computer into the port on
the new computer.
9. After the PC module has been replaced, perform Voltage

Calibration for Operating the Water Pump on page 8-37.
Replacing the Compact Flash (CF)

The Compact Flash (CF) is the system’s “disk”. The CF can also be
removed (without being replaced) in the following cases:
• when using the CF on another computer

• when an external PC is desired to load full GUI software on the CF;
in this case, remove the CF and connect it with a card reader to a PC.
(See System Flash DSP Installation on page 8-16).
1. Follow steps 1 through 3 from the previous procedure to open the
PC Unit assembly.
2. Remove the four small Philips screws holding the computer plate
cover.
Figure 10-61 Removing Four Philips Screws from Computer Plate
3. Remove the CF by gently but firmly pulling on the tab.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-45

Figure 10-62 Removing Compact Flash
4. Install the new CF by following the previous steps in reverse order.
Replacing the HASP

The HASP includes:
• IPL configuration code

• system serial number
• Any other upgrade codes that have been installed on the system (for
example, after upgrading the system with Nd:YAG code).
The HASP can be used only for this specific system serial number, and
it cannot be used on another system; therefore, whenever replacing the
computer module, the HASP must be removed from the old computer
and installed in the new computer module.
1. Follow steps 1 through 3 from section 10.5.1 to open the PC Unit

assembly.
2. Remove the HASP from its USB port.
10-46
Module Replacement
Figure 10-63 Removing the HASP from the Computer.
10.5.2 System Monitor Replacement
Removal
3. Release the 10 Allen sunken screws bordering the top cover as
shown in Figure 10-59.
4. Turn the PC Unit Assembly back so that the monitor is facing up;
lift up the monitor and use a small Philips screwdriver to open the
eight Philips screws holding the monitor to its hinges (four on each
side).
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-47

eight Philips screws
Figure 10-64 Removing Eight Philips Screws Holding Monitor
5. Mark all tie wraps holding the three cables (two harnesses and 1
GND) going from the monitor to the computer; these tie wraps will
need to be replaced after installing the new monitor.
6. Refer to Figure 10-65: Disconnect the two ground connections
from the computer, and remove them with their nut and washer.
7. Disconnect the LVDS plug, USB plug, and inverter plug from the
computer.
GND LVDS Inverter GND USB
Figure 10-65 Disconnect Cables from Computer
8. Cut the ten tie-wraps holding the harnesses between the computer
and the monitor (see Figure 10-66).
10-48
Module Replacement
Figure 10-66 Cut Tie Wraps Holding Monitor Cables
9. Remove the monitor from its location, carefully removing the

disconnected harnesses through the hole at the back of the monitor.
Figure 10-67 Removing Monitor Harnesses Through Hole
Installation
1. Raise the hinges all the way out (towards the front) of the PC Unit
Assembly. Route all the monitor’s harnesses through the hole on
the left side of the monitor’s base pocket.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-49

Figure 10-68 Installing the Monitor
2. Tighten the eight hinge screws (four on each side). Tighten the
screw with only enough force to secure it; too much force can
damage the screw threads.after tightening, make sure the monitor is
sitting straight and firmly in its base pocket.
Figure 10-69 Tightening Screws on Monitor
3. Secure the harnesses with a tie wrap on each of the three grooves of
the middle hinge. Cut any extra tie-wrap material.
hinge grooves
Figure 10-70 Secure Harnesses with Tie Wrap on Hinge Grooves
10-50
Module Replacement
4. Continue to route the harness along its path, gathering the harnesses
into their tunnel and applying a tie wrap in the locations as shown
in Figure 10-66.
5. Reconnect the LVDS plug, USB plug, and inverter plug from the
computer (see Figure 10-65).
6. Reconnect the two ground connections to the computer, and secure
them with their nut and washer.
7. When installation is completed, perform touch-screen calibration.
Touch-Screen Calibration
Touch screen calibration should be performed if the touch-screen does
not respond or if the cursor appears significantly shifted from the touch
point.
The touch-screen calibration procedure allows you to calibrate the

screen. If the touch-screen does respond but the cursor appears slightly
shifted from the touch point, fine tuning of the touch-screen should be
sufficient to correct the shift.
To calibrate the touch-screen, do the following:
1. Access the Desktop (see page 8-26) and click twice on the My
Device folder.
My Device
Figure 10-71 Desktop
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-51

2. In the My Device folder, click twice on Windows.
Windows
Figure 10-72 Windows Folder
3. From the menu bar, click on View and then choose Options. The
Folder Options window appears.
Figure 10-73 Menu - View Options
4. In the Folder Options window, deselect all 3 checkboxes to disable

them.
10-52
Module Replacement
Figure 10-74 Deselect View Folder Options
5. When all 3 checkboxes are deselected, click OK. More files will
appear, which were hidden before; the folder TouchKit.exe appears.
Figure 10-75 Open TouchKit.EXE File
6. Double-click the TouchKit.exe icon; the Start Calibration window

appears.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-53

Figure 10-76 Start Calibration
7. Click on 25 Pts Cal button; calibration begins and a white screen

with a red “X” appears.
Figure 10-77 Touch-Screen Calibration (1)
10-54
Module Replacement
8. Touch the red X once; a sound is heard and the X turns green and
another red X appear, with several other X locations indicated in
green.
Figure 10-78 Touch-Screen Calibration (2)
9. Continue to press the red X where it appears. When all 25 X s are

touched the calibration screen reappears. Press OK.
10. From the menu bar, click on View and select Options; the Folder
Options window appears.
11. Select all 3 checkboxes to be enabled and press OK; all hidden files
(and the TouchKit.exe file) become hidden.
12. Turn OFF the systems and turn it back ON.
13. Verify a proper function of the touch-screen.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-55

10.6 Draining/Filling the Cooling System

The water level in the coolant tank is very important to maintain for
proper functioning and safety of the system. The water level should
always be between the MIN. LEVEL and MAX. LEVEL marks on the tank.
tank should be removed from the system during transportation of any
method.
10.6.1 Draining the Water

There are two methods of draining the water from the system:
• Draining the system using the software application

• Draining the system using the draining tool
Normally, the water is drained via the software application. If the

system is operating normally, drain the water via the software
application. (See Draining the Water Using the Software
Application on page 10-56). Use the draining tool for draining the
water from the system in cases when the system is not connected to the
mains wall power, or when the water pump is not working.
10.6.2 Draining the Water Using the Software

Application
To drain the cooling system (see Figure 10-79):
1. Empty the tank (see Draining the Water Using the Software
Application on page 10-56) and reconnect it to the system.
2. Access the Utility Menu screen.
3. Access the System Tools menu screen.
4. Press the Empty Water button; the Empty Water pop-up window
appears.
10-56
Module Replacement
Figure 10-79 Cooling System Draining Screen
5. Press the OK button; this will drive the coolant remaining in the
system into the tank. The cooling system is drained when the
progress bar is full.
When draining is complete, remove the water tank from the system and
pour the water out.
Removing the Water Tank

To remove the water tank, do the following; refer to Figure 10-80:
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-57

Figure 10-80 Coolant Tank Parts
1. Lift the water tank’s handle (1).

2. Press the black release button (2).
3. Pull the tank assembly (bottle and cap assembly) out of the system
(3).
Figure 10-81 Pulling the Tank Out of the System
10-58
Module Replacement
Draining the Cooling System Using the Draining Tool

Draining the water from the Cooling system using the draining tool in
the following cases:
• when the system is not connected to the mains wall power

• when the water pump is not working
The water draining tool includes In/Out tubes, pump, and a 12V DC
transformer which connects to the pump. The tool bypasses the
system’s pump, and using an external pump, drains the water in the
system back in the water tank.
Figure 10-82 Water Draining Tool
To drain the water from the system using the water draining tool, do the
following:
1. Remove the power cable from the mains wall power.

2. Disconnect the handpiece from the handpiece connector.
3. Remove the water tank from the system (see Water Tank
4. Open the water tank by twisting off the top cover counter-
clockwise (see Figure 10-83).
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-59

Figure 10-83 Opening the Water Tank
5. Pour the contents of the water tank out; dispose of it in a proper

manner.
6. Close the water tank cover and insert the water tank back into its
position.
7. Take the water draining tool and connect the In/Out tubes to the
handpiece connector: the black connector connects to the left side
and the white connector connects to the right side. It is important
that the connectors are inserted in the correct place. When
inserting the connectors, align the connector’s notches with the
grooves on the handpiece connector side, push the connector in
firmly, and turn the connector clockwise to lock (see Figure 10-84).
Figure 10-84 Inserting the In/Out Tubes
8. Insert the 12V DC power transformer’s Molex connector to the

plug on the drain tool (see Figure 10-85).
10-60
Module Replacement
Figure 10-85 Connect Power Transformer to Water Draining Tool
9. Make sure that the draining tool is situated on a lower level than the
system (see Figure 10-86).
Figure 10-86 Drain Tool Setup
10. Plug the power transformer into the mains wall power; the tool
starts operating and pumps the water into the water tank.
PB-1042431 Rev D 10-61

Note
The amount of water that should be pumped into in the empty water
tank should reach the MIN level marker on the water tank.
11. When the tubes are empty of water, or you hear that the pump
changes noise (no water is heard circulating), this means that there
is no more water in the tubes; unplug the transformer to avoid
pumping air into the pump which can damage the pump. Estimated
time for full draining is approximately 2 minutes.
12. Disconnect the black and white water connectors by first pushing
firmly in and turning the connector counter-clockwise.
Draining water is complete.
10.6.3 Filling the Water Tank

1. Remove the water tank from its location (see Removing the Water
Tank on page 10-57).
2. Unscrew the bottle from the cap assembly and fill it to the MAX line
with deionized/distilled water.
3. To reinstall, tighten the cap assembly and press the water tank in
until you feel it 'snap' into place.
10-62
Spare Parts Catalog
C H A P T E R
SPARE PARTS CATALOG
11.1 Introduction
This chapter is divided into sections according to the various modules.
Each section contains a list of the parts that are relevant to that section
and their respective part numbers. In most cases the tables are preceded
by appropriate illustrations, as shown in Figure 11-1.
Figure 11-1 Spare Parts List Example
PB-1042431 Rev D 11-1

The Item column of the table indicates the item number as shown in the
preceding illustration. The letters NS indicate that the item is not shown
in the illustration.
The Description column provides the item's name and/or a brief

description.
The Part No. column offers the item's part number, by which it should
be ordered from Lumenis.
This section is divided into several sub-sections, according to the

system's modules. Each sub-section contains the spare parts
information for its respective module.
Figure 11-2 through Figure 11-5 exhibits the system from various
angles, allowing easy location of the system's modules. A callout
pointing at each module indicates the section number (Sec.) where the
appropriate spare parts are listed.
To find the entry for a component:
1. Locate the module in Figure 11-2 through Figure 11-2, and refer to
the appropriate section as indicated by section numbers.
2. Within the appropriate section, locate the desired item in the
illustration and then find its part number in the appropriate table.
11-2
Spare Parts Catalog
Section 11.3 Electrical Components
Section 11.6
Miscellaneous
Section 11.2
Computer and
Display
Section 11.7
Treatment Heads &
Accessories
Section 11.6
Miscellaneous
Figure 11-2 System Front/Top View
PB-1042431 Rev D 11-3

Section 11.4 Cooling System
Figure 11-3 System Rear View
11-4
Spare Parts Catalog
Section 11.5 Covers and Exterior Components
Section 11.3 Electrical

Components
Figure 11-4 System Right View
PB-1042431 Rev D 11-5

Section 11.5 Covers and Exterior Components

Figure 11-5 System Left View
11-6
Spare Parts Catalog
11.2 Computer and Display

1 2
Right
Left
Figure 11-6 Computer and Display

1 PC Unit Assembly (does not include HASP and back cover) SP-1046931
2 GUI Computer (includes Compact Flash) SP-1046940
3 Display Assembly SP-1046950
4 Screen Left & Right Hinge Bracket SP-1047570
PB-1042431 Rev D 11-7

11.3 Electrical Components

1 2 3
4 5 6
7, 8 9 10
11
13
12
Figure 11-7 Electronic Components
11-8
Spare Parts Catalog

1 Relay Assembly SP-1047070
2 Capacitor Assembly SP-1047090
3 Switching Module SP-1047100
4 Charger Assembly (Power Supply) SP-1047110
Charger Cover SP-1047120
5 Interface Module SP-1047132
6 Machine Side Connector SP-1047150
7* Power Cable, 250 VAC WA0000125
8* Power Cable, 125 VAC 6005-0159
9 ON/OFF Switch and cable SP-1047140
10 52-pin internal Harness, Top Assembly SP-1047530
11 Emergency Button Harness HS-1018570
12 LVPS Board and cover SP-1068770
13 24V DC power supply SP-1068760
*This item is for reference only, it is not a spare part.
PB-1042431 Rev D 11-9

11.4 Cooling System

1 2
5
6
7 8
9
10 11 12
Figure 11-8 Cooling System Components
11-10
Spare Parts Catalog

1 Pump Assembly SP-1046960
2 Flow Switch SP-1046970
3 Radiator assembly and water tubes (with Temperature Sensor) SP-1046980
4 Water Bottle Assembly SP-1047010
5 Water Level Flow Sensor SP-1094601
6 Deionizing Water Filter SP-1047020
7 Water Elbow Fitting SP-1047030
8 System Cooling Fan SP-1046990
9 Water Plug-In Extended Elbow SP-1047040
10 Water fitting “T” SP-1047050
11 Clip for water tubing SP-1047060
12 Water Level sensor (for series number 002 only) SP-1047000
NS Chassis water bottle fitting (without coupling lock) MP0000046
NS Chassis water bottle fitting (with coupling lock) MP0000048
PB-1042431 Rev D 11-11

11.5 Covers and Exterior Components
2
1
5
L
4
back view front view
7
back view front view
10
8 9
Figure 11-9 Covers and Exterior Components
11-12
Spare Parts Catalog
1 Base Upper Cover SP-1047360

2 Base Front Cover SP-1047350
3 Base Left Cover SP-1047330
4 Base Right Cover SP-1047320
5 Left Panel Assy SP-1047400
6 Right Panel Assy SP-1047410
7 Base Back Cover SP-1047340
8 Right Handle Assy SP-1047430
9 Left Handle Assy SP-1047420
10 Compartment Door (for filter and lightguide storage) SP-1047450
H
PB-1042431 Rev D 11-13

11.6 Miscellaneous
2, 3, 4
5
1
7
6
8
9 10
11
12
13 14 15 16
Figure 11-10 Miscellaneous
11-14
Spare Parts Catalog

1 Draw Latch for rear cover SP-1047500
2 EMI shielding gasket E18 3 x 3 mm* SP-1047380
5 Locking Bracket Assy SP-1047460
6 Latch Cover SP-1047470
7 Upper Locking Part SP-1047490
8 Head Connector Cover SP-1047440
9 IPL LH Cradle SP-1047290
10 IPL RH Cradle SP-1047300
11 Lamp Cover SP-1047310
12 Locking Display Assembly SP-1047480
13 Interlock Connector (Male) SP-1047580
14 Interlock Connector (Female) SP-1094580
15 Chassis rubber foot (set of 7) SPHA0001014
16 Cart Wheel (set of 4) SP-0000010
*Figure 11-11 illustrates the locations for attaching the various gaskets.
Figure 11-11 Covers
PB-1042431 Rev D 11-15

11.7 Treatment Heads & Accessories

1 2
Figure 11-12 Treatment Heads

1 IPL Head SA-1026350
2 Nd:YAG Head SA-1020220
3 Light Guides and Filters (Storage location shown, see next
page for part numbers)
4 Light Guide and Filter Foam Storage Tray MI-1030330
NS Upgrade Nd:YAG Kit (includes calibration device, Nd:YAG UG-0005100
treatment Head, and software plug)
11-16
Spare Parts Catalog
Description Part Number QTY

Universal IPL ExpertFilters Set, includes one each of the KT6500062 1
following 7 filters: 515, 560, 590, 615, 640, 695, 755
Universal IPL ExpertFilters Set, includes one each of the KT-1048740 1
following 6 filters: 515, 560, 590, 615, 640, 695
515 nm Universal IPL ExpertFilter KT-1014900 1
Universal IPL SapphireCool Light guide Set, includes: KT6500071 1
SapphireCool Light guide, 8 x 15 mm KT6798000 1
SapphireCool Light guide, 15 x 35 mm KT6797001 1
Individual plastic cover for 8 x 15 mm SapphireCool Light guide MI-003514 1
Individual plastic cover for 15 x 35 mm SapphireCool Light guide MI-003515 1
IPL Safety Eyewear, physician, OD3 AX0000011 1
Opaque eye protectors for patients AX0000060 1
Coupling Gel - 0.25 Liter Bottle AX1009018 3
Coupling Gel - 1 Liter Bottle AX1009019 1
Multi-Spot Nd:YAG Module Upgrade Kit (optional), includes:
Multi-Spot Nd:YAG laser handpiece SA-1020220 1
Nd:YAG Handpeice Calibration Device SA-1033830 1
M22 Nd:YAG lightguide kit, includes: KT-1048770 1
SapphireCool Light guide 2x4 mm KT6794000 1
SapphireCool Light guide 6 mm∅ KT6795000 1
Multi-Spot & Q-Switched Nd:YAG safety eyewear AX0000066 2
Multi-Spot & Q-Switched Nd:YAG safety eyewear (physician, AX0000067 1
patient)

ResurFX Module Upgrade Kit (optional), includes:
ResurFX laser handpiece SA-1146410 1
ResurFX SapphireCool tip KT-10000965 1
ResurFX safety eyewear (physician) AX0000130 2
ResurFX safety eyewear (patient) AX-1000269 1
Footswitch SA-1138520 1
*For more details on ResurFX Module spare parts, see Chapter 6.
PB-1042431 Rev D 11-17


Q-Switched Nd:YAG Upgrade Kit (optional) includes:
Q-Switched Nd:YAG laser handpiece SA-1020221 1
Q-Switched Nd:YAG handpiece calibration device SA-1033835 1
M22 Q-Switched Lens Assembly & 6 mm Metal treatment KT-10024830 1
Tip Kit
Disposable treatment tip spot size 2.0 mm KT3750060 1
Multi-Spot Nd:YAG & Q-Switched Nd:YAG safety eyewear AX0000066 1
(Physician, patient)
Multi-Spot Nd:YAG & Q-Switched Nd:YAG safety eyewear AX0000067 1
(Physician, patient)
Opaque eye protectors (patient) AX0000060 1
*For more details on Q-Switched Nd:YAG spare parts, see Chapter 7.
11-18
Spare Parts Catalog
11.8 Special Tools

1 2
4 5 6
7 8
9 10
Figure 11-13 Special Tools
PB-1042431 Rev D 11-19


1 Jig, water level sensor calibration TA-1056020
2 Tool CPC Closing Nut TA-1031790
3 Tool CPC Front TA-1047240
4 52-pin extension harness assembly TA-1047220
5 System Calibration Tool TA-1043510
6 Handy Draining Tool TA-1039170
7 Ophir External Power Meter Display Unit TA0021010
8 Ophir Power Meter Detector Head MD1675900
9 Nd:YAG Calibration Device (Power Meter) SP-1047180
10 IPL Calibration Device (Power Meter) SP-1098370
11 M22 Service Manual (Includes book, CD, and wiring diagram) KTPB-1042431
NS System GUI Software SP-1047520
NS System DSP Software SP-1047550
NS Compact Flash 1 GB SP-1047560
11-20

PB-1042431 - D M22 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PB-1042431 - D M22 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aesthetic Treatment System

This manual has been prepared to aid Lumenis-authorized technical personnel to

Authorized Representative in the European Community

Manufactured by Lumenis Ltd.

DIRECTIVE 2012/19/EU on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment

By returning waste electrical and electronic equipment via the correct

Lumenis provides web-based collection, recycling and reporting arrangements

Federal (USA) law restricts prescription medical devices to sale by or

The M22 system is a precision, technical medical device that requires

Unauthorized modification of the hardware, software or specifications

The M22 system is a precision, technical medical device. If any

M22 System Operator Manual (P/N # UM-1024721)

Added Section 1.3.1 FSE

Updated Section 2.11

Revised Section 3.11

Revised Section 8.15

1.2 System Preparation ...................................................................................... 1-1

1.3 Scope of this Manual ................................................................................... 1-2

1.6 Introduction to the System........................................................................... 1-9

2.2 Software Safety Features (Software States) ................................................ 2-3

2.3 The Treatment Room................................................................................... 2-4

2.4 Major Precautions, Cautions and Warnings ................................................ 2-4

2.8 Operating Precautions................................................................................ 2-13

2.9 System Safety Features.............................................................................. 2-13

PB-1042431 Rev D vii

2.9.2 Emergency Shutoff Knob ............................................................................2-14

2.11 Warning, Certification and Identification Labels ...................................... 2-16

3.2 Facility Requirements.................................................................................. 3-2

viii PB-1042431 Rev D

Chapter 4: General Description

4.2 Indications for Use....................................................................................... 4-2

4.2.2 Vascular Lesions ..........................................................................................4-2

4.6 System Specifications................................................................................ 4-23

4.7 Environmental Requirements .................................................................... 4-24

Chapter 5: Functional Description

5.3 Industrial PC ................................................................................................ 5-7

5.8 Switching Module...................................................................................... 5-33

Chapter 6: ResurFX Module

6.2 Functional Description................................................................................. 6-3

6.3 Module Specifications ................................................................................. 6-7

6.4 Major Module Components......................................................................... 6-8

6.6 Footswitch ................................................................................................. 6-21

6.7 ResurFX Handpiece................................................................................... 6-22

6.8.3 ResurFX Module Screens ...........................................................................6-34

Chapter 7: Q-Switched Nd:YAG Laser

7.2 Functional Description................................................................................. 7-1

xii PB-1042431 Rev D

Chapter 8: Tests, Calibrations and

8.6 Fan RPM Voltage Calibration ................................................................... 8-39

8.7 IPL Head TEC DC Power Calibration....................................................... 8-41

8.8 High and Low System Temperature Calibration ....................................... 8-45

8.9 Capacitor Voltage Calibration ................................................................... 8-49

8.10 Capacitor Voltage Test .............................................................................. 8-54

8.11 Burning the System Serial Number ........................................................... 8-56

8.12 Procedures for Universal IPL Handpiece by Service ................................ 8-58

PB-1042431 Rev D xiii

8.13.2 Nd:YAG Handpiece Calibration Using the Nd:YAG Calibration Device8-93

9.2 Troubleshooting Guide Sections.................................................................. 9-3

9.3 Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................................ 9-3

Chapter 10: Module Replacement

xiv PB-1042431 Rev D

Chapter 11: Spare Parts Catalog

11.2 Computer and Display ............................................................................... 11-7